Skip to main content

Full text of "A century's progress in astronomy"

See other formats


A  Century's  Progress  in 
Astronomy 


A  Century's  Progress 


IN 


Astronomy 


BY 


HECTOR    MACPHERSON,   JUN. 

MEMBER  OF  THE  SOCIETfi  ASTRONOMIQUE  DE  FRANCE  ', 

MEMBER  OF  THE  SOCIETE  BEI.GE  D'ASTRONOMIE  ', 

AUTHOR  OF  'ASTRONOMERS  OF  TO-DAY' 


WILLIAM     BLACKWOOD     AND     SONS 

EDINBURGH    AND    LONDON 

MCMVI 


All  Rights  reserved 


PKEFACE. 


THE  present  volume  originated  in  a  desire  to 
present,  in  small  compass,  a  record  of  the  mar- 
vellous progress  in  astronomy  during  the  past 
hundred  years.  Indebtedness  should  be  acknow- 
ledged to  the  valuable  works  of  Professor  New- 
comb,  Professor  Schiaparelli,  Professor  Lowell, 
Professor  Young,  Sir  Robert  Ball,  Mr  Gore,  M. 
Flammarion,  and  Miss  Clerke,  who,  as  the 
historian  of  modern  astronomy,  occupies  a  place 
at  once  authoritative  and  unique. 

Portions  of  Chapters  II.  and  XII.  have  already 
appeared  in  the  form  of  an  article  on  the  Con- 
struction of  the  Heavens,  contributed  by  the 
writer  to  the  American  periodical,  'Popular 
Astronomy. ' 


BALERNO,  MID-LOTHIAN, 
October  1906. 


284153 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER   I. 

HERSCHEL    THE    PIONEER. 

PAOE 

Influence  of  Herschel's  work — His  characteristics — Birth  and 
early  years — Emigration  to  England — Caroline  Herschel 
— Discovery  of  Uranus — King's  Astronomer — Latter  years 
and  death — Death  of  Caroline  Herschel  1 


CHAPTER   II. 

HERSCHEL    THE    DISCOVERER. 

Solar  researches — Study  of  Venus — Of  Mars — The  Asteroids 
— Jupiter — Saturn — Discovery  of  satellites — Uranian  satel- 
lites— Cometary  researches — Motion  of  the  Solar  System — 
Discovery  of  binary  stars — Clusters  and  nebulae — Nebulous 
stars — The  Nebular  Hypothesis — Star-gauging — The  disc- 
theory — Subordinate  clusters — Abandonment  of  the  disc- 
theory —  Second  method  of  star -gauging  —  Estimate  of 
Herschel's  work  15 


CHAPTER   III. 

THE    SUN. 

Schwabe   and   the   sun-spot    period — Researches   of   Wolf, 
Lamont,   Sabine,    Gautier  —  Observations    of    Carrington 


Vlll  CONTENTS. 

and  Sporer — Career  and  work  of  Fraunhofer — Spectrum 
analysis — Work  of  Kirchhoff — Solar  eclipse  work — The 
Solar  prominences — Janssen  and  Lockyer — Huggins  and 
Zollner — Work  of  Young — The  Italian  spectroscopists, 
Secchi,  Eespighi,  Tacchini — Career  of  Tacchini — The  re- 
versing layer — The  Corona — Doppler's  principle — Rota- 
tion of  the  Sun — Work  of  Dune"r — Janssen's  solar  atlas — 
Maunder  and  magnetism — Solar  theories — Distance  of  the 
Sun — Summary  .  .  .  .  .  .43 


CHAPTEE   IV. 

THE   MOON. 

Life  and  work  of  Schroter  — Of  Madler— Of  Schmidt- 
Changes  on  the  Moon  —  Selenography  in  England — 
Lunar  atmosphere — Lunar  photography — Work  of  W.  H. 
Pickering — The  new  Selenography — The  Moon's  heat — 
Motion  of  the  Moon — Acceleration  of  the  Moon's  mean 
motion — Work  of  Laplace,  Adams,  Delaunay  .  .  65 


CHAPTER   V. 

THE    INNER    PLANETS. 

The  problem  of  Vulcan — Mercury — Work  of  Schroter — 
Schiaparelli,  his  life  and  work  —  Work  of  Lowell — 
Spectrum  of  Mercury — Venus — Rotation  period  :  work 
of  Schroter,  Di  Vico,  Schiaparelli,  Tacchini,  Lowell — 
Atmosphere  and  surface  of  Venus — The  Earth  :  variation 
of  latitude — Mars — Rotation  of  Mars — Surface — Discovery 
of  canals — Work  of  Schiaparelli  and  Lowell — Interpreta- 
tion of  the  canals — The  theory  of  intelligent  life — Spectrum 
of  Mars— Satellites— The  Asteroids— Bode's  law— Work 
of  Piazzi  and  Olbers — Application  of  photography  by  Wolf 
— Discovery  of  Eros  .  .  .  .  .  .80 


CONTENTS.  IX 

CHAPTEE  VI. 

THE    OUTER   PLANETS. 

Physical  condition  of  Jupiter — Work  of  Zollner  and  Proctor 
—The  red  spot— Satellites— Discovery  of  fifth  satellite — 
Sixth  and  seventh  satellites — Eings  of  Saturn :  Bond, 
Maxwell,  Keeler— Struve's  theory — Globe  of  Saturn — 
New  satellites — Uranus  and  its  satellites — Discovery  of 
Neptune — Adams  and  Le  Verrier — Satellite — Trans - 
Neptunian  planets  ......  103 


CHAPTEE   VII. 

COMETS. 

Life  and  work  of  Olbers — His  repulsion  theory — Life  and 
work  of  Encke — His  comet — Biela's  comet — Faye's  comet 
— Eeturn  of  Halley's  comet— Donati's  comet— Comet  of 
1861 — Spectroscopic  study  of  comets — Theory  of  Bredik- 
hine— Spectra  of  comets— Comets  of  1880  and  1882— The 
capture  theory — Cometary  photography  .  .  .123 


CHAPTEE    VIII. 

METEORS. 

Meteoric  shower  of  1833— Work  of  Olmsted— Work  of  Erman 
and  Kirkwood  —  Of  H.  A.  Newton  —  Adams  and  the 
meteoric  orbit — Shower  of  1866 — Connection  of  comets 
and  meteors — Work  of  Schiaparelli — Shower  of  meteors  in 
1872 — 'Le  Stelle  Cadenti' — Meteoric  observation — A.  S. 
Herschel  —  Work  of  Denning  —  Stationary  radiants  — 
Bolides  and  aerolites — Origin  of  aerolites  .  .  .138 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTEK    IX. 


THE    STARS. 

Distance  of  the  stars — Life  and  work  of  Bessel — Studies  of 
Struve — Life  and  work  of  Henderson — Work  of  Peters, 
Otto  Struve,  Brunnow,  and  Ball— Measures  of  Gill— 
Parallax  of  first-magnitude  stars — Relative  and  absolute 
parallax — Work  of  Kapteyn — Application  of  photography 
— Star- catalogues — Argelander's 'Durchmusterung' — Work 
of  Schonfeld— Work  of  Gould— The  '  Cape  Photographic 
Durchmusterung ' — Work  of  Gill  and  Kapteyn — Interna- 
tional chart  of  the  heavens — Work  of  Peck — Proper 
motions  of  the  stars — Star-drift — Discoveries  of  Proctor 
and  Flammarion  —  Radial  motion  —  Work  of  Huggins, 
Vogel,  and  Campbell — Solar  motion  .  .  .150 


CHAPTER    X. 


THE    LIGHT    OF    THE    STARS. 

Work  of  Fraunhofer  and  Donati — Life  and  work  of  Secchi 
—  His  types  of  spectra  —  Life  and  work  of  Huggins  — 
Photography  of  spectra — Life  and  work  of  Vogel — His 
classification  of  spectra — Work  of  Duner — Of  Pickering — 
Spectroscopic  catalogues  —  Analysis  of  spectra  —  Stellar 
photometry — Life  and  work  of  E.  C.  Pickering — Variable 
stars — Work  of  Goodricke — Of  Argelander,  Schmidt,  Heis, 
Schonfeld — Studies  of  Duner — Of  Gore — Photographic 
discoveries — Classification — Algol  variables  :  their  explan- 
ation —  Explanation  of  other  variables  —  r\  Argus  — 
Temporary  stars— Of  1848— Of  1866— Of  1876— Of  1885 
— Of  1892 — Photographic  discoveries — Nova  Persei,  1901 
—New  star  of  1903— Theories  of  temporary  stars  .  .169 


CONTENTS.  XI 

CHAPTER    XL 

STELLAR    SYSTEMS    AND    NEBULAE. 

Life  and  work  of  John  Herschel — Binary  stars— Computation 
of  orbits— Work  of  Wilhelm  Struve— Of  Otto  Struve— Of 
Burnham — Satellites  of  Sirius  and  Procyon — Astronomy 
of  the  invisible — Work  of  Pickering  and  Vogel — Spectro- 
scopic  binaries — Work  of  Be*lopolsky  and  Campbell — Star- 
clusters  —  Nature  of  nebulae  —  Spectroscopic  work  of 
Huggins  —  Of  Copeland — Nebular  photography — Work 
of  Eoberts,  Barnard,  Wolf— Of  Keeler  .  .  .197 

CHAPTER    XII. 

STELLAR    DISTRIBUTION    AND    THE    STRUCTURE    OF    THE 
UNIVERSE. 

Work  of  John  Herschel — Researches  of  Wilhelm  Struve — 
Extinction  of  light — Madler's  "  central  sun  " — Distribution 
of  nebulae — Work  of  Proctor — Aggregation  of  stars  on  the 
Galaxy  —  Work  of  Gore  and  Schiaparelli —  Studies  of 
Gould — Researches  of  Kapteyn — Of  Newcomb — Is  the 
Universe  limited  1  Newcomb's  argument — Observations  of 
Celoria  —  Researches  of  Seeliger  —  External  Universes  — 
Gore's  speculations  .  .  .  .  .  .214 

CHAPTER    XIII. 

CELESTIAL    EVOLUTION. 

Laplace's  nebular  hypothesis  —  Helmholtz  and  solar  con- 
traction—  Theories  of  solar  heat  —  Objections  to  La- 
place's theory — Faye's  hypothesis — Ball's  exposition — The 
meteoritic  theory  of  Proctor — Its  extension  by  Lockyer — 
Evolution  of  the  stars — Vogel's  order  of  evolution — Tidal 
friction  :  work  of  Darwin — See's  explanation  of  double 
stars — Future  of  the  Universe  227 


A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN 
ASTRONOMY, 


CHAPTER  I. 

HERSCHEL   THE    PIONEER. 

IN  astronomy,  as  in  other  sciences,  the  past 
hundred  years  has  been  a  period  of  unparalleled 
progress.  New  methods  have  been  devised, 
fresh  discoveries  have  been  made,  new  theories 
have  been  propounded ;  the  field  of  work  has 
widened  enormously.  In  fact,  the  science  of 
the  heavens  has  become  not  only  boundless  in 
its  possibilities,  but  more  awe-inspiring  and 
marvellous. 

To  whom  in  the  main  is  this  great  advance 
due  ?  To  the  great  pioneer  of  what  may  be 
called  modern  astronomy  —  William  Herschel. 
Not  only  did  Herschel  reconstruct  the  science 
and  widen  its  bounds,  but  his  powerful  genius 


2    \  'A.  .'CBKOTRY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 


directed  the  course  of  nineteenth  century  re- 
search. As  an  astronomical  observer  he  has 
never  been  surpassed.  In  the  breadth  of  his 
views  he  was  equalled  only  by  Newton  ;  and 
indeed  he  excelled  Newton  in  his  unwearied 
observations  and  his  sweeping  conceptions  of 
the  Universe.  To  quote  his  own  remark  to  the 
poet  Campbell,  he  "  looked  farther  into  space 
than  ever  human  being  did  before  him." 

Herschel  studied  astronomy  in  all  its  aspects. 
In  all  the  branches  of  modern  astronomy  he  was  a 
pioneer.  He  observed  the  Sun,  Moon,  and  planets, 
devoting  special  attention  to  Mars  and  Saturn. 
He  doubled  the  diameter  of  the  Solar  System 
by  the  discovery  of  Uranus.  He  discovered 
several  satellites  and  studied  comets.  He  was 
pre-eminently  the  founder  of  sidereal  astronomy. 
He  discovered  binary  stars,  thus  tracing  the  law 
of  gravitation  in  the  distant  star  -depths;  while 
to  him  is  due  the  credit  of  the  discovery  of  the 
motion  of  the  Solar  System.  He  founded  the 
study  of  star-clusters  and  nebulae,  propounded 
the  nebular  hypothesis,  and  devised  two  methods 
of  star  -gauging.  Above  all,  he  was  the  first 
to  attempt  the  solution  of  one  of  the  noblest 
problems  ever  attacked  by  man  —  the  structure 
of  the  Universe.  In  fact,  the  latter  problem 
was  the  end  and  aim  of  his  observations.  As 


HEKSCHEL   THE   PIONEER.  3 

Miss  Clerke  remarks,  "The  magnificence  of  the 
idea,  which  was  rooted  in  his  mind  from  the 
start,  places  him  apart  from  and  above  all  pre- 
ceding observers."  Most  of  the  departments 
of  modern  astronomy  find  a  meeting -place  in 
Herschel,  as  the  branches  run  to  the  root  of 
the  tree.  He  discussed  astronomy  from  every 
point  of  view.  Before,  however,  proceeding  to 
examine  the  work  of  this  great  man,  it  is  well 
to  note  a  few  of  his  characteristics.  These 
characteristics,  once  understood,  give  us  the 
key  to  his  researches.  Before  we  can  master 
Herschel  the  astronomer  we  must  understand 
Herschel  the  man. 

Notwithstanding  the  fact  that  Herschel  spent 
most  of  his  life  in  England,  and  that  he  is  in- 
cluded in  the  '  Dictionary  of  National  Biography/ 
he  was  pre-eminently  a  German.  Like  most 
Germans  his  style  of  writing  was  somewhat 
obscure,  and  this  was  emphasised  when  he  wrote 
in  English,  owing  to  his  imperfect  command  of 
the  language.  Had  he  written  in  German  as 
well  as  in  English,  he  would  probably  have  been 
better  understood  in  his  native  country,  where 
erroneous  views  of  his  theories  were  long  enter- 
tained. Even  so  distinguished  an  astronomer 
as  Wilhelm  Struve,  when  translating  Herschers 
papers  into  German,  made  a  mistake  when 


4       A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

translating  a  certain  passage,  which  leaves  the 
erroneous  impression  that  Herschel  believed  the 
Universe  to  be  infinite — a  mistake  which  would 
not  have  arisen  had  he  written  in  German. 

The  student  of  Herschel  should  also  be  careful 
in  quoting  the  views  of  the  great  astronomer. 
Had  Herschel  at  the  close  of  his  life  written 
a  volume  containing  his  final  views  on  the  con- 
struction of  the  heavens,  this  would  not  have 
been  necessary ;  but  Herschel  did  not  write  such 
a  volume.  His  researches  were  embodied  in  a 
series  of  papers  communicated  to  the  Royal 
Society  from  1780  to  1818.  As.  he  observed 
the  heavens  his  opinions  progressed,  so  that 
a  statement  of  his  views  at  any  given  time  was 
by  no  means  a  statement  of  his  final  opinions. 
The  late  R.  A.  Proctor,  who  was  the  first  great 
exponent  of  Herschel  in  England,  has  well  said : 
"  It  seems  to  have  been  supposed  that  his  papers 
could  be  treated  as  we  might  treat  such  a  work 
as  Sir  J.  Herschel's  '  Outlines  of  Astronomy ' ; 
that  extracts  might  be  made  from  any  part  of 
any  paper  without  reference  to  the  position 
which  the  paper  chanced  to  occupy  in  the 
entire  series." 

Herschel,  like  the  true  student  of  nature,  held 
theories  very  lightly.  They  were  to  him  but 
roads  to  the  truth.  Unlike  many  scientists, 


HERSCHEL   THE   PIONEER.  5 

he  did  not  interpret  observations  by  hypothesis : 
he  framed  his  theories  to  fit  his  observations.  If 
he  found  that  a  certain  theory  did  not  agree 
with  what  he  actually  saw  in  the  heavens,  he 
abandoned  it :  he  did  not  hesitate  to  change 
his  views  as  his  investigations  proceeded.  "  No 
fear  of  '  committing  himself,' "  says  Miss  Clerke 
in  her  admirable  work  on  *  The  Herschels/  "  de- 
terred him  from  imparting  the  thoughts  that 
accompanied  his  multitudinous  observations.  He 
felt  committed  to  nothing  but  truth/' 

In  the  mind  of  Herschel  imagination  and  ob- 
servation were  marvellously  blended.  He  was  a 
philosophical  astronomer.  Although  his  imagina- 
tion was  a  very  vivid  one  he  did  not  allow  his 
fancies  to  run  away  with  him,  as  Kepler  some- 
times did :  on  the  other  hand,  he  did  not,  like 
Flamsteed,  refrain  from  speculating  altogether. 
"We  ought,"  he  wrote  in  1785,  "to  avoid  two 
opposite  extremes.  If  we  indulge  a  fanciful  im- 
agination, and  build  worlds  of  our  own,  we  must 
not  wonder  at  our  going  wide  from  the  path 
of  truth  and  nature.  On  the  other  hand,  if 
we  add  observation  to  observation,  without  at- 
tempting to  draw  not  only  certain  conclusions 
but  also  conjectural  views  from  them,  we  offend 
against  the  very  end  for  which  only  observations 
ought  to  be  made." 


6       A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

These  characteristics — the  lightness  with  which 
he  held  his  theories,  his  vivid  imagination,  and 
his  philosophical  reasoning — are  the  secrets  of 
Herschel's  success  as  an  astronomer.  Nearly 
all  his  ideas  and  speculations  have  been  con- 
firmed. As  Arago  has  said,  "  We  cannot  but 
feel  a  deep  reverence  for  that  powerful  genius 
that  has  scarcely  ever  erred."  Herschel,  like 
all  other  great  students  of  Nature,  was  deeply 
religious.  He  could  not  observe  the  heavens 
without  feeling  awed  at  the  marvels  which  his 
telescopes  revealed.  In  his  own  words,  "It  is 
surely  a  very  laudable  thing  to  receive  instruc- 
tion from  the  Great  Workmaster  of  Nature." 

Friedrich  Wilhelm  Herschel,  born  in  Hanover 
on  November  15,  1738,  was  the  fourth  child  of 
Isaac  Herschel,  an  oboist  in  the  band  of  the 
Hanoverian  Guard.  Isaac  Herschel,  a  native 
of  Dresden,  was  an  accomplished  musician,  and 
all  his  children,  ten  in  number,  inherited  his 
talent.  Of  these  ten,  six  survived,  and  only 
two  became  famous.  These  were  William,  the 
great  astronomer,  and  his  sister  Caroline  (born 
on  March  16,  1750),  who  became  a  student  of 
the  heavens  only  second  to  her  brother. 

At  the  garrison  school  in  Hanover,  where 
the  Herschels  were  educated,  William  Herschel 
showed  intense  love  and  aptitude  for  learning, 


HERSCHEL   THE   PIONEER.  7 

and  was  more  diligent  and  persevering  than  his 
brother  Jacob,  his  senior  by  four  years.  In 
1753  he  became  oboist  in  the  band  of  the 
Hanoverian  Guard  in  which  his  father  was 
now  bandmaster.  In  her  valuable  memoirs,  his 
sister  relates  that  her  father  was  very  interested 
in  astronomy,  and  that  he  taught  his  children 
the  names  of  the  constellations.  William  became 
devoted  to  the  science,  and  constructed  a  small 
celestial  globe  on  which  equator  and  ecliptic 
were  engraved.  But  his  studies  were  much 
hampered.  His  mother  had  a  great  dislike  to 
learning :  she  had  no  sympathy  with  aspira- 
tions, and  tried  to  prevent  her  children  becom- 
ing well  educated.  Above  all,  the  Hanoverian 
Guard  was  ordered  to  England  in  1755,  when 
a  French  invasion  was  feared,  and  to  that 
country  Herschel  proceeded,  along  with  his 
father  and  brother. 

Returning  to  Germany  in  1756,  the  Hano- 
verian Guard  was  employed  the  following  year 
in  the  Seven  Years'  War.  Hanover  was  invaded 
by  the  French,  and,  conscription  being  the  rule, 
the  musicians  were  not  exempted  from  service. 
Under  the  command  of  the  Duke  of  Cumber- 
land the  Guard  suffered  a  terrible  defeat  at 
Hastenbeck.  William  Herschel  spent  the  night 
after  the  battle  in  a  ditch,  and  decided  that 


8       A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

soldiering  would  not  be  his  profession.  He 
deserted,  and,  with  the  consent  of  his  parents, 
he  sailed  for  England.  After  his  arrival  at 
Dover,  he  wandered  through  the  country  in 
search  of  musical  employment.  At  length,  in 
1760,  he  was  appointed  to  train  the  band  of 
the  Durham  Militia,  and  four  years  later  paid  a 
secret  visit  to  Hanover,  where  he  was  welcomed 
by  his  father,  whose  health  was  now  failing, 
and  by  his  sister  Caroline.  In  the  following 
year  he  was  promoted  to  the  post  of  organist 
at  Halifax,  and  in  1766  he  removed  to  Bath  as 
oboist  in  Linley's  Orchestra.  Finally,  in  1767, 
he  became  organist  in  the  new  Octagon  Chapel 
at  Bath.  Herschel  was  now  twenty-nine  years 
old,  and  known  as  a  famous  musician.  As  Miss 
Clerke  remarks :  "  The  Octagon  Chapel  soon 
became  a  centre  of  fashionable  attraction,  and 
he  soon  found  himself  lifted  on  the  wave  of 
public  favour.  Pupils  of  high  rank  thronged  to 
him,  and  his  lessons  often  mounted  to  thirty- 
five  a- week." 

In  the  year  of  his  appointment  his  father  died, 
aged  sixty,  after  a  life  of  trouble  and  hardship. 
His  death  was  a  great  blow  to  his  daughter 
Caroline,  whom  he  had  educated  when  her 
mother  was  from  home.  Caroline  Herschel  was 
naturally  possessed  of  musical  ability,  but  her 


HERSCHEL   THE   PIONEER.  9 

mother  and  elder  brother  had  determined  that 
she  should  be  a  housemaid, —  a  determination 
which  William,  who  was  devotedly  attached  to 
his  sister,  opposed.  Finally,  in  1772,  he  visited 
Hanover,  and  took  his  sister  to  England  with 
him  to  act  as  his  housekeeper.  But  for  her 
unwearied  devotion  it  is  doubtful  whether 
William  Herschel  would  have  become  the  great 
astronomer. 

About  the  time  of  his  appointment  in  Bath 
Herschel  commenced  the  study  of  languages  and 
mathematics,  reading  Maclaurin's  '  Fluxions '  and 
Ferguson's  '  Astronomy.'  The  perusal  of  the 
latter  volume  revived  his  love  for  astronomy. 
After  fourteen  or  sixteen  hours'  teaching  he 
would  retire  to  his  bedroom  and  read  of  the 
wonders  of  the  heavens.  His  interest  increased 
as  he  proceeded,  until,  in  his  own  words,  "I 
resolved  to  take  nothing  upon  trust,  but  to 
see  with  my  own  eyes  all  that  other  men  had 
seen  before  me."  Accordingly  he  hired  a  small 
reflector.  Inquiring  the  price  of  a  larger  instru- 
ment, he  found  it  to  be  quite  beyond  his  means. 
Then  in  1772,  when  his  sister  came  to  keep  his 
house  for  him,  he  resolved  to  make  his  own 
telescope.  First  he  tried  the  fitting  of  lenses 
into  pasteboard  tubes,  but  this  being  a  total 
failure,  he  bought  the  apparatus  of  a  Quaker 


10     A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

optician  who  had  constructed,  or  attempted  to 
construct,  reflecting  telescopes.  In  June  1773, 
assisted  by  his  sister  and  by  his  brother  Alex- 
ander, then  in  Bath,  he  commenced  work.  His 
first  speculum  mirror  was  five  inches  in  diameter ; 
and,  while  it  was  in  process  of  construction,  he 
was  obliged  to  hold  his  hands  on  it  for  sixteen 
hours  at  a  stretch,  while  his  sister  supplied 
his  food  and  read  'The  Arabian  Nights/  *  Don 
Quixote/  and  other  tales  aloud  to  him  to  pass 
the  time.  At  last,  after  two  hundred  failures, 
he  finished  a  5-inch  reflector,  and  on  March  4, 
1774,  he  observed  the  Orion  nebula.  No  sooner 
had  Herschel  commenced  his  celestial  explora- 
tions than  he  resolved  to  survey  the  entire 
heavens,  leaving  no  spot  unvisited. 

In  1775  he  commenced  his  review  of  the 
heavens,  but  finding  his  telescope  inadequate 
he  began  the  work  of  telescope -making  afresh. 
Meanwhile  he  had  much  to  distract  him  from 
astronomy.  In  1776  he  became  director  of  the 
Public  Concerts  at  Bath.  Yet  his  enthusiasm 
was  unbounded :  he  would  run  to  his  house 
between  the  acts  at  the  theatre  to  observe  the 
heavens.  In  1779,  when  observing  the  Moon 
from  the  street  in  front  of  his  house,  a  gentle- 
man asked  permission  to  see  the  celestial 
wonders,  a  request  which  Herschel  granted. 


HERSCHEL   THE   PIONEER.  11 

The  gentleman,  Dr  Watson  of  Bath,  introduced 
Herschel  to  the  Literary  Society,  and  we  find 
him  in  1780  contributing  two  papers  to  the 
Royal  Society  on  Mira  Ceti  and  the  Moon.  In 
the  same  year  he  commenced  his  second  review 
of  the  heavens,  and  during  its  progress  he  made 
his  first  great  discovery.  On  March  13,  1781, 
while  surveying  the  constellation  Gemini,  he 
discovered  a  faint  object  distinguished  by  a 
disc,  which  he  concluded  to  be  a  tailless  comet, 
but  which  was  soon  shown  to  be  a  new  planet 
beyond  the  orbit  of  Saturn.  This  was  the  first 
planetary  discovery  made  within  the  memory  of 
man.  King  George  III.  summoned  Herschel  to 
London,  and  gave  him  a  pension  of  £200  a-year, 
with  the  title  of  King's  Astronomer,  pardoning 
him  also  for  his  desertion  from  the  army  more 
than  twenty  years  previously.  Herschel  then 
named  the  new  planet  the  "  Georgium  Sidus," 
a  title  now  abandoned  and  replaced  by  Uranus. 
William  and  Caroline  Herschel  now  moved  to 
Datchet,  near  Windsor,  in  1785  to  Clay  Hall, 
and  finally,  in  1786,  to  Slough, — "the  spot  of 
all  the  world,"  said  Arago,  "  where  the  greatest 
number  of  discoveries  have  been  made."  Here 
Herschel  and  his  sister  worked  for  nearly  forty 
years.  He  communicated  to  the  Royal  Society 
paper  after  paper  on  astronomy  in  all  its  aspects. 


12     A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

He  also  continued  the  work  of  telescope-making, 
and  constructed,  in  1789,  his  40-foot  reflector, 
the  wonder  of  the  age.  In  1787  his  sister 
was  appointed  his  assistant,  and  together  the 
Herschels  worked  from  dusk  to  dawn.  Caroline 
Herschel  herself  detected  eight  comets  and 
numerous  nebulae.  She  relates  in  her  memoirs 
that  on  one  occasion,  while  she  was  acting  as 
assistant,  the  ink  froze  in  her  pen.  But  such 
inconveniences  mattered  not  to  the  Herschels. 
As  Miss  Clerke  has  well  remarked,  "  Every 
serene  dark  night  was  to  him  a  precious  oppor- 
tunity, availed  of  to  the  last  minute.  The 
thermometer  might  descend  below  zero,  ink 
might  freeze,  mirrors  might  crack ;  but,  pro- 
vided the  stars  shone,  he  and  his  sister  worked 
on  from  dusk  to  dawn.  .  .  .  On  one  occasion  he 
is  said  to  have  worked  without  intermission 
at  the  telescope  and  the  desk  for  seventy-two 
hours." 

Honours  were  showered  on  Herschel.  He  was 
knighted  in  1816,  and  became  President  of  the 
Royal  Astronomical  Society  in  1820,  besides 
receiving  several  honorary  degrees.  But  honours 
in  no  way  elated  him.  Advancing  years  in  no 
way  affected  his  wonderful  mind.  But  his  duties 
as  King's  Astronomer  necessitated  his  acting  as 
"  showman  of  the  heavens "  on  the  visits  of 


HERSCHEL    THE   PIONEER.  13 

royalties  to  Windsor,  often  after  a  whole  day's 
work,  when  rest  was  absolutely  necessary.  This 
tremendous  strain,  which  reflects  little  credit  on 
the  Court,  proved  too  much  for  the  old  man. 
His  health  began  to  give  way,  although  his 
mind  was  as  vigorous  as  ever. 

Herschel  contributed  his  last  paper  to  the 
Royal  Society  in  1818,  and  three  years  later 
sent  a  list  of  double  stars  to  the  new  Astro- 
nomical Society.  He  made  his  last  observation 
on  June  1,  1821.  His  strength  had  now  left 
him,  and  to  this  he  could  not  reconcile  himself. 
As  Miss  Clerke  puts  it,  "All  his  old  instincts 
were  still  alive,  only  the  bodily  power  to  carry 
out  their  behests  was  gone.  An  unparalleled 
career  of  achievement  left  him  unsatisfied  with 
what  he  had  done.  .  .  .  His  strong  nerves 
were  at  last  shattered."  After  a  prolonged 
period  of  failing  health  he  died  at  Slough,  at 
the  age  of  eighty-three,  on  August  25,  1822. 
On  September  7  he  was  buried  in  the  church- 
yard of  St  Laurence  at  Upton.  On  his  tomb- 
stone are  engraved  the  words — "  Ccelorum  perru- 
pit  claustra" — he  broke  through  the  barriers  of 
the  skies. 

The  death  of  her  brother  was  a  terrible  blow 
to  Caroline  Herschel.  Expecting  to  live  only 
a  twelvemonth,  she  returned  to  Hanover  to 


14     A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

the  home  of  her  brother,  Dietrich  Herschel. 
But  she  lived  twenty-five  years  among  people 
who  cared  nothing  for  astronomy.  She  was 
delighted  at  Sir  John  Herschel's  continuation 
of  his  father's  work.  She  compiled  a  catalogue 
of  all  the  clusters  and  nebulao  observed  by  her 
brother,  for  which  she  received  the  gold  medal 
of  the  Astronomical  Society,  and  she  was  created 
an  honorary  member.  In  1846  she  received  from 
the  King  of  Prussia  the  gold  medal  of  science. 
But  no  honours  made  her  in  any  way  elated. 
She  always  held  that  whoever  said  much  of 
her  said  too  little  of  her  brother.  After  a  pro- 
longed decline  of  health,  she  died  on  January  9, 
1848,  aged  ninety -seven  years,  and  was  buried 
beside  her  father  in  the  churchyard  of  the 
Gartengemeinde  at  Hanover,  leaving  behind  her 
a  noble  example  of  self-sacrifice  and  devotion. 


CHAPTER   II. 

HERSCHEL   THE    DISCOVERER. 

ONE  result  of  Herschel's  discoveries  among  the 
stars  and  nebulae  is  that  his  studies  of  the  Sun 
and  planets,  with  the  exception  of  the  discovery 
of  Uranus,  have  been  completely  thrown  into 
the  shade.  Nevertheless,  his  work  in  solar 
and  planetary  astronomy  alone  would  have 
gained  for  him  a  higher  position  in  astronomy 
than  his  contemporaries.  The  planets,  satellites, 
and  comets  were  all  attentively  studied  by  the 
great  astronomer ;  indeed,  the  scientific  inves- 
tigation of  the  surfaces  of  Mars  and  Saturn 
began  with  Herschel. 

"  His  attention  to  the  Sun,"  Miss  Clerke  truly 
remarks,  "  might  have  been  exclusive,  so  diligent 
was  his  scrutiny  of  its  shining  surface."  Sun- 
spots  were  specially  investigated  by  Herschel, 
who  closely  studied  their  peculiarities,  regarding 
them  as  depressions  in  the  solar  atmosphere. 
He  also  paid  much  attention  to  the  faculse,  but 


16     A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

could  not  observe  them  to  the  north  and  south 
of  the  Sun,  thus  proving  their  connection  with 
the  spots  which  are  confined  to  the  regions 
north  and  south  of  the  equator.  "  There  is  all 
over  the  Sun  a  great  unevenness,"  said  Herschel, 
"which  has  the  appearance  of  a  mixture  of 
small  points  of  an  unequal  light ;  but  they  are 
evidently  a  roughness  of  high  and  low  parts." 

Herschel's  solar  observations  were  very  valu- 
able, and  did  much  for  our  knowledge  of  the 
orb  of  day.  His  theory  of  the  Sun's  constitu- 
tion—  a  development  of  the  hypothesis  put 
forward  by  Alexander  Wilson  (1714-1786),  Pro- 
fessor of  Astronomy  in  Glasgow — was,  however, 
very  far  from  the  truth.  This  was  almost  the 
only  instance  in  which  Herschel  was  mistaken. 
He  regarded  the  Sun  as  a  cool,  dark  globe, 
"  a  very  eminent,  large,  and  lucid  planet, 
evidently  the  first,  or,  in  strictness  of  speaking, 
the  only  primary  one  of  our  system."  In  his 
opinion  an  extensive  atmosphere  surrounded  the 
Sun,  the  upper  stratum  forming  what  Schroter 
named  the  "photosphere."  This  atmosphere, 
estimated  as  two  or  three  thousand  miles  in 
depth,  was  regarded  as  giving  out  light  and 
heat.  Below  this  shining  atmosphere  there 
existed,  Herschel  believed,  a  region  of  clouds 
protecting  the  globe  of  the  Sun  from  the 


HERSCHEL   THE   DISCOVERER.  17 

glowing  atmosphere,  and  reflecting  much  of 
the  light  intercepted  by  them.  The  spots  were 
believed  to  be  openings  in  these  atmospheres, 
caused  by  the  action  of  winds,  the  umbra  or 
dark  portion  of  the  spot  thus  representing  the 
globe  of  the  Sun,  which  Herschel  believed  to 
be  "  richly  stored  with  inhabitants."  This  theory 
held  its  ground  for  many  years.  Newton,  it  is 
true,  believed  the  Sun  to  be  gaseous,  but  he 
propounded  no  hypothesis  of  its  constitution. 
Herschel's  theory,  on  the  other  hand,  was 
fully  developed,  plausible,  and  attractive.  It 
was  held  by  eminent  men  of  science  until 
1860,  when  the  revelations  of  the  spectroscope 
showed  it  to  be  quite  untenable.  The  theory 
was  supported  for  many  years  by  Sir  John 
Herschel,  who,  however,  abandoned  it  in  1864. 
Herschel  made  several  attempts  to  ascertain 
whether  any  connection  existed  between  the 
state  of  the  Sun  and  the  condition  of  the 
Earth.  In  1801  he  was  inclined  to  believe 
that  "  some  temporary  defect  of  vegetation " 
resulted  from  the  absence  of  sun-spots,  which, 
he  thought,  "may  lead  us  to  expect  a  copious 
emission  of  heat,  and,  therefore,  mild  seasons." 
Herschel  believed,  in  fact,  that  food  became 
dear  at  the  times  of  spot-minima.  It  may  be 
remarked  that  Herschel  never  noted  the  spot- 
is 


18      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

period  of  eleven  years,  the  discovery  of  which 
was  afterwards  made  by  Schwabe. 

Herschel  closely  scrutinised  the  surfaces  of 
the  planets.  Mercury  alone  was  neglected  by 
him.  From  1777  to  1793  he  observed  Venus, 
with  the  object  of  determining  the  rotation 
period,  but  he  was  unable  to  observe  any 
markings  on  the  surface  of  the  planet.  He 
did  not  place  reliance  on  Schroter's  value  of 
the  rotation  period  (about  twenty-three  hours). 
Meanwhile,  Schroter  announced  the  existence 
on  Venus  of  mountains  which  rose  to  five  or 
six  times  the  height  of  Chimborazo.  As  to 
these,  said  Herschel,  "  I  may  venture  to  say 
that  no  eye  which  is  not  considerably  better 
than  mine,  or  assisted  by  much  better  instru- 
ments, will  ever  get  a  sight  of  them."  Herschel 
demonstrated  the  existence  of  an  extensive 
atmosphere  round  Venus. 

"  The  analogy  between  Mars  and  the  Earth," 
Herschel  wrote  in  1783,  "is  perhaps  by  far  the 
greatest  in  the  whole  Solar  System."  In  1777 
he  began,  in  his  house  at  Bath,  a  series  of 
observations  on  the  red  planet,  which  yielded 
results  of  the  utmost  importance.  Fixing  his 
attention  on  the  white  spots  at  the  north  and 
south  poles, — discovered  by  Maraldi,  nephew  of 
Cassini, — he  soon  ascertained  the  fact  that  they 


HERSCHEL   THE    DISCOVERER.  19 

waxed  and  waned  in  size,  the  north  polar  cap 
shrinking  during  the  summer  of  the  northern 
hemisphere,  increasing  in  winter,  and  vice  versa 
in  the  southern  hemisphere.  He  regarded  the 
caps  as  masses  of  snow  and  ice  deposited  from 
"a  considerable,  though  moderate,  atmosphere," 
a  theory  now  generally  accepted.  Herschel  gave 
an  immense  impetus  to  the  study  of  Mars.  He 
carefully  examined  the  planet's  surface,  and  the 
dark  markings  were  regarded  by  him  as  oceans. 

During  Herschel's  lifetime  the  four  small 
planets,  Ceres,  Pallas,  Juno,  and  Vesta,  were 
discovered  by  Piazzi,  Olbers,  and  Harding.  The 
great  astronomer  was  much  interested  in  these 
small  worlds.  He  commenced  a  search  through 
the  Zodiacal  constellations  for  new  planets,  but 
failed.  He  was  of  opinion  that  many  minor 
planets  would  be  discovered.  Accepting  Gibers' 
theory  of  the  disruption  of  a  primitive  planet, 
Herschel  calculated  that  Mercury  might  be 
broken  up  into  35,000  globes  equal  to  Pallas. 
Meanwhile  Herschel  named  the  four  new  planets 
"Asteroids,"  owing  to  their  minute  size.  He 
estimated  the  diameter  of  Ceres  at  162  miles 
and  Pallas  at  147  miles,  but  Professor  Barnard's 
measures  have  shown  them  to  be  larger. 

In  connection  with  the  discovery  of  the 
Asteroids,  Herschel  showed  a  very  fine  spirit. 


20     A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

In  c  The  Edinburgh  Review '  Brougham  declared 
that  Herschel  had  devised  the  word  "  asteroid," 
so  that  the  discoveries  of  Piazzi  and  Olbers 
might  be  kept  on  a  lower  level  than  his  own 
discovery  of  Uranus.  Many  scientists  would 
have  been  much  offended  at  this  contemptible 
insult,  but  Herschel  merely  remarked  that  he 
had  incurred  "the  illiberal  criticism  of  'The 
Edinburgh  Review/  "  and  that  the  discovery  of 
the  Asteroids  "  added  more  to  the  ornament  of 
our  system  than  the  discovery  of  another  planet 
could  have  done." 

In  Herschel's  time  astronomers  were  acquainted 
with  three  of  the  outer  planets, — Jupiter,  Saturn, 
and  Uranus, — all  of  which  were  closely  studied 
by  the  great  astronomer.  The  belts  of  Jupiter 
were  supposed  by  him  to  be  analogous  to  the 
"  trade-winds  "  in  the  atmosphere  of  the  Earth ; 
while  the  drifting -spots  on  Jupiter's  disc  and 
their  irregular  movements  were  carefully  noted. 
His  observations  on  the  four  satellites  of  Jupiter 
led  him  to  believe  that,  like  our  Moon,  they 
rotated  on  their  axes  in  a  period  equal  to  that 
of  their  revolution  round  their  primary  —  an 
opinion  shared  by  Laplace,  and  by  many  modern 
astronomers. 

Herschel's  researches  regarding  Saturn  were, 
however,  much  more  important  than  those  on 


HERSCHEL   THE   DISCO VEBER.  21 

Jupiter.  The  globe  of  the  planet,  the  rings 
and  the  satellites,  were  favourite  objects  of 
study  at  Bath  and  Slough.  In  1794  he  per- 
ceived a  spot  on  the  surface  of  Saturn,  and 
made  the  first  determination  of  the  rotation  of 
the  planet,  which  he  fixed  as  10  hours  16 
minutes, — a  result  confirmed  by  modern  astron- 
omers. The  rings  were  subjected  to  the  closest 
scrutiny.  Herschel  believed  them  to  be  solid, 
and  he  also  considered  them  to  revolve  round 
Saturn  in  about  10  hours.  It  appears  that  he 
observed  the  famous  "  dusky  ring,"  but  supposed 
it  to  be  a  belt  on  the  surface  of  the  planet. 
He  also  studied  Cassini's  division  in  the  ring, 
ascertaining  its  reality. 

On  completing  his  famous  40 -foot  reflector, 
Herschel,  on  August  28,  1789,  turned  it  on 
Saturn  and  its  five  known  satellites.  Near  the 
planet,  and  in  the  plane  of  the  ring,  was  seen 
another  object,  which  Herschel  believed  to  be 
a  sixth  satellite.  To  settle  the  question,  he 
watched  the  planet  for  several  hours  to  see  if 
the  object  would  partake  in  the  planet's  motion. 
Finding  that  it  did,  he  announced  it  as  a  new 
satellite,  which  he  found  to  revolve  round 
Saturn  in  1  day  8  hours.  About  three  weeks 
later,  on  September  17,  Herschel  discovered 
another  satellite  yet  closer  to  Saturn,  revolving 


22     A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

round  the  planet  in  about  22  hours.  These 
two  satellites  were  not  seen  by  any  astronomers 
except  Herschel ;  and  after  his  death  they  could 
not  be  observed.  His  son,  however,  rediscovered 
them. 

The  eighth  satellite,  Japetus,  was  shown  by 
Herschel  to  rotate  on  its  axis  in  a  period  equal 
to  that  of  its  revolution,  and  his  observations 
were  confirmed  by  modern  observers.  "  I  can- 
not," Herschel  said,  "help  reflecting  with  some 
pleasure  on  the  discovery  of  an  analogy  which 
shows  that  a  certain  uniform  plan  is  carried 
on  among  the  secondaries  of  our  Solar  System ; 
and  we  may  conjecture  that  probably  most  of 
the  satellites  are  governed  by  the  same  law." 
In  April  1805  Herschel  observed  the  globe  of 
Saturn  to  present  not  a  spherical  but  a  "square- 
shouldered"  aspect.  It  was  for  long  believed 
that  this  was  an  optical  illusion ;  but  Proctor 
and  others  have  shown  that  it  is  quite  possible 
for  storms  in  Saturn's  atmosphere  to  cause  the 
planet's  apparent  distortion  in  shape. 

Herschel  paid  much  attention  to  the  planet 
Uranus,  which  he  discovered  on  March  13,  1781. 
The  discovery  of  Uranus,  which  was  mentioned 
in  a  previous  chapter,  was  in  a  sense  the  most 
striking  of  Herschel's  achievements.  Uranus  was 
the  first  planet  discovered  within  the  memory 


HERSCHEL   THE    DISCOVERER.  23 

of  man :  besides,  the  discovery  enlarged  the 
diameter  of  the  Solar  System  from  886  to 
1772  millions  of  miles.  Throughout  his  life- 
time Herschel  referred  to  the  planet  as  the 
"Georgium  Sidus,"  out  of  gratitude  to  George 
III.  for  appointing  him  King's  Astronomer;  but 
the  astronomers  of  France  and  Germany,  who, 
as  Sir  Robert  Ball  remarks,  "  saw  no  reason 
why  the  King  of  England  should  be  associated 
with  Jupiter  and  Saturn,"  opposed  this  term. 
Lalande  called  the  planet  "  Herschel,"  but 
Herschel's  countrymen,  the  Germans,  named  it 
Uranus,  in  keeping  with  the  custom  of  desig- 
nating the  planets  from  the  Greek  mythology. 
The  name  of  Uranus  ultimately  prevailed. 

In  January  1787  Herschel  discovered  two 
satellites  to  Uranus,  with  the  aid  of  his  20- 
foot  telescope.  These  satellites  he  believed  to 
revolve  round  Uranus  in  8  days  and  13  days 
respectively,  and  accordingly  he  made  a  draw- 
ing of  what  their  positions  should  be  on 
February  10.  On  that  day  he  found  them  in 
their  predicted  places.  In  1797  he  announced 
that  the  satellites  revolved  round  Uranus  in 
orbits  at  right  angles  to  the  ecliptic,  and  in 
a  retrograde  direction.  In  subsequent  years 
Herschel  believed  that  he  had  discovered  other 
four  satellites  to  Uranus,  but  he  was  unable 


24     A  CENTUKY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

to  confirm  his  belief.  As  Mr  Gore  says,  some 
of  the  satellites  "  must,  therefore,  have  been 
either  optical  'ghosts'  or  else  small  fixed  stars 
which  happened  to  be  near  the  planet's  path  at 
the  time  of  observation.  Herschel  also  suspected 
that  he  could  see  traces  of  rings  round  Uranus 
like  those  round  Saturn,  but  his  observation 
was  never  confirmed,  either  by  himself  or  other 
observers." 

Although  Herschel  made  several  important 
observations  on  the  Moon,  and  measured  the 
heights  of  the  lunar  mountains,  he  was  not 
a  devoted  student  of  our  satellite.  Caroline 
Herschel  remarks  in  her  memoirs  that  if  it 
had  not  been  for  clouds  or  moonlight,  neither 
her  brother  nor  herself  would  have  got  any 
sleep ;  adding  that  Herschel  on  the  moonlight 
nights  prepared  his  papers  or  made  visits  to 
London.  However,  he  did  make  some  investiga- 
tions, and  in  1783  and  1787  believed  himself 
to  have  witnessed  the  eruption  of  three  lunar 
volcanoes.  He  afterwards  concluded,  however, 
that  what  he  believed  to  be  eruptions  was  really 
the  reflexion  of  earth  -  shine  from  the  white 
peaks  of  the  lunar  mountains.  Herschel  never 
discovered  a  comet,  leaving  that  branch  of 
astronomy  to  his  sister,  who  discovered  eight 
of  these  objects.  He  was,  however,  much  in- 


HERSCHEL  THE   DISCOVERER.  25 

terested  in  comets,  and  attentively  studied  them, 
introducing  the  terms  of  "  head,"  "  nucleus,"  and 
"coma."  Herschel  anticipated  the  view  that 
comets  are  not  lasting,  but  are  partly  disin- 
tegrated at  their  perihelion  passages.  He  was 
of  opinion  that  they  travelled  from  star  to  star. 
The  extent  of  their  tails  and  appendages  he 
thought  to  be  a  test  of  their  age. 

We  have  now  completed  our  sketch  of 
Herschel's  important  labours  regarding  our 
Solar  System.  As  Miss  Clerke  says,  "A  whole 
cycle  of  discoveries  and  successful  investigations 
began  and  ended  with  him."  But  through  ob- 
serving the  stars  he  made  a  further  discovery 
in  connection  with  the  Solar  System;  indeed, 
one  of  the  greatest  discoveries  in  the  history 
of  astronomy — the  movement  through  space  of 
the  Sun,  carrying  with  it  planets  and  comets. 

"If  the  proper  motion  of  the  stars  be  ad- 
mitted," said  Herschel,  "who  can  deny  that  of 
our  Sun?"  Of  course  it  was  plain  that  the 
motion  of  the  Sun  could  only  be  detected 
through  the  resulting  apparent  motion  of  the 
stars.  Thus,  if  the  Sun  is  moving  in  a  certain 
direction,  the  stars  in  front  will  appear  to  open 
out,  while  those  behind  will  close  up.  But  the 
problem  is  by  no  means  so  easy  as  this.  The 
stars  are  also  in  motion,  and,  before  the  solar 


26     A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

motion  can  be  discovered,  the  proper  motions  of 
the  stars — themselves  very  minute — have  to  be 
decomposed  into  two  parts,  the  real  motion  of 
the  star,  and  the  apparent  motion,  resulting 
from  the  movement  of  the  Solar  System.  To 
any  astronomer  but  Herschel  the  problem  would 
have  been  insoluble.  Only  sixty  years  had 
elapsed  since  Halley  had  announced  the  proper 
motions  of  the  brighter  stars  which  had  been 
previously  supposed  to  be  immovable  —  hence 
the  name  of  "fixed  stars."  Herschel  did  not 
deal  with  the  motions  of  many  stars.  Only  a 
few  proper  motions  were  known  with  accuracy 
when  he  attacked  the  problem  in  1783.  Making 
use  of  the  proper  motions  of  seven  stars,  and 
separating  the  real  from  the  apparent  motion, 
he  found  that  the  Solar  System  was  moving 
towards  a  point  in  the  constellation  Hercules, 
the  "apex"  being  marked  by  the  star  X  Her- 
culis.  The  rate  of  the  solar  motion,  Herschel 
thought,  was  "certainly  not  less  than  that 
which  the  Earth  has  in  her  annual  orbit."  This 
extraordinary  discovery  was  one  of  Herschel's 
greatest  works.  "  Its  directness  and  apparent 
artlessness,"  Miss  Clerke  remarks,  "  strike  us 
dumb  with  wonder."  In  1805  Herschel  again 
attacked  the  subject,  utilising  the  proper  motions 
of  thirty-six  stars.  His  second  inquiry,  on  the 


HERSCHEL   THE   DISCOVERER.  2*7 

whole,  confirmed  his  previous  result,  the  "  apex " 
being  again  situated  in  Hercules ;  but  the 
determination  of  1783  was  probably  the  more 
accurate  of  the  two. 

Herschel  was  far  in  advance  of  his  time  re- 
garding the  solar  motion.  The  two  greatest 
astronomers  of  the  next  generation,  Bessel  and 
Sir  John  Herschel,  rejected  the  results  reached 
by  Sir  William  Herschel.  But  in  1837  Argel- 
ander,  after  a  profound  mathematical  discussion, 
confirmed  Herschel's  views,  and  proved  the  solar 
motion  to  be  a  reality.  Since  that  date  the 
problem  has  been  attacked  by  various  methods 
by  Otto  Struve,  Gauss,  Madler,  Airy,  Dunkin, 
Ludwig  Struve,  Newcomb,  Kapteyn,  Campbell, 
and  others,  with  the  result  that  the  reality  of 
the  solar  motion  and  of  the  direction  fixed  by 
Herschel  has  been  proved  beyond  a  doubt.  As 
Sir  Robert  Ball  well  remarks,  mathematicians 
have  exhausted  every  refinement,  "  but  only 
to  confirm  the  truth  of  that  splendid  theory 
which  seems  to  have  been  one  of  the  flashes 
of  Herschel's  genius." 

In  his  volume  '  Herschel  and  his  Work/  Mr 
James  Sime  writes:  "To  Herschel  belongs  the 
credit  not  merely  of  having  suspected  the  revolu- 
tion of  sun  around  sun  in  the  far-distant  realms 
of  space,  but  also  of  actually  detecting  that  this 


28     A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

was  going  on  among  the  stars."  Throughout  his 
career  double  stars  were  favourite  objects  of 
observation.  The  study  of  double  stars  was  com- 
menced by  Herschel  while  a  musician  in  Bath. 
Before  his  day,  of  course,  double  stars  had  been 
discovered  and  studied,  but  it  was  believed  that 
the  proximity  of  two  stars  was  merely  an  optical 
accident,  the  brighter  star  being  much  nearer  to 
us  than  the  other.  Herschel,  at  first  sharing  the 
general  view,  observed  double  stars  in  the  hope 
of  measuring  their  relative  parallaxes  ;  assuming 
one  star  to  be  much  farther  away  from  the  Solar 
System  than  another,  he  attempted  to  measure 
the  parallactic  displacement  of  the  brighter  star 
relatively  to  the  position  of  the  fainter.  "  This," 
he  afterwards  wrote,  "introduced  a  new  series 
of  observations.  I  resolved  to  examine  every 
star  in  the  heavens  with  the  utmost  attention, 
that  I  might  fix  my  observations  upon  those  that 
would  best  answer  my  end.  I  took  some  pains 
to  find  out  what  double  stars  had  been  recorded 
by  astronomers ;  but  my  situation  permitted  me 
not  to  consult  extensive  libraries,  nor,  indeed, 
was  it  very  material ;  for  as  I  intended  to  view 
the  heavens  myself,  Nature,  that  great  volume, 
appeared  to  me  to  contain  the  best  catalogue." 

Herschel,  on  January  10,  1782,  submitted  to 
the   Eoyal   Society   a   catalogue  of  269   double 


HERSCHEL   THE   DISCOVERER.  29 

stars :  of  these  he  himself  discovered  227.  In 
December  1784  he  forwarded  another  catalogue, 
containing  434  stars.  He  soon  found  that  he 
was  unable  to  measure  stellar  parallax,  and  the 
idea  dawned  on  him  that  the  double  stars  were 
physically  connected  by  the  law  of  gravitation, 
though  he  made  no  announcement  to  that  effect 
for  many  years.  On  July  1,  1802,  Herschel  in- 
formed the  Royal  Society  that  "  casual  situations 
will  not  account  for  the  multiplied  phenomena 
of  double  stars.  ...  I  shall  soon  communicate 
a  series  of  observations,  proving  that  many  of 
them  have  already  changed  their  situation  in  a 
progressive  course,  denoting  a  periodical  revolu- 
tion round  each  other."  In  1803  he  showed  that 
many  stars  were  revolving  round  their  centres 
of  gravity,  proving  them,  in  his  own  words,  to 
be  "intimately  held  together  by  the  bond  of 
mutual  attraction."  In  other  words,  Herschel 
discovered  that  the  law  of  gravitation  prevailed 
in  the  Stellar  Universe,  as  well  as  in  our  Solar 
System — that  the  law  which  Newton  ascertained 
to  prevail  in  the  Solar  System  extended  through- 
out the  depth  of  space. 

Herschel  did  not  merely  prove  the  revolution 
of  the  binary  stars;  he  assigned  periods  to 
those  which  he  had  particularly  studied.  He 
believed  the  period  of  Castor  to  be  342  years; 


30     A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

y  Leonis  1200  years ;  8  Serpentis  375  years ; 
and  e  Bootis  1681  years.  Herschel  did  not 
compute  the  orbits  mathematically.  This  was 
not  done  for  nearly  thirty  years,  when  the  cal- 
culation of  binary  star -objects  was  commenced 
by  Savary,  Sir  John  Herschel,  and  Encke. 

In  1782  the  French  astronomer,  Charles 
Messier  (1730-1817),  published  a  list  of  103 
nebulae.  In  the  following  year  Herschel  com- 
menced his  famous  sweeps  of  the  heavens  with 
his  large  reflectors,  and  during  these  he  made 
many  remarkable  discoveries.  In  1786  he  pub- 
lished in  the  '  Philosophical  Transactions '  of  the 
Royal  Society  a  catalogue  of  a  thousand  new 
nebulae  and  star-clusters,  in  which  he  gave  the 
position  of  each  object  with  a  short  description 
of  its  appearance,  written  by  Caroline  Herschel 
while  her  brother  actually  had  the  object  before 
his  eyes.  In  1786  Herschel  published  a  cata- 
logue of  another  thousand  clusters  and  nebulae, 
followed  in  1802  by  a  list  of  500 ;  making  a 
total  of  2500  clusters  and  nebulae  discovered  by 
the  great  astronomer.  This  alone  would  have 
gained  a  great  name  for  William  Herschel  in 
this  branch  of  astronomy.  In  the  space  of  only 
twenty  years  2500  nebulae  and  clusters  had  been 
discovered.  The  various  nebulae  and  clusters 
were  divided  into  eight  classes,  as  follows :  the 


HERSCHEL   THE   DISCOVERER.  31 

first  class  being  "  bright  nebulae,"  the  second 
"faint  nebulae/'  the  third  "very  faint  nebulae," 
the  fourth  "  planetary  nebulae,"  so  named  by 
Herschel  from  their  resemblance  to  planetary 
discs,  the  fifth  class  contained  "  very  large 
nebulae,"  the  sixth  "very  compressed  and  rich 
clusters  of  stars,"  the  seventh  "pretty  much 
compressed  clusters  of  large  or  small  stars," 
and  the  eighth  "  coarsely  scattered  clusters  of 
stars." 

At  first  Herschel  believed  all  nebulae  to  be 
clusters  of  stars,  the  irresolvable  nebulae  being 
supposed  to  be  farther  from  our  system  than 
the  resolvable  nebulae.  As  many  of  the  nebulae 
which  Messier  could  not  resolve  had  yielded  to 
Herschel's  instruments,  Herschel  believed  that 
increase  of  telescopic  power  would  resolve  the 
hazy  spots  of  light  which  remained  nebulous.  In 
the  paper  of  1785,  in  which  Herschel  dealt  with 
the  construction  of  the  heavens,  he  stated  his 
belief  that  many  of  the  nebulae  were  external 
galaxies — universes  beyond  the  Milky  Way  ;  and 
in  1786  he  remarked  that  he  had  discovered 
fifteen  hundred  universes ! 

Arago,  Mitchel,  Nichol,  Chambers,  and  other 
writers  quite  misinterpreted  Herschel's  views  on 
the  nebulae  when  they  said  that  he  believed 
them  to  be  all  external  galaxies.  In  1785 


32     A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

Herschel  believed  many  to  be  connected  with 
the  sidereal  system ;  considering  that  in  some 
parts  of  the  Galaxy  "  the  stars  are  now  drawing 
towards  various  secondary  centres,  and  will  in 
time  separate  into  different  clusters."  He  was 
coming  to  the  view  that  the  star-clusters  were 
secondary  aggregations  within  the  Galaxy,  prob- 
ably the  true  theory.  He  pointed  out  that  in 
Scorpio,  the  cluster  Messier  80  is  bounded  by 
a  black  chasm,  four  degrees  wide,  from  which 
he  believed  the  stars  had  been  drawn  in  the 
course  of  time  to  form  the  cluster.  His  sister 
records  that  one  night,  after  a  "long,  awful 
silence,"  he  exclaimed  on  coming  on  this  chasm 
— "Hier  ist  wahrhaftig  ein  Loch  im  Himmel!" 
(Here,  truly,  is  a  hole  in  the  heavens.) 

Herschel  was  now  gradually  giving  up  his 
theory  of  external  galaxies  and  his  "  disc-theory  " 
of  the  Universe ;  but  he  still  believed  even  the 
nebulous  objects  to  be  irresolvable  only  through 
immensity  of  distance.  In  1791,  however,  he 
drew  attention  to  a  remarkable  star  in  Taurus, 
surrounded  by  a  nebulous  atmosphere,  regarding 
which  he  wrote,  "View,  for  instance,  the  nine- 
teenth cluster  of  my  sixth  class,  and  afterwards 
cast  your  eye  on  this  cloudy  star.  Our  judg- 
ment, I  will  venture  to  say,  will  be  that  the 
nebulosity  about  the  star  is  not  of  a  starry 


HERSCHEL   THE   DISCOVERER.  33 

nature.  We  therefore  either  have  a  central  body 
which  is  not  a  star,  or  have  a  star  which  is 
involved  in  a  shining  fluid,  of  a  nature  totally 
unknown  to  us."  And  with  caution  he  added 
that  "  the  envelope  of  a  cloudy  star  is  more  fit 
to  produce  a  star  by  its  condensation  than  to 
depend  upon  the  star  for  its  existence." 

This  was  written  in  1791,  five  years  before 
Laplace  propounded  his  nebular  theory.  Mean- 
while Herschel,  believing  that  "  these  nebulous 
stars  may  serve  as  a  clue  to  unravel  other 
mysterious  phenomena,  found  that  the  theory 
of  a  "  shining  fluid "  would  suit  the  appear- 
ance of  the  irresolvable  planetary  nebulae  and 
the  great  nebula  in  Orion  much  better  than 
the  extravagant  idea  of  "external  universes." 
Herschel  now  considered  the  Orion  nebula  to 
be  much  nearer  to  the  Solar  System  than  he 
formerly  did,  and  ceased  to  regard  it  as  ex- 
ternal to  the  Galaxy.  For  twenty  years  Herschel 
patiently  observed  the  nebulae,  and  it  was  not 
until  1811  that  he  propounded  his  nebular  hypo- 
thesis of  the  evolution  of  the  Sun  and  stars. 
He  found  the  gaseous  matter  in  all  stages  of 
condensation,  from  the  diffused  cloudy  nebulae 
like  that  in  Orion,  through  the  planetary  nebula 
and  the  regular  nebula,  to  the  perfect  stars,  like 
Sirius  and  the  Sun.  Herschel's  nebular  theory 

c 


34     A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

was  a  grand  conception,  and  a  magnificent  attack 
on  the  secrets  of  nature. 

Sir  E/obert  Ball  says  :  "  Not  from  abstract 
speculation  like  Kant,  nor  from  mathematical 
suggestion  like  Laplace,  but  from  accurate  and 
laborious  study  of  the  heavens,  was  the  great 
William  Herschel  led  to  the  conception  of  the 
nebular  theory  of  evolution."  Herschel's  nebular 
theory  was  wider  and  less  rigorous  than  that 
of  Laplace.  Laplace  reached  his  theory  by 
reasoning  backwards ;  Herschel  by  observing  the 
nebulae  in  process  of  condensation.  Consequently, 
while  Laplace's  theory  has  required  modification, 
Herschel's,  from  its  width,  is  universally  ac- 
cepted, because  there  is  nothing  mathematically 
rigorous  in  it.  The  great  German  did  not  go 
into  details  like  his  French  contemporary.  He 
sketched  the  evolution  of  the  stars  in  a  wider 
sense. 

The  astronomer's  "  1500  universes,"  Miss  Clerke 
remarks,  "  had  now  logically  ceased  to  exist." 
Herschel  had  gathered  much  evidence  about 
nebular  distribution  which  shattered  his  belief 
in  external  universes,  although  he  still  thought 
in  1818  that  some  galaxies  were  included  among 
the  non- gaseous  nebulae.  In  1784  Herschel 
pointed  out  that  the  clusters  and  nebulae  "  are 
arranged  to  run  in  strata  "  ;  and  some  time  later 


HERSCHEL   THE    DISCOVERER.  35 

he  found  that  the  nebulae  were  aggregated  near 
the  galactic  poles  ;  in  other  words,  where  nebulae 
are  numerous,  stars  are  scarce,  and  vice  versa. 
So  rigorously  did  this  rule  hold,  that  when 
dictating  his  observations  to  his  sister  Caroline, 
he  would,  on  noting  a  paucity  of  stars,  warn  her 
to  "  prepare  for  nebulae." 

"  A  knowledge  of  the  construction  of  the 
heavens  has  always  been  the  ultimate  object  of 
my  observations."  So  Herschel  wrote  in  1811. 
All  his  investigations  were  secondary  to  the 
problem  which  was  constantly  before  his  mind 
— the  extent  and  structure  of  the  Universe. 
He  aspired  to  be  the  Copernicus  of  the  Sidereal 
System.  Although  Bruno,  Kepler,  Wright,  Kant, 
and  Lambert  had  speculated  regarding  the  con- 
struction of  the  heavens,  they  had  not  the 
slightest  evidence  on  which  to  base  their  ideas. 
There  was  no  science  of  sidereal  astronomy.  The 
stars  were  observed  only  to  assist  navigation, 
and  the  primary  object  of  star-catalogues  was  to 
further  knowledge  of  the  motions  of  the  planets. 
In  Herschel's  day,  also,  the  distances  of  the  stars 
had  not  been  measured,  and  he  had  to  base  his 
views  on  the  distribution  of  the  stars.  In  1784, 
therefore,  he  commenced  a  survey  of  the  heavens, 
in  order  to  ascertain  the  number  of  stars  in 
various  parts  of  the  sky.  This  method,  which 


36     A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

he  named  "  star  -gauging,"  consisted  in  count- 
ing the  number  of  stars  in  the  telescopic  field. 
Totally  he  secured  3400  gauges.  His  studies 
showed  that  in  the  region  of  the  Galaxy  the 
stars  were  much  more  numerous  than  near  the 
galactic  poles.  Sometimes  he  saw  as  many  as 
588  stars  in  a  telescopic  field,  at  other  times 
only  2.  He  remarked  that  he  had  "  often 
known  more  than  50,000  pass  before  his  sight 
within  an  hour."  Assuming  that  the  stars  were, 
on  the  average,  of  about  the  same  size,  and 
scattered  through  space  with  some  approach  to 
uniformity,  Herschel  was  unable  to  compute  the 
extent  to  which  his  telescope  penetrated  into 
space  ;  and,  assuming  that  the  Universe  was 
finite  and  that  his  "  gauging-  telescope "  was 
sufficiently  powerful  to  completely  resolve  the 
Milky  Way,  he  was  enabled  to  sketch  the  shape 
and  extent  of  the  Universe. 

Thus  Herschel  concluded  that  the  Universe 
extended  in  the  direction  of  the  Galaxy  to  850 
times  the  mean  distance  of  stars  of  the  first 
magnitude.  In  the  direction  of  the  galactic 
poles  the  thickness  was  only  155  times  the  dis- 
tance of  stars  of  the  same  magnitude.  Herschel 
was  thus  enabled  to  sketch  the  probable  form 
of  the  Universe,  which  he  regarded  as  cloven  at 
one  of  its  extremities,  the  cleft  being  represented 


HERSCHEL   THE   DISCOVERER.  37 

by  the  famous  gap  in  the  Milky  Way.  The 
Universe  was,  in  fact,  supposed  to  be  a  cloven 
disc,  and  the  Milky  Way  was  merely  a  vastly 
extended  portion  of  it  and  not  a  region  of 
actual  clustering.  On  this  theory  the  clusters 
and  nebulae  were  supposed  to  be  galaxies  ex- 
ternal to  the  Universe.  Even  in  1785,  how- 
ever, Herschel  believed  that  there  were  regions 
in  the  Milky  Way  where  the  stars  were  more 
closely  clustered  than  others.  "  It  would  not 
be  difficult,"  he  wrote  in  1785,  "to  point  out 
two  or  three  hundred  gathering  clusters  in  our 
system." 

Strange  to  say,  Herschel's  original  ideas  re- 
garding the  Universe  were  accepted  for  many 
years  by  astronomical  writers.  Arago  accepted 
Herschel's  original  theory,  unaware  that  he  had 
in  reality  abandoned  it,  and  he  was  followed  by 
a  host  of  French  and  English  writers  who  did 
not  take  the  trouble  to  read  each  of  Herschel's 
papers,  merely  quoting  that  of  1785,  and  believ- 
ing that  it  represented  his  final  ideas  on  the 
subject.  Even  Sir  John  Herschel  seems  to  have 
been  unaware  that  his  father  gave  up  the  disc 
theory  of  the  Universe.  The  famous  German 
astronomer,  Wilhelm  Struve,  after  an  exhaustive 
study  of  Herschel's  papers,  was  enabled  to  prove 
in  1847  that  the  theory  had  been  abandoned 


38     A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

by  Herschel ;  and  in  England  the  late  R.  A. 
Proctor  independently  demonstrated  the  same 
thing.  Meanwhile,  supposing  Herschel  had  not 
given  up  his  theory,  it  would  be  quite  untenable. 
After  considering  the  fact  that  the  brighter  stars, 
down  to  the  ninth  magnitude,  aggregate  on  the 
Milky  Way,  Mr  Gore  says:  "As  the  stars  are 
by  hypothesis  supposed  to  be  uniformly  dis- 
tributed throughout  every  part  of  the  disc,  and 
as  the  limiting  circles  for  stars  to  the  eighth  and 
ninth  magnitudes  fall  well  within  the  thickness 
of  the  disc,  there  is  no  reason  why  stars  of  these 
magnitudes  should  not  be  quite  as  numerous  in 
the  direction  of  the  galactic  poles  as  in  that  of 
the  Milky  Way  itself.  We  see,  therefore,  that 
the  disc  theory  fails  to  represent  the  observed 
facts,  and  that  Struve  and  Proctor  were  amply 
justified  in  their  opinion  that  the  theory  is 
wholly  untenable,  and  should  be  abandoned." 

The  observations  made  by  Herschel  himself 
eventually  proved  fatal  to  the  disc  theory — a 
hypothesis  which  he  had  all  along  held  very 
lightly.  His  ideas  about  subordinate  clusters 
within  the  Milky  Way  were  soon  confirmed,  and 
though  in  1799  he  still  adhered  to  the  disc 
theory,  he  wrote  in  1802,  "I  am  now  convinced, 
by  a  long  inspection  and  continued  examination 
of  it,  that  the  Milky  Way  itself  consists  of  stars 


HERSCHEL   THE   DISCOVERER.  39 

very  differently  scattered  from  those  which  are 
immediately  about  us.  This  immense  starry 
aggregation  is  by  no  means  uniform.  The  stars 
of  which  it  is  composed  are  very  unequally 
scattered" — a  conclusion  quite  opposed  to  the 
disc  theory,  where  the  Milky  Way  was  sup- 
posed to  be  merely  an  extended  portion  of  the 
Universe. 

In  1811  Herschel  wrote  as  follows:  "I  must 
freely  confess  that  by  continuing  my  sweeps  of 
the  heavens,  my  opinion  of  the  arrangement  of 
the  stars,  and  their  magnitudes,  and  some  other 
particulars,  has  undergone  a  gradual  change ; 
and,  indeed,  when  the  novelty  of  the  subject  is 
considered  we  cannot  be  surprised  that  many 
things  formerly  taken  for  granted  should  on 
examination  prove  to  be  different  from  what 
they  were  generally  but  incautiously  supposed 
to  be.  For  instance,  an  equal  scattering  of  the 
stars  may  be  admitted  in  certain  calculations ; 
but  when  we  examine  the  Milky  Way,  or  the 
closely  compressed  clusters  of  stars,  of  which 
my  catalogues  have  recorded  so  many  instances, 
this  supposed  equality  of  scattering  must  be 
given  up." 

This  was  the  virtual  abandonment  of  the  disc 
theory.  Six  years  later  Herschel  announced 
that  in  six  cases  he  had  failed  to  resolve  the 


40     A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

Milky  Way,  stating  that  his  telescopes  could 
not  fathom  it.  This  was  the  abandonment  of  his 
second  assumption — namely,  that  his  telescope 
was  sufficiently  powerful  to  penetrate  to  the 
limits  of  the  Universe.  Yet  he  still  thought 
that  some  of  the  star-clusters  might  be  external 
galaxies,  although  he  could  not  even  dogmati- 
cally assert  our  Universe  to  be  limited.  In  an 
error  of  translation,  Struve  left  the  impression 
that  Herschel  believed  our  Universe  to  be  un- 
fathomable or  infinite,  and  was  obliged  to  devise 
a  most  artificial  theory  of  the  extinction  of  light 
to  account  for  the  fact  that  the  sky  did  not 
shine  with  the  brilliance  of  the  Sun,  which  it 
would  do  were  the  stars  infinite  in  number.  Of 
course,  Herschel  did  not  actually  believe  the 
Universe  to  be  infinite,  and,  had  he  lived,  he 
would  probably  have  shown  that  all  the  star- 
clusters  which  we  see  are  included  within  the 
bounds  of  our  finite  Galaxy. 

In  1814  Herschel  was  "still  engaged  in  a 
series  of  observations  for  ascertaining  a  scale 
whereby  the  extent  of  the  Universe,  as  far  as  it 
is  possible  for  us  to  penetrate  into  space,  may  be 
fathomed."  In  1817  he  described  another  method 
of  star-gauging,  which  Arago  and  other  writers 
have  confused  with  that  which  he  devised  in 
1785.  The  two  methods,  however,  were  quite 


HERSCHEL   THE   DISCOVERER.  41 

distinct  from  each  other.  In  the  first  system,  one 
telescope  was  used  on  different  regions  of  the 
heavens ;  whereas  in  the  second  method,  various 
telescopes  were  used  on  identical  regions.  The 
principle  was  that  the  telescopic  power  necessary 
to  resolve  groups  of  stars  indicates  the  distance 
at  which  the  stars  of  the  groups  lie.  This, 
however,  also  assumed  an  equal  distribution  of 
stars,  and  as  the  late  Mr  Proctor  says,  "I 
conceive  that  no  question  can  exist  that  the 
principle  is  unsound,  and  that  Herschel  would 
himself  have  abandoned  it  had  he  tested  it 
earlier  in  his  observing  career.  ...  In  ap- 
plying it,  Sir  W.  Herschel  found  regions  of 
the  heavens  very  limited  in  extent,  where  the 
brighter  stars  (clustered  like  the  fainter)  were 
easily  resolved  with  low  powers,  but  where  his 
largest  telescopes  could  not  resolve  the  faintest. 
These  regions,  if  the  principle  were  true,  must 
be  long,  spike-shaped  star  groups,  whose  length 
is  directed  exactly  towards  the  astronomer  on 
Earth, — an  utterly  incredible  arrangement." 

Herschel,  at  the  time  of  his  death,  left  un- 
solved the  problem  of  the  construction  of  the 
heavens.  It  is  still  unsolved,  and  will  doubtless 
remain  so  until  astronomers  know  more  about 
the  distances  and  motions  of  the  stars.  His 
last  observation  of  the  Galaxy  showed  that  even 


42     A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

with  his  40-foot  reflector  he  could  not  fathom 
it.  Consequently,  as  we  have  mentioned,  Struve 
and  his  successors  regarded  the  Universe  as 
infinite — a  theory  which  has  now  received  its 
death-blow.  Herschel  was  undoubtedly  correct 
when  he  stated  his  belief  in  a  limited  Universe. 
Herschel's  star-gauges,  and  those  of  his  son, 
still  remain  of  immense  value  to  astronomers  in 
any  discussion  of  the  construction  of  the  heavens. 
Thus,  although  they  failed  to  reveal  to  Herschel 
the  structure  of  the  Universe,  they  have  been 
of  much  use  to  his  successors.  Herschel's  discus- 
sion of  the  supreme  problem — the  ultimate  object 
of  his  observations — constitutes  one  of  the  most 
interesting  chapters  in  the  history  of  science,  and 
marks  a  new  era  in  human  thought.  In  the 
words  of  Miss  Clerke  :  "  One  cannot  reflect  with- 
out amazement  that  the  special  life -task  set 
himself  by  this  struggling  musician — originally 
a  penniless  deserter  from  the  Hanoverian  Guard 
— was  nothing  less  than  to  search  out  the 
'  construction  of  the  heavens.'  He  did  not 
accomplish  it,  for  that  was  impossible  ;  but  he 
never  relinquished,  and,  in  grappling  with  it, 
laid  deep  and  sure  the  foundations  of  sidereal 


science." 


CHAPTER   III. 

THE    SUN. 

FOUR  years  after  the  death  of  Herschel,  an 
apothecary  in  the  little  German  town  of  Dessau 
procured  a  small  telescope,  with  which  he  began 
to  observe  the  Sun.  The  name  of  this  apothe- 
cary was  Samuel  Heinrich  Schwabe  (1789-1875). 
In  1826  he  commenced  to  observe  the  spots  on 
the  Sun's  disc,  counting  them  from  day  to  day, 
more  for  self- amusement  than  from  any  hope  of 
discovery ;  for  previous  astronomers  had  agreed 
that  no  law  regulated  the  number  of  the  sun- 
spots.  Every  clear  day  Schwabe  pointed  his 
telescope  at  the  Sun  and  took  his  record  of  the 
spots ;  this  he  continued  for  forty-three  years, 
until  within  a  few  years  of  his  death  on 
April  11,  1875.  As  early  as  1843  Schwabe 
hinted  that  a  possible  period  of  ten  years  regu- 
lated the  distribution  of  the  spots  on  the  Sun, 
but  no  attention  was  given  to  his  idea.  In 
1851,  however,  the  result  of  his  twenty -six 


44     A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

years  of  observation  was  published  in  Hum- 
boldt's  '  Cosmos,'  and  Schwabe  was  able  to  show 
that  the  spots  increased  and  decreased  in  a  period 
of  about  ten  years.  Astronomers  at  once  recog- 
nised the  importance  of  Schwabe's  work,  and 
in  1857  he  was  rewarded  by  the  Gold  Medal 
of  the  Royal  Astronomical  Society  of  London. 

Rudolf  Wolf  (1813-1892)  of  the  Zurich  Ob- 
servatory now  undertook  to  search  through  the 
records  of  sun-spot  observation,  from  the  days 
of  Galileo  and  Scheiner,  to  find  traces  of  the 
solar  cycle  discovered  by  Schwabe.  He  was 
successful,  and  was  enabled  to  correct  Schwabe's 
estimate  of  the  length  of  the  period,  fixing  it  as 
on  the  average  11 '11  years.  Additional  interest, 
however,  was  given  to  Schwabe's  and  Wolf's 
investigations  by  the  remarkable  discoveries 
which  followed.  In  September  1851  John 
Lamont  (1805-1879),  a  Scottish  astronomer, — 
born  at  Braemar  in  Aberdeenshire,  but  employed 
as  director  of  the  Munich  Observatory, — after 
searching  through  the  magnetic  records  collected 
at  Gottingen  and  Munich,  discovered  that  the 
magnetic  variations  indicated  a  period  of  10^- 
years.  Soon  after  this  Sir  Edward  Sabine 
(1788-1883),  the  English  physicist,  from  a  dis- 
cussion of  an  entirely  different  set  of  obser- 
vations, independently  demonstrated  the  same 


THE   SUN.  45 

thing,  proving  conclusively  that  once  in  about 
ten  years  magnetic  disturbances  reached  their 
height  of  violence ;  and  Sabine  was  not  slow 
to  notice  the  correspondence  between  the  mag- 
netic period  and  the  sun-spot  period.  In  the 
same  year  (1852)  Wolf  and  Alfred  Gautier 
(1793-1881)  independently  made  the  same  dis- 
covery, which  had  thus  been  made  by  four 
separate  investigators. 

In  the  same  year  an  English  amateur  as- 
tronomer, Richard  Christopher  Carrington  (1826- 
1875),  commenced  a  series  of  solar  observations 
which  led  to  some  remarkable  discoveries.  From 
observations  on  the  spots,  Carrington  discovered 
that  while  the  Sun's  rotation  was  performed  in 
25  days  at  the  equator,  it  was  protracted  to 
27|-  days  midway  between  the  equator  and  the 
poles.  In  1858  Carrington  demonstrated  the 
fact  that  spots  are  scarce  in  the  vicinity  of  the 
solar  equator,  but  are  confined  to  two  zones 
on  either  side,  becoming  scarce  again  at  thirty- 
five  degrees  north  or  south  of  the  equator. 
Contemporary  with  Carrington  was  Friedrich 
Wilhelm  Gustav  Sparer  (1822-1895),  who  was 
born  in  Berlin  in  1822  and  died  at  Giessen, 
July  7,  1895.  He  commenced  his  solar  ob- 
servations about  the  same  time  as  Carrington, 
and  independently  discovered  the  Sun's  equatorial 


46     A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

acceleration.  From  observations  at  his  little 
private  observatory  at  Anclam  in  Pomerania, 
continued  at  the  Astrophysical  Observatory  in 
Potsdam,  Sporer  demonstrated  a  remarkable  law 
regarding  sun-spots.  This  law  is  thus  described 
by  a  well-known  astronomer :  "  The  disturbance 
which  produces  the  spots  of  a  given  sun-spot 
period  first  manifests  itself  in  two  belts  about 
thirty  degrees  north  and  south  of  the  Sun's 
equator.  These  belts  then  draw  in  toward  the 
equator,  and  the  sun-spot  maximum  occurs  when 
their  latitude  is  about  sixteen  degrees ;  while 
the  disturbance  gradually  and  finally  dies  out 
at  a  latitude  of  eight  or  ten  degrees.  Two  or 
three  years  before  this  disappearance,  however, 
two  new  zones  of  disturbance  show  themselves. 
Thus,  at  the  sun-spot  minimum  there  are  four 
well-marked  spot-belts, — two  near  the  equator, 
due  to  the  expiring  disturbance,  and  two  in 
high  latitudes,  due  to  the  newly  beginning 
outbreak."  These  remarkable  discoveries,  which 
resulted  from  the  investigations  of  Schwabe, 
Carrington,  and  Sporer,  are  a  brilliant  example 
of  what  may  be  done  by  amateurs  in  astronomy. 
At  the  time  when  Carrington  and  Sporer  were 
pursuing  these  researches,  the  spectroscope  came 
into  use  as  an  astronomical  instrument,  and  since 
1859  solar  astronomy  has  been  almost  entirely 


THE   SUN.  47 

spectroscopic.  Before  we  can  rightly  understand 
the  principles  of  spectroscopic  astronomy,  we  must 
go  back  to  the  life  and  work  of  its  founder — 
Joseph  von  Fraunhofer. 

The  son  of  a  poor  glazier,  Joseph  von  Fraun- 
hofer was  born  on  March  6,  1787,  at  Straubing, 
in  Bavaria.  His  father  and  mother  having  died 
when  their  son  was  quite  young,  the  boy,  on 
account  of  his  poverty,  was  apprenticed  to  a 
looking  -  glass  manufacturer  in  Munich  named 
Weichselberger,  who  acted  tyrannically,  keeping 
him  all  day  at  hard  work.  Still  the  lad  borrowed 
some  old  books,  and  spent  his  nights  in  study. 
Young  Fraunhofer  lodged  in  an  old  tenement 
in  Munich,  which  on  July  21,  1801,  collapsed, 
burying  in  its  ruins  its  occupants.  All  were 
killed  but  Fraunhofer,  who,  though  seriously 
injured,  was  dug  out  from  the  ruins  four  hours 
later.  The  distressing  accident  was  witnessed 
by  Prince  Maximilian  Joseph,  Elector  of  Bavaria. 
He  became  interested  in  Fraunhofer,  and  pre- 
sented him  with  a  sum  of  money.  Of  this  he 
made  good  use.  He  was  already  interested  in 
optics,  and  he  bought  some  books  on  that  sub- 
ject, as  well  as  a  glass-polishing  machine.  The 
remainder  of  the  money  served  to  procure  his  re- 
lease from  his  tyrannical  master,  Weichselberger. 

Fraunhofer  became  acquainted  with  prominent 


48     A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

scientists  at  Munich,  who  provided  him  with 
books  on  optics  and  mathematics.  Meanwhile  the 
young  optician  occupied  his  time  in  shaping 
and  finishing  lenses.  In  1806  he  entered  the 
optical  department  of  the  Optical  and  Physical 
Institute  of  Munich,  and  the  following  year, 
when  only  twenty  years  of  age,  was  appointed 
to  the  chief  post  in  that  department.  In  1814 
he  commenced  his  investigations  with  the  prism, 
which  have  made  his  name  famous. 

Newton  had  found  that,  in  passing  through  a 
prism,  white  light  is  dispersed  into  its  primary 
colours,  making  up  the  band  of  coloured  light 
known  as  the  solar  spectrum.  But  he  failed 
to  recognise  the  existence  of  dark  lines  in  the 
spectrum.  Casually  seen  in  1802  by  William 
Hyde  Wollaston  (1786-1828),  an  English  physicist, 
these  lines  were  first  thoroughly  examined  by 
Fraunhofer.  Allowing  light  from  the  Sun  to 
pass  through  a  prism  attached  to  the  telescope, 
he  was  amazed  to  find  several  dark  lines  in 
the  spectrum.  By  the  year  1814  he  had  de- 
tected no  less  than  300  or  400  of  these  lines. 
Fraunhofer  named  the  more  prominent  lines  by 
the  letters  of  the  alphabet,  from  A  in  the  red 
to  H  in  the  violet.  They  are  now  known  as 
the  Fraunhofer  lines.  At  first  he  was  much 
perplexed  regarding  the  nature  of  the  dark  lines. 


THE   SUN.  49 

He  suspected  that  they  might  be  an  optical 
effect,  depending  on  the  quality  of  the  glass 
used,  and  he  tried  different  prisms,  but  the 
lines  were  still  to  be  seen.  Then  he  turned 
his  prism  to  bright  clouds  to  see  if  they  were 
visible  in  reflected  sunlight,  and  he  found  that 
they  were.  He  examined  the  Moon  and  again 
perceived  them,  as  moonlight  is  merely  reflected 
sunlight ;  and  they  were  also  conspicuous  in  the 
spectra  of  the  planets.  It  was  thus  proved  that 
these  lines  were  characteristic  of  sunlight,  whether 
direct  or  reflected.  It  was,  however,  still  possible 
that  they  might  be  caused  by  the  passage  of  the 
rays  of  light  from  the  celestial  bodies  through  the 
Earth's  atmosphere.  In  order  to  test  this  theory, 
Fraunhofer  examined  the  spectra  of  the  brighter 
stars.  He  found  that  the  lines  visible  in  the 
solar  spectrum  were  not  to  be  seen  in  the  spectra 
of  the  stars,  thus  proving  that  the  lines  were  not 
merely  an  atmospheric  effect.  Each  star,  Fraun- 
hofer observed,  had  a  different  spectrum  from 
both  the  Sun  and  from  other  stars.  These 
spectra  were  also  characterised  by  numerous 
dark  lines,  much  fainter  than  those  in  the  solar 
spectrum. 

Although  he  ascertained  the  existence  of  the 
dark  lines  in  the  Sun's  spectrum,  Fraunhofer 
never  really  found  out  what  they  represented. 


50     A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

As  Miss  Giberne  expresses  it,  "  Although  he  now 
saw  the  lines  he  could  not  understand  them : 
he  could  not  read  what  they  said.  They  spoke 
to  him  indeed  about  the  Sun,  but  they  spoke 
to  him  in  a  foreign  language,  the  key  to  which 
he  did  not  possess."  However,  he  expressed  the 
belief  that  the  pair  of  lines  in  the  solar  spectrum, 
which  he  marked  D,  coincided  with  the  pair 
of  bright  lines  emitted  by  incandescent  sodium. 
Although  he  doubtless  suspected  that  the  lines 
conveyed  intelligence  regarding  the  elements  in 
the  Sun,  he  never  was  able  properly  to  decipher 
their  meaning.  Had  he  lived,  he  would  prob- 
ably have  made  the  great  discovery;  but  these 
investigations  were  cut  short  by  his  sudden 
and  untimely  death  on  June  7,  1826. 

After  the  death  of  Fraunhofer,  very  little 
was  done  to  forward  the  study  of  spectrum 
analysis.  Investigations  in  this  branch  of 
research  were  made,  however,  by  Sir  John 
Herschel  (1792-1871),  William  Allen  Miller 
(1817-1870),  Sir  David  Brewster  (1781-1868),  and 
others.  Two  famous  men  of  science  had  partly 
discovered  the  secret.  These  were  Sir  George 
Stokes  (1819-1903),  of  Cambridge,  and  Anders 
John  Angstrom  (1812-1872)  of  Upsala.  Of 
Angstrom's  work,  published  in  1853,  it  has 
been  said  that  it  would  "  have  obtained  a  high 


THE   SUN.  51 

celebrity  if  it  had  appeared  in  French,  English, 
or  German,  instead  of  Swedish." 

It  was  not  until  1859  that  the  principles  of 
spectrum  analysis  were  fully  enunciated  by 
Gustav  Robert  Kirchhoff  (1824-1887),  and  his 
colleague  in  the  University  of  Heidelberg,  Robert 
Wilhelm  Bunsen  (1811-1899).  Kirchhoff  demon- 
strated that  a  luminous  solid  or  liquid  gives  a 
continuous  spectrum,  and  a  gaseous  substance  a 
spectrum  of  bright  lines.  In  the  words  of  Miss 
Clerke,  "  Substances  of  every  kind  are  opaque 
to  the  precise  rays  which  they  emit  at  the 
same  temperature.  That  is  to  say,  they  stop 
the  kinds  of  light  or  heat  which  they  are  then 
actually  in  a  condition  to  radiate.  .  .  .  This 
principle  is  fundamental  to  solar  chemistry.  It 
gives  the  key  to  the  hieroglyphics  of  the  Fraun- 
hofer  lines.  The  identical  characters  which  are 
written  bright  in  terrestrial  spectra  are  written 
dark  in  the  unrolled  sheaf  of  sun-rays."  Kirch - 
hoff  made  several  determinations  of  the  sub- 
stances in  the  Sun,  proving  the  existence  of 
sodium,  iron,  calcium,  magnesium,  nickel,  barium, 
copper,  and  zinc.  His  great  map  of  the  solar 
spectrum  was  published  by  the  Berlin  Academy 
in  1860,  and  represented  an  enormous  amount 
of  labour.  It  was  succeeded  by  another  map 
by  Angstrom,  published  in  1868.  But  both  of 


52     A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

these  maps  have  been  recently  superseded  by 
the  investigations  of  Sir  Joseph  Norman  Lockyer 
(born  1836),  and  of  the  American  physicist, 
Henry  Augustus  Rowland  (1848-1901).  Row- 
land largely  increased  our  knowledge  of  the 
elements  in  the  solar  atmosphere. 

The  spectroscope  had  become,  by  1868,  a 
recognised  instrument  of  astronomical  research, 
and  in  that  year  it  was  applied  during  the 
famous  total  eclipse,  visible  in  India.  There 
were  many  eclipse  problems,  arising  from  the 
observations  made  by  the  eclipse  expeditions 
of  1842,  1851,  and  1860.  The  eclipse  of  1851 
had  finally  proved  that  the  red  flames  seen 
surrounding  the  Sun  during  total  eclipses  be- 
longed to  the  Sun,  and  not  to  the  Moon,  as 
many  astronomers  had  believed.  At  the  eclipse 
of  1860,  visible  in  Spain,  the  Italian  astronomer, 
Angelo  Secchi  (1818-1878),  and  the  Englishman, 
Warren  De  la  Rue  (1815-1889),  secured  photo- 
graphs of  the  solar  prominences.  The  problem  of 
1868  was  the  constitution  of  these  prominences. 

Pierre  Jules  Cesar  Janssen,  born  in  Paris  in 
1824,  was  stationed  at  Guntoor,  in  India,  to 
observe  the  eclipse.  He  succeeded  in  observing 
the  spectrum  of  the  prominences  during  the 
progress  of  totality,  and  found  it  to  be  one  of 
bright  lines,  proving  the  gaseous  nature  of  the 


THE   SUN.  53 

sun-flames.  During  the  progress  of  the  eclipse, 
Janssen  was  specially  struck  by  the  brilliancy 
of  the  bright  lines,  and  it  occurred  to  him  that 
the  prominence -spectrum  could  be  observed  in 
full  daylight,  if  sufficient  dispersive  power  was 
used  to  enfeeble  the  ordinary  continuous  spec- 
trum. At  ten  o'clock  on  the  following  morning, 
August  19,  1868,  Janssen  applied  his  spectro- 
scope to  the  sun,  and  observed  the  prominence- 
spectrum.  After  a  month's  observation  in  India, 
he  sent  to  the  French  Academy  an  account  of 
his  success.  A  short  time,  however,  before  his 
report  arrived,  the  Academy  had  received  a 
similar  one  from  Lockyer,  who  had  independently 
made  the  same  discovery.  Two  years  previously, 
in  1866,  the  new  method  had  occurred  to  him, 
but  his  spectroscope  was  not  powerful  enough  ; 
and  although  he  ordered  a  more  powerful  one 
at  once,  it  was  not  until  October  16,  1868, 
that  he  had  the  instrument  in  his  hands.  Four 
days  later  he  observed  the  prominence-spectrum 
in  full  daylight. 

The  next  advance  in  the  study  of  the  promi- 
nences was  announced  in  1869.  Janssen  and 
Lockyer  had  shown  astronomers  how  to  observe 
the  spectrum  of  the  prominences ;  but  the  re- 
searches of  other  two  famous  astronomers  enabled 
observers  to  see  the  forms  of  the  prominences. 


54     A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

These  two  men  were  William  Huggins  (born 
1824)  and  Johann  Carl  Friedrich  Zollner.  The 
latter  astronomer,  born  in  Leipzig  in  1834,  was 
one  of  the  most  successful  students  of  the  solar 
prominences.  He  was  Professor  of  Astrophysics 
in  the  University  of  Leipzig,  a  position  which 
he  filled  with  success  until  his  untimely  death 
on  April  25,  1882.  Independently  of  Huggins, 
he  found  that  by  opening  the  slit  of  the 
spectroscope  wider,  the  forms  of  the  promi- 
nences themselves  could  be  seen.  The  study 
of  the  prominences  was  at  once  taken  up  by 
the  most  famous  solar  observers :  these  were 
Huggins  and  Lockyer  in  England,  Sporer  and 
Zollner  in  Germany,  Janssen  in  France,  Secchi, 
Respighi,  and  Tacchini  in  Italy,  Young  in 
America.  To  Charles  Augustus  Young  (born 
1834)  we  owe  the  careful  study  of  individual 
prominences.  On  September  7,  1871,  he  ob- 
served the  most  gigantic  outburst  on  the  sun 
ever  witnessed,  fragments  of  an  exploded  promi- 
nence reaching  a  height  of  100,000  miles  :  Young, 
also,  made  the  first  attempt  to  photograph  the 
prominences. 

To  the  Italian  school  of  astronomers,  however, 
we  owe  the  persistent  and  systematic  study 
of  the  prominences.  Among  them  the  three 
greatest  names  are  Angelo  Secchi  (1818-1878), 


THE   SUN.  55 

Lorenzo  Respighi  (1824-1889),  emdPietro  Tacchini 
(1838-1905).  After  the  death  of  Secchi,  the 
recognised  head  of  spectroscopy  in  Italy  was 
Pietro  Tacchini.  Born  at  Modena  in  1838,  he 
was  appointed  director  at  Modena  in  1859, 
assistant  at  Palermo  in  1863,  and  director  at 
Rome  in  1879.  In  1870  he  commenced  to  take 
daily  observations  of  the  prominences,  noting 
their  sizes,  forms,  and  distribution,  and  these 
observations  were  continued  for  thirty-one  years, 
until  within  four  years  of  Tacchini's  death,  which 
took  place  on  March  24,  1905.  Tacchini  did 
for  the  study  of  the  prominences  what  Schwabe 
did  for  the  spots.  The  Italian  spectroscopists 
found  that  the  prominences  increased  and  de- 
creased every  eleven  years  in  harmony  with 
the  spots.  Tacchini  demonstrated  that  the 
streamers  of  the  solar  corona  originate  in 
regions  where  the  prominences  are  most  numer- 
ous, and  that  the  shape  of  the  corona,  on  the 
whole,  varies  in  sympathy  with  the  prominences. 
The  researches  of  Lockyer  indicated  that  the 
prominences  originated  in  a  shallow  gaseous 
atmosphere  which  he  termed  the  chromosphere. 
Formerly  astronomers  had  to  observe  only 
isolated  prominences,  but  in  1892  an  American 
astronomer,  George  Ellery  Hale  (born  1868), 
formerly  director  of  the  Yerkes  Observatory, 


56     A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

and  now  director  of  the  Solar  Observatory  in 
California,  succeeded  in  photographing,  by  an 
ingenious  process,  the  whole  of  the  chromo- 
sphere, prominences,  and  faculse  visible  on  the 
solar  surface. 

Another  solar  envelope  was  discovered  in  1870 
by  Dr  Charles  Augustus  Young,  who  from  1866 
to  1877  directed  the  Observatory  at  Dartmouth, 
New  Hampshire,  and  from  1877  to  1905,  that 
at  Princeton,  New  Jersey.  During  the  eclipse 
of  December  22,  1870,  Young  was  stationed  at 
Tenez  de  Frontena,  Spain.  As  the  solar  crescent 
grew  apparently  thinner  before  the  disc  of  the 
Moon,  "  the  dark  lines  of  the  spectrum,"  he  says, 
"  and  the  spectrum  itself  gradually  faded  away, 
until  all  at  once,  as  suddenly  as  a  bursting  rocket 
shoots  out  its  stars,  the  whole  field  of  view  was 
filled  with  bright  lines,  more  numerous  than  one 
could  count.  The  phenomenon  was  so  sudden, 
so  unexpected,  and  so  wonderfully  beautiful,  as 
to  force  an  involuntary  exclamation."  The  phe- 
nomenon was  observed  for  two  seconds,  and 
the  impression  was  left  on  the  astronomer  that 
a  bright  line  had  taken  the  place  of  every 
dark  one  in  the  solar  spectrum,  the  spectrum 
being  completely  reversed.  Hence  the  name 
which  was  given  to  the  hypothetical  envelope — 
"the  reversing  layer."  For  long  the  existence 


THE  SUN.  57 

of  the  reversing  layer  was  disputed  by  numerous 
astronomers.  In  1896  photographs  taken  during 
the  solar  eclipse  of  that  year  finally  demon- 
strated the  existence  of  the  "flash  spectrum" 
as  seen  by  Young. 

The  last  of  the  solar  appendages,  the  corona, 
can  only  be  seen  during  total  eclipses.  The 
researches  of  Young  and  Janssen  indicate  that 
it  is  partly  gaseous  and  partly  meteoric  in  its 
constitution ;  and  various  photographs,  taken  at 
the  eclipses  since  1870,  have  demonstrated  its 
variation  in  shape,  which  is  in  harmony  with 
the  eleven-year  period.  Several  attempts  have 
been  made  to  observe  the  corona  without  an 
eclipse.  In  1882  Huggins  made  the  attempt, 
but  failed,  and  Hale,  with  his  photographic 
process,  had  no  better  success.  More  recently, 
in  1904,  a  Russian  astronomer,  Alexis  Hansky, 
observing  from  the  top  of  Mont  Blanc,  secured 
some  photographs  on  which  he  believes  the 
corona  is  represented,  but  so  far  his  obser- 
vations have  not  been  confirmed  by  other 
astronomers. 

The  application  of  the  spectroscope  to  the 
motions  on  the  solar  surface  is  perhaps  one 
of  the  most  wonderful  triumphs  in  astronomical 
science.  In  1842  Christian  Doppler  (1803-1853), 
Professor  of  Mathematics  at  Prague,  had  ex- 


58     A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

pressed  the  view  that  the  colour  of  a  luminous 
body  must  be  changed  by  its  motion  of  approach 
or  recession.  It  was  obvious  to  Doppler  that 
if  the  body  was  approaching,  a  larger  number 
of  light  waves  must  be  entering  the  eye  of 
the  observer  than  if  it  were  retreating.  Miss 
Clerke  thus  illustrates  Doppler's  principle : 
"Suppose  shots  to  be  fired  at  a  target  at 
fixed  intervals  of  time.  If  the  marksman 
advances,  say,  twenty  paces  between  each  dis- 
charge of  his  rifle,  it  is  evident  that  the 
shots  will  fall  faster  on  the  target  than  if 
he  stood  still ;  if,  on  the  contrary,  he  retires 
by  the  same  amount,  they  will  strike  at  cor- 
respondingly longer  intervals."  It  occurred  to 
various  astronomers  that  it  would  be  possible 
to  measure  cyclones  and  hurricanes  in  the  Sun, 
not  by  change  of  colour  in  the  spectrum,  but 
by  the  shifting  of  the  lines ;  and  in  1870  this 
was  successfully  done  by  Lockyer.  In  the  next 
few  years  efforts  to  measure  the  solar  rotation 
were  made  by  Young,  Zollner,  and  others,  who 
succeeded  in  measuring  the  displacement  of  the 
lines,  but  not  the  time  of  rotation.  This  was 
reserved  for  the  famous  Swedish  astronomer, 
Duner. 

Nils    Christopher    Duner >    born    in    1839    in 
Scania,  was  employed  as  an  assistant  at  Lund 


THE   SUN,  59 

Observatory  from  1858  to  1888,  when  he  was 
appointed  director  of  the  Observatory  at  Upsala. 
In  that  year  he  commenced  a  study  of  the  solar 
rotation,  measuring  it  by  means  of  Doppler's 
principle.  He  confirmed  the  telescopic  work 
of  Carrington  and  Sporer  on  the  equatorial 
acceleration,  and  measured  the  displacement  up 
to  within  fifteen  degrees  of  the  poles.  He 
brought  out  the  surprising  fact  that  the  rota- 
tion period  of  the  Sun  is  there  protracted  to 
38^  days.  These  remarkable  researches  were 
published  in  1891. 

In  1873  the  Astronomer -Royal  of  England 
commenced  at  Greenwich  Observatory  to  photo- 
graph the  Sun  daily.  This  work  has  been 
carried  on  there  by  Edward  Walter  Maunder 
(born  1851),  and  Greenwich  Observatory  pos- 
sesses a  photographic  record  of  sun-spots.  At 
the  Meudon  Astrophysical  Observatory,  near 
Paris,  Janssen  has,  since  1876,  secured  photo- 
graphs of  the  solar  surface,  which  were  com- 
prised in  a  great  atlas,  published  by  him  in 
January  1904.  These  photographs  have  re- 
vealed a  remarkable  phenomenon — the  "  reseau 
photospherique,"  the  distribution  over  the  solar 
surface  of  blurred  patches  of  light,  which 
Janssen  considers  are  inherent  in  the  Sun. 
The  Greenwich  records  of  sun  -  spots  and  of 


60     A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

magnetic  disturbances  have  been  made  use  of 
by  Maunder  in  his  remarkable  studies,  prom- 
ulgated in  1904,  of  the  connection  between 
sun-spots  and  terrestrial  magnetism.  Maunder 
finds  that  on  the  average  magnetic  storms  are 
dependent  on  the  presence  of  sun-spots,  and  on 
the  size  of  the  spot.  The  magnetic  action,  he 
finds,  does  not  radiate  equally  in  all  directions 
from  the  sun-spots,  but  along  definite  and 
restricted  lines. 

Herschel's  hypothesis  of  a  dark  and  cool 
globe  beneath  the  solar  photosphere  was  seen 
to  be  untenable  after  the  introduction  of  the 
spectroscope.  The  first  important  theory  as  to 
the  solar  constitution  was  that  advanced  in 
1865  by  the  French  astronomer,  Herve  Faye 
(1814-1902).  Numerous  other  theories  were 
afterwards  advanced  by  Secchi,  Zollner,  Young, 
and  others,  but  a  complete  description  of  the 
various  developments  in  solar  theorising  cannot 
be  given  here.  There  is  no  complete  "  theory  " 
of  the  exact  constitution  of  every  part  of  the 
Sun,  but  the  unpretentious  "Views  of  Professor 
Young  on  the  Constitution  of  the  Sun,"  which 
appeared  in  April  1904  in  'Popular  Astronomy/ 
represent  the  latest  ideas  of  the  foremost  solar 
investigator.  Professor  Young  regards  the  re- 
versing layer  and  the  chromosphere  as  "simply 


THE   SUN.  61 

the  uncondensed  vapours  and  gases  which  form 
the  atmosphere  in  which  the  clouds  of  the 
photosphere  are  suspended."  He  says  that  the 
contraction  theory  of  Helmholtz, — explained  in 
another  chapter, — advanced  to  explain  the  main- 
tenance of  the  Sun's  heat,  is  true  so  far  as  it 
goes ;  but  that  it  is  all  the  truth  is  now  made 
doubtful  by  the  discovery  of  radium,  which 
"  suggests  that  other  powerful  sources  of  energy 
may  co-operate  with  the  mechanical  in  main- 
taining the  Sun's  heat." 

The  important  question  of  the  distance  of  the 
Sun  was  thoroughly  investigated  in  1824  by 
Johann  Franz  Encke  (1791-1865),  then  of  See- 
berg,  near  Gotha,  who,  from  a  discussion  of  the 
transits  of  Venus  in  1761  and  1769,  found  a 
parallax  of  8"*371,  corresponding  to  a  mean 
distance  of  95,000,000  miles.  This  value  was 
accepted  for  thirty  years,  until  Peter  Andreas 
Hansen  (1795-1874),  in  1854,  and  Urban  Jean 
Joseph  Le  Verrier  (1811-1877),  in  1858,  found 
from  mathematical  investigations  that  the  dis- 
tance indicated  was  too  great.  Preparations 
were  accordingly  made  for  the  observation  of 
the  transits  of  Venus,  which  took  place  respect- 
ively on  December  8,  1874,  and  December  6, 
1882.  On  the  first  occasion  many  expeditions 
were  sent  to  view  the  transit,  consisting  of 


62     A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

French,  German,  American,  English,  Scottish, 
Italian,  Russian,  and  Dutch  astronomers,  and 
it  was  hoped  that  the  solar  parallax  would  be 
accurately  measured  once  for  all.  However,  the 
transit,  although  favoured  with  good  weather, 
was  not  successful,  owing  to  the  difficulty  of 
making  exact  measurements,  by  reason  of  the 
illumination  and  refraction  in  the  atmosphere 
of  Venus.  Accordingly  the  values  deduced  for 
the  parallax  were  far  from  unanimous.  The 
transit  of  1882  was  not  observed  so  extensively, 
as  astronomers  had  found  the  transit  of  Venus 
to  be  by  no  means  the  best  method.  In  1877 
Sir  David  Gill  (born  1843),  the  great  Scottish 
astronomer,  determined  the  solar  parallax  suc- 
cessfully from  measures  of  the  parallax  of  Mars 
in  opposition.  His  value  was  8 "'7 8,  correspond- 
ing to  93,080,000  miles.  Some  years  previous 
to  this  Johann  Gottfried  Galle  (born  1812),  the 
German  astronomer,  had,  from  measurements 
of  the  parallax  of  the  asteroid  Flora,  deduced 
a  solar  parallax  of  8" '8 7.  Gill's  work  at  the 
Cape  in  1888,  on  the  Asteroids,  was  successful 
in  giving  a  more  accurate  value  than  the  transit 
of  Venus:  in  1900  and  1901  measures  of  the 
parallax  of  the  asteroid  Eros,  the  nearest  minor 
planet,  were  made  by  many  different  observa- 
tories, and  agree  with  the  other  results.  The 


THE   SUN.  63 

values  which  have  been  derived  from  the  velocity 
of  light,  and  from  the  constant  of  aberration, 
are  fairly  in  agreement  with  those  derived  from 
direct  measurement.  On  the  whole,  the  most 
probable  value  of  the  parallax  is  about  8" "8, 
indicating  a  mean  distance  of  about  92,700,000 
miles,  with  a  " probable  error"  of  about  150,000 
miles. 

What  a  different  picture  the  sun  presents  to 
us  at  the  beginning  of  the  twentieth  century 
from  that  which  it  presented  to  Herschel  and 
his  contemporaries  at  the  beginning  of  the 
nineteenth  !  To  Herschel,  the  Sun  was  a  cool 
dark  globe,  surrounded  by  a  luminous  atmosphere. 
As  the  outcome  of  the  researches  and  discoveries 
outlined  in  this  chapter,  the  Sun  is  now  seen 
to  be  a  vast  central  world,  which  is  over  a 
million  times  larger  than  the  Earth.  In  the 
words  of  an  able  writer,  "It  is  most  prob- 
ably a  world  of  gases,  where  most  of  the  metals 
and  metallic  bases  that  we  know  exist  only  as 
vapours,  even  at  the  Sun's  surface,  hotter 
than  any  furnace  on  earth,  and  getting  a  still 
fiercer  heat  for  every  mile  of  descent  lower. 
Of  that  heat  in  the  Sun's  interior  we  can 
form  no  conception.  The  pressure  within  the 
Sun  is  equally  inconceivable.  A  cannon  -  ball 
weighing  100  Ib.  on  earth  would  weigh  2700 


64     A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

on  the  Sun.  Thus  a  mighty  conflict  goes  on 
unceasingly  between  imprisoned  and  expand- 
ing gases  and  vapours  struggling  to  burst  out, 
and  massive  pressures  holding  them  down.  For 
reasons  we  cannot  fully  understand,  no  equi- 
librium is  reached.  For  millions  of  years  up- 
rushes  and  down-rushes  of  the  white-hot  materials 
have  been  proceeding  on  that  bright  photosphere 
which  gives  us  light,  and  looks  a  picture  of 
calm  and  quiescence.  Above  that  is  a  com- 
paratively thin  rose-coloured  layer,  the  chromo- 
sphere, agitated  with  fiery  '  prominences/  and 
outside  all  these  the  coronal  glory — all  alike 
pointing  to  immeasurable  activities." 

The  following  remark  of  Professor  Newcomb 
shows  our  inability  to  realise  the  solar  activity. 
"  Suppose,"  he  says,  "  every  foot  of  space  in  a 
whole  country  covered  with  13 -inch  cannon, 
all  pointed  upward,  and  all  discharged  at  once. 
The  result  would  compare  with  what  is  going 
on  inside  the  photosphere  about  as  much  as 
a  boy's  popgun  compares  with  the  cannon." 


CHAPTER    IV. 

THE   MOON. 

IT  is  somewhat  remarkable  that  the  one  celestial 
body  which  Herschel  neglected  was  our  satellite, 
the  Moon;  and  it  is  also  remarkable  that  the 
Moon  was  for  many  years  the  chief  object  of 
study  of  his  contemporary  astronomer,  Johann 
Hieronymus  Schroter  (1745-1816).  Born  at 
Erfurt,  near  Hanover,  on  August  30,  1745, 
Johann  Hieronymus  Schroter  was  originally 
intended  for  the  study  of  law,  for  which  he 
was  sent  to  the  University  of  Gottingen.  At 
the  same  time  he  studied  mathematics,  and 
particularly  astronomy,  under  the  mathematician, 
Kaestner  of  Gottingen.  Deeply  interested  in 
music,  he  became  acquainted  with  the  Herschel 
family,  and,  inspired  by  William  Herschel's  ex- 
ample, determined  to  study  the  heavens.  In 
1779  he  became  the  possessor  of  a  small  achro- 
matic refractor,  and  commenced  to  observe  the 
Sun  and  Moon.  In  1778  he  entered  the  legal 

E 


66      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

profession  at  Hanover,  and  four  years  later  he 
was  appointed  "  oberamtmann "  or  Chief  Magis- 
trate of  Lilienthal — "the  Vale  of  Lilies" — in 
the  Duchy  of  Bremen.  At  Lilienthal  Schroter 
erected  a  small  observatory,  and  acquired  in  1785 
one  of  Herschel's  7 -foot  reflectors.  In  1792 
the  astronomer  superintended  the  construction 
of  a  13-foot  reflector,  made  by  Schrader  of  Kiel, 
who  transferred  his  workshop  to  Lilienthal.  With 
these  instruments  the  great  work  of  Schroter  was 
accomplished. 

Schroter  directed  his  powers  of  observation  to 
the  study  of  the  Moon.  He  originated  the  study 
of  the  surface  of  the  Moon,  and  founded  the 
branch  of  astronomy  known  as  selenography, 
or  the  study  of  the  Moon's  surface.  The 
foundations  of  this  branch  were  laid  in  1791 
with  the  publication  of  Schroter's  '  Seleno- 
topographische  Fragmented  The  astronomer 
determined  to  make  a  comparative  study  of 
the  surface  of  our  satellite,  and  before  1801 
discovered  eleven  "rills"  or  clefts  on  the 
Moon's  surface,  and  recognised  a  large  number 
of  craters.  He  likewise  believed  that  he  had 
seen  a  lunar  atmosphere,  an  observation  of 
which  was  made  by  him  in  February  1792. 
Schroter  seems  never  to  have  doubted  what 
Herschel  and  his  contemporaries  believed — that 


THE   MOON.  67 

the  Moon  was  a  living  world  with  volcanoes  in 
active  eruption,  surrounded  by  an  atmosphere, 
and  inhabited  by  beings  like  ourselves.  Unfor- 
tunately, Schroter  was  not  good  at  making 
drawings  of  what  he  saw ;  nevertheless,  he 
accomplished  a  vast  amount  of  work.  In  the 
little  observatory  at  Lilienthal  the  foundations 
were  laid  of  the  comparative  study  of  the  surface 
of  the  Moon. 

But  these  observations  were  destined  to  be 
rudely  interrupted.  In  1810  Hanover  was  occu- 
pied by  the  invading  troops  of  Napoleon,  and 
Schroter  lost  his  appointment  as  Chief  Magistrate 
of  Lilienthal,  and  also  his  income.  But  there 
was  worse  to  follow.  On  April  20,  1813,  three 
years  after,  the  French,  under  Vandamme,  with 
that  cruelty  which  seems  to  belong  to  warfare, 
occupied  Lilienthal,  and  set  fire  to  the  little 
village.  A  few  days  later  the  French  soldiers 
entered  the  observatory  and  burned  it  to  the 
ground.  All  Schroter's  precious  observations, 
accumulated  after  thirty-four  years'  labour,  were 
destroyed  with  a  few  exceptions,  the  observa- 
tions on  Mars  narrowly  escaping  the  conflagra- 
tion. Unable  to  forget  the  destruction  of  his 
observatory,  and  without  the  means  to  repair 
the  loss,  he  lived  only  three  years  after  the 
disaster.  He  died  on  August  29,  1816,  "leaving 


68      A  CENTUKY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

behind  him,"  says  Mr  Arthur  Mee,  "an  im- 
perishable record,  and  a  noble  example  to  ob- 
servers of  all  time." 

Wilhelm  Gotthelf  Lohrmann,  a  land-surveyor  of 
Dresden,  continued  the  observations  of  Schroter, 
and  in  1824  published  four  of  the  twenty-five 
proposed  sections  of  a  large  lunar  chart.  In 
1827,  however,  his  sight  began  to  fail,  and  he 
was  obliged  to  abandon  his  intention.  But  a 
successor  had  already  appeared  on  the  scene. 
Johann  Heinrich  von  Madler  (1794-1874)  was 
born  in  Berlin  in  1794,  and,  after  a  severe 
struggle  to  earn  a  living,  entered  the  University 
of  Berlin  in  1817.  In  1824  he  became  acquainted 
with  Wilhelm  Beer  (1797-1850),  a  wealthy 
banker,  who  had  come  to  him  for  instruction 
in  astronomy,  and  who  erected  in  1829  an  ob- 
servatory near  his  villa  in  Berlin,  where  pupil 
and  tutor  pursued  their  studies. 

In  1830  Madler,  with  Beer's  assistance,  com- 
menced a  great  trigonometrical  survey  of  the 
surface  of  the  Moon.  The  observations  of 
Beer  and  Madler  were  made  with  no  larger  in- 
strument than  a  3f-inch  refractor.  They  ascer- 
tained the  positions  of  919  lunar  spots,  and 
measured  the  height  of  1095  mountains.  Their 
great  chart  of  the  Moon — which  was  afterwards 
followed  by  a  smaller  one — was  issued  in  four 


THE   MOON.  69 

parts  during  1834-36.  "The  amount  of  detail," 
wrote  Proctor,  "  is  remarkable,  and  the  labour 
actually  bestowed  upon  the  work  will  appear 
incredible."  The  chart  has  neither  been  revised 
nor  superseded,  and  it  remains  to  this  day  one 
of  the  standard  works  on  the  subject. 

The  chart  was  succeeded  in  1837  by  a  descrip- 
tive volume  entitled  '  Der  Mond.'  In  this  work 
Beer  and  Madler  did  much  for  the  progress  of 
lunar  astronomy.  Their  observations  led  to  a 
change  of  opinion  regarding  our  satellite's  physical 
condition.  Herschel,  Schroter,  Olbers,  and  other 
astronomers  seem  to  have  considered  the  Moon 
a  living  world.  Madler  declared  that  it  was  a 
dead  world.  He  believed  it  to  be  destitute  of 
life  of  any  kind,  and  the  changes  observed  by 
Schroter  and  other  observers  were  put  down 
as  illusions.  'Der  Mond'  was  the  end  of 
Madler's  work  in  lunar  astronomy,  for,  receiving 
an  appointment  at  Dorpat,  he  went  there  in 
1846,  and  retained  his  post  until  within  a  few 
years  of  his  death,  which  took  place  at  Hanover 
on  March  14,  1874. 

Madler's  successor  in  the  field  of  lunar  as- 
tronomy was  Johann  Friedrich  Julius  Schmidt 
(1825-1884),  who  was  born  at  Eutin  in  Liibeck 
in  1825.  At  a  very  early  age  he  gave  indica- 
tions of  a  taste  for  astronomy.  Fortunately  his 


70      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

father  possessed  a  small  hand  telescope,  with 
which  young  Schmidt  commenced  his  lunar 
studies.  Appointed  assistant  at  Bonn  and 
Olmtitz  and  director  at  Athens  successively, 
he  kept  up  his  persistent  study  of  the  surface 
of  the  Moon  for  over  forty  years.  In  1839, 
when  fourteen  years  of  age,  he  began  the  valu- 
able series  of  observations  which  were  destined 
to  form  the  basis  of  his  great  chart  of  the  sur- 
face of  the  Moon.  Between  1853  and  1858, 
when  employed  at  Olmtitz,  Schmidt  made  and 
calculated  no  fewer  than  4000  micrometrical 
measures  of  the  altitudes  of  lunar  mountains. 
Before  1866  Schmidt  had  found  no  fewer  than 
278  "  rills,"  and  his  discoveries  were  the  means  of 
augmenting  the  number  of  these  curious  objects 
to  nearly  a  thousand. 

In  a  word,  it  may  be  said  that  Schmidt  drew 
out  a  lunar  geography,  and  the  result  of  his 
labours,  together  with  those  of  Schroter  and 
Madler,  is  that  in  a  sense  we  now  know  the 
features  of  the  Moon  better  than  those  of  the 
Earth.  For  instance,  astronomers  see  the  whole 
surface  of  the  Moon  spread  before  their  eyes, 
while  geographers  can  never  have  a  similar 
view  of  the  terrestrial  features  :  we  have  never 
seen  the  poles  of  the  Earth,  while  the  lunar 
poles  are  well  known  to  astronomers.  For 


THE   MOON.  71 

twenty  years  after  his  appointment  at  Athens, 
Schmidt  worked  at  fixing  the  positions  of  lunar 
objects,  measuring  the  heights  of  mountains  and 
the  depths  of  craters.  An  idea  of  his  enthusiasm 
in  constructing  his  great  chart  may  be  gained 
from  the  fact  that  he  made  almost  a  thousand 
original  sketches. 

Madler's  dogmatic  assertion  that  the  Moon 
was  entirely  a  dead  world  was  generally 
believed  until  Schmidt  made  observations  to 
the  contrary.  From  1837  to  1866  the  popular 
opinion  was  that  our  satellite  was  an  absolutely 
dead  world.  Consequently  there  was  little  prog- 
ress in  lunar  astronomy  during  those  thirty 
years.  Although  Madler's  view  was  much 
nearer  the  truth  than  the  opinions  of  his 
predecessors,  it  was  also  too  positive.  His 
confident  assertion,  which  was  received  with- 
out hesitation,  was  never  questioned  until 
Schmidt  came  upon  the  scene.  To  Schmidt 
the  Moon  was  not  entirely  dead,  and  it  was 
he  who  brought  forward  indisputable  evidence 
as  to  the  existence  of  changes  on  its  surface. 
In  October  1866  he  announced  that  the  crater 
Linne  had  lost  all  appearance  of  such,  and 
that  it  had  become  entirely  effaced.  Lohrmann 
and  Madler  had  observed  it  under  a  totally 
different  aspect,  as  also  had  Schmidt  himself 


72      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

from  1840  to  1843.  There  was  great  excite- 
ment in  the  astronomical  world  on  Schmidt's 
announcement,  and  many  astronomers  denied 
the  change,  although  Schmidt's  observation  was 
confirmed  by  Secchi  and  Webb.  The  evidence 
in  favour  of  it  preponderated,  and  very  few 
observers  now  consider  the  Moon's  surface  to 
be  absolutely  changeless. 

In  1865  Schmidt  had  begun  to  arrange  his 
observations  on  the  Moon  into  the  form  of  a 
chart.  At  first  he  decided  to  have  a  chart  of 
six  feet  diameter,  divided,  like  that  of  Madler, 
into  four  sections.  But  in  April  1868,  on 
making  an  estimate  of  the  value  of  such  a 
chart,  he  was  dissatisfied,  and  determined  to 
construct  a  map  of  the  same  size  divided  into 
twenty-five  sections  instead  of  four.  He  began 
the  work  in  1868,  and  after  six  years  the 
great  map  was  completed.  After  some  delay 
the  German  Government  undertook  to  issue  the 
chart  at  their  expense,  and  it  was  published  in 
1879,  after  fourteen  years  of  preparation.  It 
contained  no  fewer  than  30,000  objects,  and  its 
completed  diameter  was  six  feet  three  inches — 
more  than  double  the  size  of  any  previous 
map  of  the  Moon.  Indeed,  it  was  probably 
the  greatest  contribution  ever  made  to  lunar 
astronomy.  Schmidt  lived  only  a  few  years 


THE   MOON.  73 

after  the  publication  of  his  great  chart.  He 
died  at  Athens,  in  his  fifty  -  ninth  year, 
February  8,  1884. 

Schmidt's  announcement  of  the  change  in  the 
appearance  of  Linnd  was  followed  in  1878  by 
a  statement  by  Hermann  Joseph  Klein  (born 
1842)  of  Cologne,  to  the  effect  that  a  new 
crater  had  been  formed  to  the  north  of  the 
well-known  lunar  crater,  Hyginus.  The  change 
in  this  case,  however,  is  by  no  means  so  certain 
as  in  that  of  Linne.  It  will  be  observed  that 
the  majority  of  the  students  of  the  Moon 
were  Germans.  In  England  the  study  was 
not  taken  up  until  1864,  when  a  Lunar 
Committee  of  the  British  Association  was  ap- 
pointed. Some  good  lunar  work  was  done  by 
the  well-known  astronomer,  Thomas  William 
Webb  (1807-1885),  while  the  study  was  pop- 
ularised by  James  Nasmyth  (1808-1890),  the 
famous  engineer,  who  published,  in  1874,  in 
conjunction  with  James  Carpenter  of  Greenwich 
Observatory,  a  beautifully -illustrated  volume 
entitled  'The  Moon/  This  was  succeeded,  in 
1876,  by  the  larger  work  of  Edmund  Neison 
(now  Nevill),  Government  Astronomer  of  Natal. 
About  this  time  several  English  astronomers, 
devoted  to  the  study  of  the  Moon,  formed  them- 
selves into  the  Selenographical  Society.  After 


74      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

a  few  years,  however,  the  society  came  to  an 
end,  and  the  enthusiasts  formed  themselves  into 
the  lunar  section  of  the  British  Astronomical 
Association,  on  the  foundation  of  that  society 
in  1890.  Chief  among  those  English  seleno- 
graphers  was  Thomas  Gwyn  JElger  (1837-1897), 
whose  observations  of  the  Moon  and  drawings 
of  the  various  craters  were  of  the  utmost  value. 
Two  years  before  his  death,  in  1895,  Elger  pub- 
lished his  important  work,  *  The  Moon/  along 
with  an  exhaustive  chart  of  the  visible  face  of 
our  satellite. 

Herschel  and  Schroter  firmly  believed  in  the 
existence  of  a  lunar  atmosphere,  the  latter 
believing  that  he  had  actually  observed  the 
Moon's  atmospheric  envelope.  Early  in  the 
nineteenth  century  it  was  soon  observed,  how- 
ever, that  on  the  Moon  passing  over  and  occult- 
ing stars,  these  stars  disappeared  suddenly 
behind  the  Moon's  limb,  instead  of  gradually, 
as  they  should  have  done,  had  an  atmosphere 
of  any  density  existed.  Accordingly  astrono- 
mers gave  up  believing  in  a  lunar  atmosphere. 
On  January  4,  1865,  Huggins  observed  with 
his  spectroscope  the  occultation  of  a  small  star 
in  Pisces.  There  was  not  the  slightest  sign  of 
absorption  in  a  lunar  atmosphere ;  the  entire 
spectrum  vanished  at  once. 


THE   MOON.  75 

Lunar  photography  was  introduced  as  long 
ago  as  1858  by  Lewis  Morris  Rutherfurd  (1816- 
1892),  the  well-known  American  astronomer  ;  but 
for  years  very  little  was  done  in  this  matter, 
although  Rutherfurd  secured  fairly  good  photo- 
graphs. Rutherfurd,  De  la  Rue,  and  the  older 
astronomical  photographers  took  photographs  of 
the  entire  Moon,  but  this  plan  was  abandoned 
in  favour  of  what  Miss  Clerke  calls  "  bit  by  bit 
photography."  About  1890  this  method  was 
introduced,  and  has  been  followed  with  success 
by  Maurice  Loewy  (born  1833),  and  his  assistant, 
Pusiex,  at  the  Paris  Observatory ;  by  Ladislas 
Weinek  at  Prague ;  by  the  astronomers  of  the 
Lick  Observatory;  and  by  William  Henry  Picker- 
ing (born  1858),  the  distinguished  astronomer  of 
Harvard,  whose  discoveries  and  investigations 
have  created  quite  a  new  interest  in  lunar 
astronomy.  These  investigations  were  com- 
menced in  1891  at  Arequipa,  on  the  slope  of 
the  Andes,  in  Peru.  An  occultation  of  Jupiter, 
witnessed  by  W.  H.  Pickering  on  October  12, 
1892,  gave  support  to  the  view  that  a  very 
tenuous  lunar  atmosphere  does  exist.  In  1900 
he  established,  near  Mandeville,  Jamaica,  a  tem- 
porary astronomical  station,  where  he  obtained 
many  excellent  photographs.  Totally  he  secured 
eighty  plates.  These  appeared,  as  the  first  com- 


76      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

plete  photographic  lunar  atlas  ever  published,  in 
his  work  'The  Moon'  (1903),  in  which  he  sums 
up  all  his  observations  since  1891,  and  concludes 
that  "the  evidence  in  favour  of  the  idea  that 
volcanic  activity  upon  the  Moon  has  not  yet 
ceased  is  pretty  strong,  if  not  fairly  conclusive." 

Pickering  points  out  that  the  density  of  the 
lunar  atmosphere  is  not  greater  than  one  ten- 
thousandth  of  that  at  the  Earth's  surface,  and, 
under  these  circumstances,  water  cannot  exist 
above  freezing-point,  which  of  course  brings  us 
to  the  subject'of  snow.  He  considers  that  snow 
is  observed  on  the  mountain  peaks  and  near  the 
poles  of  the  Moon,  and  he  believes  his  conclusion 
to  be  verified  by  observations  on  the  well-known 
crater,  Linnd  He  brings  forward  evidence  of 
the  probable  existence  on  the  Moon  of  organic 
life,  pointing  out  that  the  difference  between 
the  conditions  of  the  Earth  and  the  Moon  is 
not  so  great  as  that  above  and  below  the  ocean 
on  our  own  planet.  He  has  collected  evidence 
of  the  existence  of  something  resembling  vege- 
tation on  the  Moon  "  coming  up,  flourishing,  and 
dying,  just  as  vegetation  springs  and  withers 
on  the  Earth." 

The  first  successful  attempt  to  measure  the 
heating  power  of  moonlight  was  made  in  1846  on 
Mount  Vesuvius  by  Melloni,  an  Italian  physicist, 


THE   MOON.  77 

whose  results  were  confirmed  four  years  later  by 
Zantedeschi,  another  Italian.  The  most  import- 
ant work  in  this  direction  was  accomplished 
by  the  present  Earl  of  Rosse  (born  in  1840), 
who  in  the  years  1869-72  believed  himself  to 
have  measured  the  lunar  heat ;  but  these  con- 
clusions were  not  altogether  confirmed  by  the 
observations  of  Dr  Otto  Boeddicker  (Lord  Rosse's 
astronomer),  during  the  total  lunar  eclipse  of 
October  4,  1884.  Further  investigations  on  this 
subject  were  afterwards  made  by  Samuel  Pierpont 
Langley  (1834-1906),  of  Alleghany,  and  by  his 
assistant,  Frank  Very. 

The  motion  of  the  Moon  and  its  perturbations 
were  made  the  subject  of  deep  study  by  the 
famous  Pierre  Simon  Laplace  (1749-1827),  the 
contemporary  of  Herschel,  and  the  worthy  suc- 
cessor of  Newton.  He  devoted  much  attention 
to  the  secular  acceleration  of  the  Moon's  mean 
motion,  a  problem  which  had  baffled  the  greatest 
mathematicians.  After  a  profound  discussion  he 
found,  in  1787,  that  the  average  distance  of  the 
Earth  and  Moon  from  the  Sun  had  been  slowly 
increasing  for  several  centuries,  the  result  being 
an  increase  in  the  Moon's  velocity.  In  the  third 
volume  of  the  '  Mecanique  Celeste'  Laplace 
worked  out  the  lunar  theory  in  great  detail, 
although  he  calculated  no  lunar  tables.  After 


78      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

his  death  the  subject  was  taken  up  by  Charles 
Theodore  Damoiseau  (1768-1846),  and  the  most 
important  advance  was  made  by  Giovanni 
Antonio  Amadeo  Plana  (1781-1864),  the  director 
of  the  Turin  Observatory,  who  published  in  1832 
a  very  complete  lunar  theory.  The  work  of 
Plana  was  followed  by  that  of  Peter  Andreas 
Hansen  (1795-1874),  whose  lunar  tables  were 
used  for  the  Nautical  Almanac,  and  whom 
Professor  Simon  Newcomb  considers  to  be 
the  greatest  master  of  celestial  mechanics  since 
Laplace.  The  theory  of  the  Moon's  motion  was 
worked  out  in  detail  by  the  famous  astronomer 
Charles  Eugene  Delaunay  (1816-1872),  who 
from  1870  till  1872  occupied  the  post  of 
director  of  the  Paris  Observatory.  Delaunay 
was  about  to  work  out  the  lunar  tables  when, 
in  1872,  he  was  accidentally  drowned  by  the  cap- 
sizing of  a  pleasure-boat  at  Cherbourg.  The 
work  accomplished  in  this  direction  by  Simon 
Newcomb  (born  1835)  is  of  great  importance, 
particularly  in  his  correction  of  Hansen's  tables. 
John  Couch  Adams  (1819-1892),  one  of  the  dis- 
coverers of  Neptune,  while  at  work  on  the  lunar 
theory,  had  occasion  to  correct  Laplace's  sup- 
posed solution  of  the  acceleration  of  the  lunar 
motion.  On  going  over  the  calculation  Adams 
found  that  several  quantities,  omitted  by  Laplace 


THE   MOON.  "79 

as  unimportant,  showed  that  the  Moon  has  a 
minute  increase  of  speed  for  which  the  theory 
of  gravitation  will  not  account, — a  conclusion 
opposed  by  Plana,  Hansen,  and  Pontecoulant, 
but  fully  confirmed  by  Delaunay.  Delaunay 
suggested  in  1865  that  the  minute  apparent 
increase  was  due  to  the  retardation  of  the 
Earth's  rotation  by  tidal  friction.  This  brings 
us  to  the  subject  of  celestial  evolution,  which 
is  discussed  in  another  chapter. 


CHAPTER    V. 

THE   INNER   PLANETS. 

MUCH  progress  has  been  made  during  the  last 
hundred  years  in  our  knowledge  of  the  planets. 
In  fact,  the  study  of  Mercury  only  dates  from 
the  commencement  of  the  nineteenth  century. 
Our  knowledge  of  the  vicinity  of  the  Sun  is 
very  limited,  and  Mercury  is  difficult  of  observa- 
tion. So  limited,  in  fact,  is  our  knowledge  of 
the  Sun's  surroundings,  that  it  is  not  yet  known 
for  certain 'whether  there  is  a  planet,  or  planets, 
between  Mercury  and  the  Sun.  Perturbations 
in  the  motion  of  the  perihelion  of  Mercury's 
orbit  led  Le  Verrier  in  1859  to  the  belief  that 
a  planet  of  about  the  size  of  Mercury,  or  else 
a  zone  of  asteroids,  existed  between  Mercury  and 
the  Sun.  It  was,  however,  obvious  that  such  a 
planet  could  only  be  seen  when  in  transit  across 
the  Sun's  disc,  or  during  a  total  eclipse.  Mean- 
while a  French  doctor,  Lescarbault,  informed 
Le  Verrier  that  he  had  seen  a  round  object  in 


THE   INNER   PLANETS.  81 

transit  over  the  Sun's  disc.  Le  Verrier,  certain 
that  this  was  the  missing  planet,  named  it 
"Vulcan,"  and  calculated  its  orbit,  assigning  it 
a  revolution  period  of  twenty  days.  But  it  was 
never  seen  again.  Transits  of  "Vulcan"  were 
fixed  for  1877  and  1882,  but  nothing  was  seen 
on  these  dates.  During  the  total  eclipse  of 
July  29,  1878,  two  observers — James  Watson 
(1838-1880),  the  well-known  astronomer,  and 
Lewis  Swift  (born  1820) — believed  themselves 
to  have  discovered  two  separate  planets,  and 
ultimately  claimed  two  planets  each,  which  were 
never  heard  of  again.  During  the  total  eclipse 
of  18 83  an  active  watch  for  "  suspicious  objects  " 
was  kept,  but  with  no  result.  At  the  eclipses 
of  1900  and  1901  respectively,  photographs  were 
exposed  by  the  American  astronomers,  W.  H. 
Pickering  and  Charles  Dillon  Perrine  (born 
1867),  but  on  none  of  these  plates  could  any 
trace  of  "Vulcan"  be  found.  At  the  total 
eclipse  of  August  30,  1905,  plates  were  again 
exposed,  but  no  announcement  has  been  made 
of  an  intra-Mercurial  planet ;  and  the  prevalent 
opinion  among  astronomers  is  that  no  planet 
comparable  with  Mercury  in  size  exists  between 
that  planet  and  the  Sun. 

The    study    of    the    physical    appearance    of 
Mercury  was  inaugurated  by  Schroter,  who  in 

F 


82      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

1800  noticed  that  the  southern  horn  of  the 
crescent  presented  a  blunted  appearance,  which 
he  attributed  to  the  existence  of  a  mountain 
eleven  miles  in  height.  From  observations  of 
this  mountain  he  came  to  the  conclusion  that 
the  planet  rotated  in  24  hours  4  minutes.  This 
was  afterwards  reduced  by  Friedrich  Wilhelm 
Beqsel  (1784-1846)  to  24  hours  53  seconds. 

After  the  time  of  Schroter  there  was  no 
astronomer  who  paid  much  attention  to  either 
Mercury  or  Venus  until  the  arrival  on  the  scene 
of  the  most  persistent  planetary  observer  and 
one  of  the  foremost  astronomers  of  the  nine- 
teenth century.  Giovanni  Virginio  Schiaparelli 
was  born  at  Savigliano,  in  Piedmont,  in  1835, 
and  graduated  at  Turin  in  1854.  Called  to 
Milan  as  assistant  in  the  Brera  Observatory  in 
1860,  he  became  director  in  1862,  and  there 
for  thirty-eight  years  he  studied  astronomy  in 
all  its  aspects,  making  a  great  name  for  him- 
self in  various  branches  of  the  science.  In 
1900  he  retired  from  the  post  of  director,  and 
pursues  his  astronomical  researches  in  his 
retirement. 

In  1882  Schiaparelli  took  up  the  study  of 
Mercury  in  the  clear  air  of  Milan.  Instead  of 
observing  the  planet  through  the  evening  haze, 
like  Schroter  and  others,  he  examined  it  by  day, 


THE    INNER   PLANETS.  83 

and  was  enabled  to  follow  it  hourly  instead  of 
looking  at  it  for  a  short  period  when  near  the 
horizon.  At  length,  after  seven  years'  observa- 
tion, he  announced,  on  December  8,  1889,  that 
Mercury  performs  only  one  rotation  during  its 
revolution  round  the  Sun — in  fact,  that  its  day 
and  year  coincide.  As  a  consequence,  the  planet 
keeps  the  same  face  towards  the  Sun,  one  side 
having  everlasting  day  and  the  other  perpetual 
night ;  but  owing  to  the  libratory  movement  of 
Mercury — the  result  of  uniform  motion  on  its 
axis  and  irregular  motion  in  its  orbit — the  Sun 
rises  and  sets  on  a  small  zone  of  the  planet's 
surface.  Schiaparelli's  observations  indicated  that 
Mercury  is  a  much  spotted  globe,  with  a  moder- 
ately dense  atmosphere,  and  he  wras  enabled  to 
form  a  chart  of  its  surface-markings. 

Schiaparelli's  conclusions  remained  until  1896 
unconfirmed  and  yet  not  denied,  although  most 
astronomers  were  sceptical  on  the  subject.  In 
1896  the  subject  was  taken  up  by  the  American 
astronomer,  Percival  Lowell  (born  1855),  who,  in 
the  clear  air  of  Arizona,  confirmed  Schiaparelli's 
conclusions,  fixing  88  days  as  the  period  of 
rotation.  He  remarked,  however,  that  no  signs 
of  an  atmosphere  or  clouds  were  visible  to  him. 
The  surface  of  Mercury,  he  says,  is  colourless, — 
"  a  geography  in  black  and  white."  The  deter- 


84      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

mination  of  the  rotation  period  by  Schiaparelli 
and  Lowell  is  now  generally  accepted,  and  is 
confirmed  by  the  theory  of  tidal  friction.  It 
is  only  right  to  add  that  William  Frederick 
Denning  (born  1848)  in  1881  suspected  a 
rotation  period  of  25  hours,  but  this  remains 
unconfirmed.  In  April  1871  the  spectrum  of 
Mercury  was  examined  by  Hermann  Carl 
Vogel  (born  1842)  at  Bothkamp.  He  suspected 
traces  of  an  atmosphere  similar  to  ours,  but 
was  not  certain.  Of  more  interest  are  the 
photometric  observations  of  Zollner  in  1874. 
These  observations  indicated  that  the  surface 
of  Mercury  is  rugged  and  mountainous,  and 
comparable  with  the  Moon, — a  conclusion  sup- 
ported by  Lowell's  observations  in  1896. 

Venus,  the  nearest  planet  to  the  Earth,  has 
been  attentively  studied  for  three  centuries,  and 
still  comparatively  little  is  known  regarding  it. 
This  is  due  to  its  remarkable  brilliancy,  com- 
bined with  its  proximity  to  the  Sun.  The 
great  problem  at  the  beginning  of  the  nine- 
teenth century  was  the  rotation  of  the  planet. 
In  1779  the  subject  was  taken  up  by  Schroter 
at  Lilienthal.  Nine  years  later,  from  a  faint 
streak  visible  on  the  disc,  he  concluded  that 
rotation  was  performed  in  23  hours  28  minutes, 
and  in  1811  this  was  reduced  by  seven  minutes ; 


THE   INNER  PLANETS.  85 

but  as  Herschel  was  unable  to  observe  the  mark- 
ings seen  by  Schroter,  many  astronomers  were 
inclined  to  be  sceptical  regarding  the  accuracy 
of  the  Lilienthal  observer's  results.  Schroter 
also  observed  the  southern  horn  of  Venus  when 
in  the  crescent  form  to  be  blunted,  and  he 
ascribed  this  to  the  existence  of  a  great 
mountain,  five  or  six  times  the  elevation  of 
Chimborazo ;  while  he  observed  irregularities 
along  the  terminator,  which  he  considered  to  be 
more  strongly  marked  than  those  on  the  Moon. 
Schroter's  opinion  on  this  point,  although  re- 
jected by  Herschel,  was  confirmed  by  Madler, 
Zenger,  Ertborn,  Denning,  and  by  the  Italian 
astronomer  Francesco  Di  Vico  (1805-1848), 
director  of  the  Observatory  of  the  Collegio 
Romano.  In  1839  Di  Vico  attacked  the 
problem  of  the  rotation,  and  his  results  were 
confirmatory  of  those  of  Schroter.  He  estimated 
that  the  axis  of  Venus  was  inclined  at  an  angle 
of  53°  to  the  plane  of  its  orbit.  Meanwhile 
a  series  of  important  observations  had  been 
made  on  Venus  by  the  Scottish  astronomer 
and  theologian,  Thomas  Dick  (1772-1857),  who 
suggested  daylight  observations  on  Venus  to 
solve  the  problem  of  the  rotation. 

In     1877     the     question    was     attacked     by 
Schiaparelli,    who    commenced    a    series    of    ob- 


86      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

servations  on  Venus  at  Milan  in  that  year. 
The  results  of  his  studies  were  summed  up  in 
1890  in  five  papers  contributed  to  the  Milan 
Academy.  He  came  to  the  conclusion  that  the 
markings  observed  by  Schroter,  Di  Yico,  and 
others  were  not  really  permanent,  and  concen- 
trated his  attention  on  round  white  spots,  which 
remained  fixed  in  position.  Instead  of  observing 
Venus  in  the  evening,  Schiaparelli  followed  it  by 
day,  watching  it  continuously  on  one  occasion 
for  eight  hours.  But  the  markings  remained 
fixed.  Schiaparelli  accordingly  concluded  that 
the  planet's  rotation  was  performed  in  prob- 
ably 225  days,  equal  to  the  time  of  revol- 
ution. One  face  is  turned  towards  the  Sun 
continually,  while  the  other  is  perpetually  in 
darkness. 

The  announcement  was  so  startling  that,  as 
Miss  Clerke  says,  "  a  clamour  of  contradiction 
was  immediately  raised,  and  a  large  amount  of 
evidence  on  both  sides  of  the  question  has  since 
been  collected."  Perrotin  at  Nice,  Tacchini  at 
Rome,  Cerulli  at  Teramo,  Mascari  at  Catania 
and  Mount  Etna,  and  Lowell  in  Arizona,  all 
in  favourable  climates,  confirmed  Schiaparelli's 
results,  as  also  did  a  second  series  of  observa- 
tions by  the  Milan  astronomer  himself  in  1895. 
On  the  other  hand,  Neisten,  Trouvelot,  Camille 


THE   INNER   PLANETS.  87 

Flammarion  (born  1842),  and  others,  under 
less  favourable  climatic  conditions,  arrived  at 
a  period  of  24  hours.  Aristarch  Belopolsky 
(born  1854),  from  spectroscopic  observations  at 
Pulkowa,  by  means  of  Doppler's  principle,  found 
a  period  of  12  hours.  Lowell,  by  the  same 
principle,  found,  in  1901-03,  a  period  of  225 
days,  in  agreement  with  Schiaparelli's  results. 
This  is  the  last  word  on  the  subject.  Schia- 
parelli's rotation  period,  confirmed  by  the  theory 
of  tidal  friction,  is  generally  accepted. 

That  Yenus  has  an  atmosphere  was  one  of 
the  conclusions  reached  by  Schroter  in  1792 ; 
and  in  this  at  least  he  was  correct,  as  the 
atmosphere  of  Yenus,  illuminated  by  the  solar 
rays,  has  been  seen  extending  round  the  entire 
disc  of  the  planet.  Spectroscopic  observations 
by  Tacchini,  Ricco,  and  Young,  during  the 
transits  of  1874  and  1882,  indicated  the  exist- 
ence of  water-vapour  in  the  planet's  atmosphere. 
Yery  little  has  been  discovered  regarding  the 
" geography"  of  Venus.  White  patches  at  the 
supposed  "poles"  of  the  planet  were  observed 
in  1813  by  Franz  von  Gruithuisen,  and  in  1878 
by  the  French  astronomer  Trouvelot  (1827-1895). 
The  secondary  light  of  Venus,  similar  to  the 
"  old  Moon  in  the  new  Moon's  arms,"  was 
repeatedly  observed  since  the  time  of  Schroter 


88      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

by  Vogel,  Lohse,  Zenger,  and  others.  Vogel 
attributed  it  to  twilight,  and  Lamp,  a  German 
observer,  to  electrical  processes  analogous  to  our 
aurorse.  In  1887  a  Belgian  astronomer,  Paul 
Stroobant,  submitted  to  a  searching  examination 
all  the  supposed  observations  of  a  satellite  of 
Venus,  and  was  enabled  to  explain  nearly  all 
the  supposed  satellites  as  small  stars  which 
happened  to  lie  near  the  planet's  path  in  the 
sky  at  the  time  of  observation. 

The  study  of  our  own  planet  can  hardly  be 
said  to  belong  to  the  realm  of  astronomy. 
Nevertheless,  it  is  through  astronomical  observa- 
tion that  the  motion  of  the  North  Pole  has  been 
discovered.  For  many  years  it  has  been  a 
problem  whether  there  is  a  variation  of  latitude 
resulting  from  the  motion  of  the  pole.  Euler 
had  declared,  from  theoretical  investigation,  that, 
were  there  such  a  motion,  the  period  must  be 
10  months.  The  question  was  revived  in  1885 
by  the  observations  of  Seth  Carlo  Chandler 
(born  1846)  at  Cambridge,  Mass.,  with  his 
newly -invented  instrument,  the  "  almucantar," 
which  indicated  an  appreciable  variation  of 
latitude.  This  was  confirmed  by  Friedrich 
Kiistner  (born  1856),  now  director  of  the 
Observatory  at  Bonn.  The  idea  now  occurred 
to  Chandler  to  search  through  the  older  records 


THE   INNER   PLANETS.  89 

to  discover  if  there  was  any  trace  of  the  varia- 
tion of  latitude,  with  the  result  that  he  brought 
out  a  period  of  14  months  instead  of  10.  This 
aroused  much  interest,  and  many  prominent 
astronomers  denied  Chandler's  results,  which 
were  announced  in  1891.  As  a  well-known 
astronomer  has  expressed  it,  "  Euler's  work 
had  shown  what  period  the  motion  must  have, 
and  any  appearance  of  another  period  must  be 
due  to  some  error  in  the  observations.  Chandler 
replied  to  the  effect  that  he  did  not  care  for 
Euler's  mathematics :  the  observations  plainly 
showed  14  months,  and  if  Euler  said  10,  he 
must  have  made  the  mistake.  I  do  not  ex- 
aggerate the  situation  in  the  least ;  it  was  a 
deadlock :  Chandler  and  observation  against 
the  whole  weight  of  observation  and  theory." 
It  was  now  shown  by  Newcomb  that  Euler  had 
assumed  the  Earth  to  be  an  absolutely  rigid 
body,  while  modern  investigations  show  that  it 
is  not  so.  Chandler's  discovery  is  now  accepted, 
and  proves  that  the  North  Pole  is  not  fixed 
in  position,  but  has  a  small  periodic  motion, 
though  never  twelve  yards  from  its  mean  posi- 
tion. That  the  small  resulting  variation  in  the 
position  of  the  stars  has  been  noticed  at  all 
is  a  striking  illustration  of  the  accuracy  of 
astronomical  observation. 


90      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

Of  all  the  planets  Mars  has  been  most  studied 
during  the  nineteenth  century.  Many  illustrious 
astronomers  have  devoted  years  to  the  study  of 
the  red  planet,  with  the  result  that  more  is 
known  of  the  surface  of  Mars  than  of  any  other 
celestial  body,  with  the  exception  of  the  Moon. 
After  the  time  of  Herschel,  the  leading  students 
of  Mars  were  Beer  and  Madler,  who  carefully 
studied  the  planet  from  1828  to  1839.  They 
identified  at  each  opposition  the  same  dark  spots, 
frequently  obscured  by  mists,  and  they  also  made 
the  most  accurate  determination  of  the  rotation 
period,  which  they  fixed  at  24  hours  37  minutes  23 
seconds.  This  estimate  was  confirmed  in  1862  by 
Friedrich  Kaiser  (1808-1872)  of  Leyden,  in  1869 
by  Richard  Anthony  Proctor  (1837-1888),  and 
in  1892  by  Henricius  Gerardus  van  de  Sande 
Bakhuyzen  (born  1838),  director  of  the  Leyden 
Observatory.  In  1862  Lockyer  identified  the 
various  markings  seen  by  Beer  and  Madler  in 
1830.  The  other  great  names  in  Martian  study 
prior  to  1877  are  Angelo  Secchi  and  William 
Rutter  Dawes  (1799-1868),  who  studied  Mars 
from  1852  to  1865  and  secured  a  very  valu- 
able series  of  drawings.  These  drawings  were 
used  by  Proctor  for  the  construction  of  the 
first  reliable  map  of  Mars,  which  was  published 
in  1870  in  his  work,  'Other  Worlds  than  Ours/ 


THE    INNER   PLANETS.  91 

Proctor  gave  names  to  the  various  Martian 
features,  the  reddish-ochre  portions  of  the  disc 
being  named  continents  and  the  bluish-green 
portions  seas ;  and  Proctor's  views  on  Mars 
found  favour  for  many  years.  In  1877,  how- 
ever, Schiaparelli  opened  a  new  era  in  the  study 
of  Mars.  In  September  of  that  year,  during  the 
very  favourable  opposition  of  the  planet,  Schia- 
parelli, while  executing  a  trigonometrical  survey 
of  the  disc,  discovered  that  the  continents  were 
cut  up  by  numerous  long  dark  streaks,  which  he 
called  canali.  In  1879,  to  his  surprise,  he  found 
that  some  of  the  canals  had  become  double ; 
and  he  confirmed  this  in  1881  and  at  subsequent 
oppositions.  Meanwhile,  as  Schiaparelli  was  the 
only  observer  who  had  hitherto  seen  the  canals, 
there  was  much  scepticism  as  to  their  reality. 
In  1886,  however,  they  were  seen  at  the  Nice 
Observatory  by  Henri  Perrotin  (1845-1904), 
who  also  observed  their  duplication.  Since 
1886  they  have  been  observed  by  many  astron- 
omers, including  Camille  Flammarion  in  France, 
William  Frederick  Denning  (born  1848)  in 
England,  Vincenzo  Cerulli  (born  1859)  in  Italy, 
Percival  Lowell  and  W.  H.  Pickering  in  the 
United  States.  In  1892  W.  H.  Pickering  suc- 
cessfully observed  the  canals,  and  discovered 
at  the  junctions  of  two  or  more  canals  round 


92      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

black  spots,  to  which  he  gave  the  name  of 
"  lakes,"  in  keeping  with  the  view  that  the  dark 
regions  of  the  planet  were  seas. 

In  1894  Percival  Lowell  erected  at  Flagstaff, 
Arizona,  an  observatory  for  the  specific  purpose 
of  observing  Mars  and  its  canals  in  good  and 
steady  air.  He  was  assisted  by  W.  H.  Pickering 
and  by  Andrew  Ellicott  Douglass  (born  1867). 
During  a  year's  study  Douglass  measured  the 
Martian  atmosphere  and  discovered  canals  cross- 
ing the  dark  regions  of  the  planet,  finally  dis- 
proving the  idea  of  their  aqueous  character. 
Lowell  recognised  all  Schiaparelli's  canals,  and 
discovered  many  more.  He  also  attentively 
studied  the  south  polar  cap  of  Mars,  which  dis- 
appeared entirely  on  October  12,  1894.  Lowell 
noticed,  also,  that  as  the  cap  melted  the  canals 
became  darker,  as  if  water  was  being  conveyed 
down;  and  accordingly  he  adopted  the  view 
put  forward  by  Schiaparelli,  that  the  canals  are 
waterways  lined  on  either  side  by  banks  of 
vegetation.  His  observations  were  published  in 
the  end  of  1895  in  his  work  'Mars/  He  is  of 
opinion  that  the  reddish-ochre  regions  or  "con- 
tinents" are  deserts,  and  the  greenish  areas 
marshy  tracts  of  vegetation.  The  lakes  are 
named  by  him  "oases,"  and,  as  Miss  Clerke 
observes,  he  "  does  not  shrink  from  the  full 


THE   INNER   PLANETS.  93 

implication  of  the  term."  He  regards  the  canals 
as  strips  of  vegetation  fertilised  by  a  small 
canal,  much  too  small  to  be  seen,  an  idea  which 
originated  with  W.  H.  Pickering.  The  canals 
are  believed  by  Lowell  to  be  waterways  down 
which  the  water  from  the  melting  polar  cap  is 
conveyed  to  the  various  oases.  He  considers,  in 
fact,  that  the  canals  are  constructed  by  intelli- 
gent beings  with  the  express  purpose  of  fertil- 
ising the  oases,  regarded  by  him  as  centres  of 
population.  He  remarks  that  water  is  scarce  on 
the  planet,  owing  to  its  small  size,  and  as  a  con- 
sequence the  inhabitants  are  forced  to  utilise  every 
drop.  The  canal  system  is  the  result. 

Lowell's  theory  has  not  been  cordially  received 
— although  it  is  now  gradually  gaining  popu- 
larity,— and  several  other  hypotheses  have  been 
propounded  to  explain  the  canals.  Proctor,  who 
died  some  years  before  Lowell's  theory  was  given 
to  the  world,  regarded  them  as  rivers,  but  this 
view  may  now  be  looked  upon  as  abandoned. 
It  was  suggested  that  the  canals  might  be  cracks 
in  the  surface  of  Mars  or  meteors  ploughing 
tracks  above  it :  and  Professor  John  Martin 
Schaeberle  (born  1853)  of  the  Lick  Observatory 
put  forward  the  view  that  the  canals  were  chains 
of  mountains  running  over  the  light  and  dark 
regions.  None  of  these  theories,  however,  gained 


94      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

popularity,  and  had  to  give  way  to  a  more 
popular  theory,  the  "  illusion "  hypothesis,  put 
forward  by  the  Italian  astronomer  Cerulli,  and 
supported  by  Newcomb  and  Maunder.  On  the 
basis  of  the  illusion  theory,  Newcomb  explains 
that  the  " canaliform "  appearance  "is  not  to  be 
regarded  as  a  pure  illusion  on  the  one  hand  or 
an  exact  representation  of  objects  on  the  other. 
It  grows  out  of  the  spontaneous  action  of  the 
eye  in  shaping  slight  and  irregular  combinations 
of  light  and  shade,  too  minute  to  be  separately 
made  out  into  regular  forms."  Experiments 
were  made  by  Maunder  in  1902,  and  the  results 
pointed  to  the  truth  of  the  theory  that  the 
canals  were  really  illusions.  But  the  studies  of 
Lowell  at  the  oppositions  of  1903  and  1905  have 
seriously  weakened  the  hypothesis  of  Cerulli  and 
Maunder,  and  strongly  confirm  the  theory  of  the 
artificial  origin  of  the  canals.  In  1903  Lowell  was 
enabled,  from  a  study  of  the  development  of  the 
canals,  to  show  the  probability  of  their  artificial 
nature,  and  his  study  of  the  double  canals  showed 
a  distinct  plan  in  their  distribution.  Finally, 
on  May  11,  1905,  several  photographs  of  Mars 
were  secured  at  the  Lowell  Observatory,  on 
which  the  canals  appeared,  not  as  dots  of  light 
and  shade,  as  on  the  illusion  theory,  but  as 
straight  dark  lines.  This  goes  far  to  prove  the 


THE   INNER   PLANETS.  95 

reality  of  the  canals, — in  spite  of  the  ridicule 
cast  on  them  and  their  observers, — and  conse- 
quently the  truth  of  the  theory  of  intelligent  life 
in  Mars. 

Meanwhile  the  old-fashioned  Martian  obser- 
vations have  been  continued  in  less  favourable 
climates  than  Arizona  and  Italy  by  various 
astronomers,  among  them  the  famous  Camille 
Flammarion,  the  American  astronomers  James 
Edward  Keeler  (1857-1900),  Edward  Emerson 
Barnard  (born  1857),  the  English  astronomer 
W.  F.  Denning,  and  others.  These  conscientious 
and  painstaking  observers  have  done  much  for 
Martian  study  in  increasing  the  number  of 
accurate  delineations  of  the  Martian  surface. 

The  spectrum  of  Mars  was  first  examined  by 
Huggins  in  1867.  He  found  distinct  traces  of 
water-vapour,  and  this  was  confirmed  by  Vogel 
in  1872,  and  by  Maunder  some  years  later.  In 
1894,  however,  William  Wallace  Campbell  (born 
1862),  the  American  astronomer,  observing  from 
the  Lick  Observatory,  California,  was  unable  to 
detect  the  slightest  difference  between  the  spectra 
of  Mars  and  the  Moon,  indicating  that  Mars  had 
no  appreciable  atmosphere ;  and  from  this  he  de- 
duced that  the  Martian  polar  caps  could  not  be 
composed  of  snow  and  ice,  but  of  frozen  carbonic 
acid  gas.  In  1895,  however,  Vogel  confirmed  his 


96      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

previous  observations,  and  reaffirmed  the  presence 
of  water- vapour  in  the  Martian  atmosphere. 

During  the  opposition  of  1830,  Madler  under- 
took an  extensive  search  for  a  Martian  satellite, 
but  was  unsuccessful.  In  1862  the  search  was 
resumed  by  Heinrich  Louis  U  Arrest  (1822-1875), 
the  famous  German  observer,  who  was  also  un- 
successful. Accordingly  the  red  planet  was  re- 
ferred to  by  Tennyson  as  the  "moonless  Mars." 
In  1877  the  search  was  taken  up  by  Asaph 
Hall,  the  self-made  American  astronomer,  born 
at  Goshen,  Connecticut,  in  1829,  and  employed 
from  1862  to  1891  at  the  Naval  Observatory, 
Washington.  During  the  famous  opposition  of 
August  1877,  favoured  by  the  great  26 -inch 
refractor,  he  succeeded  in  discovering  two  very 
small  satellites  of  Mars,  to  which  he  gave  the 
names  of  Phobos  and  Deimos.  He  determined 
the  time  of  revolution  of  Phobos  at  7  hours 
39  minutes,  and  that  of  Deimos  at  30  hours 
17  minutes, — Phobos  revolving  round  Mars  more 
than  three  times  for  one  rotation  of  the  planet 
on  its  axis.  These  two  satellites  are  very  small, 
not  more  than  thirty  miles  in  diameter.  After 
Hall's  successful  search,  photographs  were  ex- 
posed at  the  Paris  Observatory  for  other  Martian 
satellites,  but  none  was  discovered.  No  further 
moons  have  been  found  belonging  to  the  red 


THE   INNER   PLANETS.  97 

planet,  nor  is  it  likely  that  any  further  satellites 
of  Mars  are  in  existence. 

The  discovery  of  a  zone  of  small  planets  in 
the  space  between  Mars  and  Jupiter  belongs 
completely  to  the  nineteenth  century,  although 
the  existence  of  a  planet  in  the  vacant  space 
was  suspected  three  centuries  ago.  In  1772  the 
subject  was  taken  up  by  Johann  Elert  Bode 
(1747-1826),  afterwards  director  of  the  Berlin 
Observatory,  who  investigated  a  curious  numer- 
ical relationship,  since  known  as  Bode's  Law,  con- 
necting the  distances  of  the  planets.  If  four  is 
added  to  each  of  the  numbers — 0,  3,  6,  12,  24, 
48,  96,  and  192,  the  resulting  series  represents 
pretty  accurately  the  distances  of  the  planets 
from,  the  Sun,  thus — 4  (Mercury),  7  (Venus), 
10  (The  Earth),  16  (Mars),  28,  52,  (Jupiter), 
and  100  (Saturn).  After  the  discovery  of 
Uranus,  in  1781,  it  was  found  that  it  filled  up 
the  number  196.  Bode,  however,  saw  that 
the  number  28,  between  Mars  and  Jupiter,  was 
vacant,  and  predicted  the  discovery  of  the  planet. 
Aided  by  Franz  Xavier  von  Zach  (1754-1832), 
he  called  a  congress  of  astronomers,  which  as- 
sembled in  1800  at  Schroter's  observatory  at 
Lilienthal,  when,  for  the  purpose  of  searching 
for  the  missing  planet,  the  zodiac  was  divided 
into  twenty-four  zones,  each  of  which  was  given 

G 


98      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

to  a  separate  astronomer.  One  of  them  was 
reserved  for  Giuseppe  Piazzi  (1746-1826),  director 
of  the  Observatory  of  Palermo. 

Born  in  1746  at  Ponte,  in  Lombardy,  Giuseppe 
Piazzi,  after  entering  the  Theatine  Order  of 
monks,  became  in  1780  Professor  of  Mathematics 
at  Palermo,  where  an  observatory  was  erected 
in  1791  ;  and  at  that  observatory  Piazzi  worked 
till  his  death  in  1826.  In  1792  he  commenced 
a  great  star -catalogue,  and  while  making  his 
nightly  observations  he  discovered,  on  January  1, 
1801 — the  first  night  of  the  nineteenth  century, 
— what  he  took  to  be  a  tailless  comet,  but  which 
proved  to  be  a  small  planet  revolving  round 
the  sun  in  the  vacant  space.  The  discovery 
was  hailed  by  Bode  and  Von  Zach  with  much 
enthusiasm,  and  Piazzi  named  the  planet  Ceres. 
The  little  planet  was,  however,  soon  lost  in  the 
rays  of  the  sun  before  sufficient  observations 
had  been  made ;  but  the  great  mathematician, 
Friedrich  Gauss  (1777-1855),  came  to  the  rescue, 
and  pointed  out  the  spot  where  the  planet  was 
to  be  rediscovered.  In  that  spot  it  was  found 
on  December  31,  1801,  by  Yon  Zach  at  Gotha, 
and  on  the  following  evening  by  Heinrich  Gibers 
(1758-1840)  at  Bremen. 

On    March    28,    1802,    while   observing    Ceres 


THE    INNER   PLANETS.  99 

from  his  house  at  Bremen,  Olbers  was  struck 
by  the  presence  of  a  strange  object  near  the 
path  of  the  planet.  At  first  he  supposed  it  to 
be  a  variable  star  at  maximum  brilliance,  but 
a  few  hours  showed  him  that  it  was  in  motion, 
and  was  therefore  another  planet.  He  named 
it  Pallas,  and  propounded  the  theory  that  the 
two  "Asteroids" — so  named  by  Herschel — were 
fragments  of  a  trans  -  Martian  planet,  which, 
through  some  accident,  had  been  shattered  to 
pieces  in  the  remote  past.  Olbers  urged  the 
necessity  of  searching  for  more  small  planets. 
His  advice  was  taken.  In  1804  Karl  Ludwig 
Harding  (1765-1834),  Schroter's  assistant,  dis- 
covered Juno,  and  Olbers  himself  detected  Vesta, 
March  29,  1807. 

After  1816  the  search  was  relinquished,  as 
no  more  planets  were  discovered.  In  1830, 
however,  a  German  amateur,  Karl  Ludwig 
Hencke  (1793-1866),  ex-postmaster  of  Driessen, 
commenced  a  search  for  new  planets,  which  was 
rewarded,  after  fifteen  years,  by  the  discovery 
of  Astrsea,  December  8,  1845.  On  July  1,  1847, 
he  made  another  discovery,  that  of  Hebe.  A  few 
weeks  later,  John  Russell  Hind  (1823-1895),  the 
English  astronomer,  discovered  Iris.  Since  1847 
not  a  year  has  passed  without  one  or  more  planets 


100      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

being  found,  sometimes  as  many  as  twenty  being 
discovered  in  a  single  year.  Some  astronomers 
have  made  the  search  for  asteroids  their  chief 
business.  The  principal  asteroid  discoverers  have 
been  Christian  H.  F.  Peters  (1813-1890),  Henri 
Perrotin,  Paul  Henry  (1848-1905),  Prosper 
Henry  (1849-1903),  James  Watson,  Robert 
Luther  (1822-1900),  Johann  Palisa  (born  1848), 
and  Max  Wolf  (born  1863). 

In  1891  a  new  impulse  was  given  to  asteroid 
study  by  the  application  of  photography  by  Max 
Wolf  to  the  discovery  of  the  minor  planets.  It 
occurred  to  Wolf  that  the  asteroid  would  be 
represented  on  the  plate  by  a  trail,  caused  by 
its  motion  during  the  time  of  exposure ;  and 
assisted  by  Arnold  Schwussmann  (born  1870), 
Luigi  Camera  (born  1875),  and  others,  Wolf  has 
discovered  over  a  hundred  asteroids,  and  he 
has  the  whole  field  of  asteroid  hunting  to  him- 
self. Few  minor  planets  are  now  discovered  by 
the  older  method.  In  1901  Wolf  invented  his 
new  instrument  of  research,  the  stereo -com- 
parator, which,  on  the  principle  of  the  old- 
fashioned  stereoscope,  represents  the  planetary 
bodies  as  suspended  in  space  far  in  front  of  the 
stars.  In  this  way  this  ingenious  astronomer 
has  been  enabled  to  discover  asteroids  at  the 


THE   INNER   PLANETS.  101 

first  glance :  year  by  year  fresh  discoveries  are 
announced  from  the  Heidelberg  Observatory, 
until  more  than  five  hundred  asteroids  are  now 
known. 

Waning  interest  in  the  ever- increasing  family 
of  asteroids  was  revived  in  1898  by  the  dis- 
covery by  Karl  Gustav  Witt  (born  1866)  of  a 
small  planet,  to  which  he  gave  the  name  of  Eros, 
which  comes  nearer  to  the  Earth  than  Mars,  and 
which  is  of  great  assistance  to  astronomers  in  the 
determination  of  the  solar  parallax.  For  some 
time  prior  to  1898  astronomers  had  considered 
it  a  waste  of  time  to  search  for  new  asteroids ; 
but  this  idea  is  not  now  so  popular,  in  view 
of  the  benefit  conferred  on  astronomy  by  the 
discovery  of  Eros. 

Of  the  physical  nature  of  the  asteroids  astron- 
omers know  nothing.  Only  the  four  largest 
have  been  measured.  For  many  years  it  was 
supposed  that  Vesta,  the  brightest  of  the  aster- 
oids, was  also  the  largest.  The  measures  of 
Barnard  with  the  great  Lick  refractor  in  1895, 
however,  showed  that  Ceres  is  the  largest,  with 
a  diameter  of  477  miles.  Pallas  comes  next, 
with  a  diameter  of  304  miles ;  while  the  dia- 
meters of  Vesta  and  Juno  are  respectively  239 
and  120  miles.  Barnard  saw  no  traces  of  atmo- 


102      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

sphere  round  any  of  the  asteroids.  It  should 
be  stated  that  in  1872  Vogel  thought  he  could 
detect  an  "  air-line  "  in  the  spectrum  of  Vesta : 
he  admitted  that  the  observation  required  con- 
firmation, but  it  has  not  been  corroborated  either 
by  himself  or  any  other  observer. 


CHAPTER    VI. 

THE     OUTER     PLANETS. 

JUPITER,  the  greatest  planet  of  the  Solar  System, 
has  perhaps  been  more  persistently  studied  by 
astronomers  than  any  other.  In  the  early 
nineteenth  century  the  prevalent  idea  was  that 
Jupiter  was  a  world  similar  to  the  Earth,  only 
much  larger, — a  view  held  by  Herschel  and  other 
famous  astronomers,  and  put  forward  by  Brewster 
in  '  More  Worlds  than  One/  This  view  prevailed 
for  many  years,  although  Buffon  in  1778,  and 
Kant  in  1785,  had  stated  their  belief  in  the  idea 
that  Jupiter  was  still  in  a  state  of  great  heat — 
in  fact,  that  the  great  planet  was  a  semi-sun. 
This  idea,  however,  was  long  in  being  adopted 
by  astronomers,  and  very  little  attention  was 
paid  to  Nasmyth's  expression  of  the  same  opinion 
in  1853.  The  older  view  still  held  the  field — 
namely,  that  the  belts  of  Jupiter  represented 
trade -winds,  and  that  a  world  similar  to  the 
terrestrial  lay  below  the  Jovian  clouds.  In  1860 


104      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

George  Philip  Bond  (1826-1865),  director  of  the 
Harvard  Observatory,  found  from  experiments 
that  Jupiter  seemed  to  give  out  more  light  than 
it  received,  but  he  did  not  dare  to  suggest  that 
Jupiter  was  self-luminous,  considering  that  the 
inherent  light  might  result  from  Jovian  auroras. 

In  1865  Zollner  showed  that  the  rapid  motions 
of  the  cloud-belts  on  both  Jupiter  and  Saturn 
indicated  a  high  internal  temperature.  At  the 
distance  of  Jupiter  sun-heat  is  only  one  twenty- 
seventh  as  great  as  on  the  Earth,  and  would  be 
quite  incapable  of  forming  clouds  many  times 
denser  than  those  on  the  Earth.  In  1871 
Zollner  drew  attention  to  the  equatorial  accel- 
eration of  Jupiter,  analogous  to  the  same  phe- 
nomenon on  the  Sun.  In  1870  these  opinions  of 
Zollner' s  were  adopted  and  supported  by  Proctor 
in  his  '  Other  Worlds  than  Ours.'  In  his  subse- 
quent volumes  Proctor  did  much  to  popularise 
the  idea,  which  is  now  accepted  all  over  the 
astronomical  world. 

During  the  century  many  valuable  observations 
on  Jupiter  were  made  by  numerous  observers, 
among  them  Airy,  Madler,  Webb,  Schmidt,  and 
others.  Much  time  was  devoted  to  the  accurate 
determination  of  the  rotation  period,  which  was 
fixed  at  9  hours  55  minutes  3 6 '5 6  seconds  by 
Denning  in  observations  from  1880  to  1903.  No 


THE   OUTER   PLANETS.  105 

really  important  discovery  was  made  till  1878, 
when  Niesten  at  Brussels  discovered  the  "great 
red  spot,"  a  ruddy  object  25,000  miles  long  by 
7000  broad,  attached  to  a  white  zone  beneath 
the  southern  equatorial  belt.  This  remarkable 
object  has  been  observed  ever  since.  In  1879  its 
colour  was  brick-red  and  very  conspicuous,  but 
it  soon  began  to  fade,  and  Bicco's  observation 
at  Palermo  in  1883  was  thought  to  be  the  last. 
After  some  months,  however,  it  brightened  up, 
and,  notwithstanding  changes  of  form  and  colour, 
it  is  still  visible,  a  permanent  feature  of  the 
Jovian  disc.  In  1879  a  group  of  "  faculae," 
similar  to  those  on  the  Sun,  was  observed  at 
Moscow  by  Theodor  Alexandrovitch  JBredikhine 
(1831-1904),  and  at  Potsdam  by  Wilhelm  Oswald 
Lohse  (born  1845).  It  was  soon  observed  that 
the  rotation  period,  as  determined  from  the  great 
red  spot,  was  not  constant,  but  continually  in- 
creasing. A  white  spot  in  the  vicinity  completed 
its  rotation  in  5J  minutes  less,  indicating  the 
differences  of  rotation  on  Jupiter. 

The  great  red  spot  has  been  observed  since 
its  discovery  by  Denning  at  Bristol  and  George 
Hough  (born  1836)  at  Chicago.  Twenty-eight 
years  of  observation  have  not  solved  the  mystery 
of  its  nature.  The  researches  made  on  it,  in  the 
words  of  Miss  Clerke,  "  afforded  grounds  only 


106      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

for  negative  conclusions  as  to  its  nature.  It 
certainly  did  not  represent  the  outpourings  of  a 
Jovian  volcano ;  it  was  in  no  sense  attached  to 
the  Jovian  soil — if  the  phrase  have  any  applica- 
tion to  the  planet ;  it  was  not  a  mere  disclosure 
of  a  glowing  mass  elsewhere  seethed  over  by 
rolling  vapours." 

In  1870  Arthur  Cowper  Ranyard  (1845-1894), 
the  well-known  English  astronomer,  began  to 
collect  records  of  unusual  phenomena  on  the 
Jovian  disc  to  see  if  any  period  regulated  their 
appearance.  He  came  to  the  conclusion  that, 
on  the  whole,  there  was  harmony  between  the 
markings  on  Jupiter  and  the  eleven-year  period 
on  the  Sun.  The  theory  of  inherent  light  in 
Jupiter,  however,  has  not  been  confirmed.  The 
great  planet  was  examined  spectroscopically  by 
Huggins  from  1862  to  1864,  and  by  Vogel  from 
1871  to  1873.  The  spectrum  showed,  in  addition 
to  the  lines  of  reflected  sunlight,  some  lines 
indicating  aqueous  vapour,  and  others  which 
have  not  been  identified  with  any  terrestrial  sub- 
stance. A  photographic  study  of  the  spectrum 
of  Jupiter  was  made  at  the  Lowell  Observatory 
by  Slipher  in  1904,  probably  the  most  exhaustive 
investigation  on  the  subject.  The  spectroscope 
has,  however,  given  little  support  to  the  theory 
of  inherent  light,  and  "  we  are  driven  to  con- 


THE    OUTER   PLANETS.  107 

elude  that  native  emissions  from  Jupiter's  visible 
surface  are  local  and  fitful,  not  permanent  and 
general." 

Herschel's  idea,  that  the  rotations  of  the  four 
satellites  of  Jupiter  were  coincident  with  their 
revolutions,  has  on  the  whole  been  confirmed 
by  recent  researches,  although  in  the  case  of 
the  two  near  satellites  (lo  and  Europa)  W.  H. 
Pickering's  observations  in  1893  indicated  shorter 
rotation  periods.  There  is  much  to  learn  re- 
garding the  geography  of  the  satellites,  although 
in  1891  Schaeberle  and  Campbell  at  the  Lick 
Observatory  observed  belts  on  the  surface  of 
Ganymede,  the  third  satellite  analogous  to  those 
on  Jupiter.  Surface-markings  on  the  satellites 
have  also  been  seen  by  Barnard  at  the  Lick 
Observatory,  and  by  Douglass  at  Flagstaff. 

Since  the  time  of  Galileo  no  addition  had  been 
made  to  the  system  of  satellites  revolving  round 
Jupiter.  Profound  surprise  was  created,  there- 
fore, by  the  announcement  of  the  discovery  of 
a  fifth  satellite  by  Barnard  at  the  Lick  Observ- 
atory, on  September  9,  1892.  The  satellite, 
one  of  the  faintest  of  telescopic  objects,  was 
discovered  with  the  great  3 6 -inch  telescope,  and 
its  existence  was  soon  confirmed  by  Andrew 
Anslie  Common  (1841-1903),  with  his  great  5- 
foot  reflector  at  Ealing,  near  London.  The  new 


108      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

satellite  was  found  by  Barnard  to  revolve  round 
Jupiter  in  11  hours  57  minutes  at  a  mean  dis- 
tance of  112,000  miles. 

Although  the  existence  of  other  satellites  of 
Jupiter  was  predicted  by  Sir  Robert  Stawell  Ball 
(born  1840)  soon  after  the  discovery  of  the  fifth, 
much  surprise  was  created  by  the  announcement, 
in  January  1905,  that  a  sixth  satellite  had  been 
discovered  by  Perrine,  who,  in  the  following 
month,  announced  the  discovery  of  a  seventh. 
These  discoveries  were  made  by  photography, 
the  objects  being  very  faint.  The  periods  of 
revolution  were  found  to  be  242  days  and  200 
days  for  the  sixth  and  seventh  satellites  re- 
spectively, the  mean  distances  being  6,968,000 
and  6,136,000  miles.  It  is  possible  that  they 
may  belong  to  a  zone  of  asteroidal  satellites. 
In  fact,  the  fifth  moon  may  belong  to  a  similar 
zone,  so  that  Jupiter  may  have  two  asteroidal 
zones ;  but  this  is  anticipating  future  discovery. 

A  particular  charm  has  always  attached  itself 
to  the  study  of  Saturn,  the  ringed  planet.  The 
magnificent  system  of  rings  has  for  two  and  a 
half  centuries  been  the  object  of  wonder  and 
admiration  in  the  Solar  System,  and  accordingly 
they  have  been  exhaustively  studied  by  many 
eminent  observers.  While  observing  the  two 
bright  rings  of  Saturn  on  June  10,  1838,  Galle 


THE   OUTER   PLANETS.  109 

noticed  what  Miss  Clerke  calls  "  a  veil  -  like 
extension  of  the  lucid  ring  across  half  the  dark 
space  separating  it  from  the  planet."  No  atten- 
tion, however,  was  paid  to  Galle's  observation. 
On  November  15,  1850,  William  Cranch  Bond 
(1789-1859),  of  the  Harvard  Observatory  in 
Massachusetts,  discovered  the  same  phenomenon 
under  its  true  form — that  of  a  dusky  ring  in- 
terior to  the  more  brilliant  one.  A  fortnight 
later,  before  the  news  of  Bond's  observation, 
Dawes  made  the  same  discovery  independently 
at  Wateringbury  in  England.  This  ring  is 
known  as  the  dusky  or  "crape"  ring. 

The  discovery  of  the  dusky  ring  brought  to 
the  front  the  problem  of  the  composition  of  the 
ring- system.  Laplace  and  Herschel  considered 
the  rings  to  be  solid,  but  this  was  denied  in  1848 
by  Edouard  Roche  (1820-1880),  who  believed 
them  to  consist  of  small  particles,  and  in  1851 
by  G.  P.  Bond,  who  asserted  that  the  variations 
in  the  appearance  of  the  system  were  sufficient 
to  negative  the  idea  of  their  solidity ;  but  he 
suggested  that  the  rings  were  fluid.  In  1857 
the  question  was  taken  up  by  the  Scottish 
physicist,  James  Cleric  -  Maxwell  (1831-1879), 
who  proved  by  mathematical  calculation  that 
the  rings  could  be  neither  solid  nor  fluid,  but 
were  due  to  an  aggregation  of  small  particles, 


110      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

so  closely  crowded  together  as  to  present  the  ap- 
pearance of  a  continuous  whole.  Clerk-Maxwell's 
explanation — which  had  been  suggested  by  the 
younger  Cassini  in  1715,  and  by  Thomas  Wright 
in  1750  —  was  at  once  adopted,  and  has  since 
been  proved  by  observation.  In  1888  Hugo 
Seeliger  (born  1849),  director  of  the  Munich 
Observatory,  showed  from  photometric  observa- 
tions the  correctness  of  the  satellite -theory; 
while  Barnard  in  1889  witnessed  an  eclipse  of 
the  satellite  Japetus  by  the  dusky  ring.  The 
satellite  did  not  disappear,  but  was  seen  with 
perfect  distinctness.  The  final  demonstration  of 
the  meteoric  nature  of  the  rings  was  made  by 
Keeler  at  the  Alleghany  Observatory  in  1895, 
with  the  aid  of  the  spectroscope.  By  means 
of  Doppler's  principle,  he  found  that  the  inner 
edge  of  the  ring  revolved  in  a  much  shorter 
time  than  the  outer,  proving  conclusively  that 
they  could  not  be  solid.  This  was  confirmed  by 
the  observations  of  Campbell  at  Mount  Hamilton, 
Henri  Deslandres  at  Meudon,  and  Belopolsky 
at  Pulkowa. 

In  1851  a  startling  theory  regarding  Saturn's 
rings  was  put  forward  by  the  famous  Otto 
Wilhelm  von  Struve  (1819-1905).  Comparing  his 
measurements  on  the  rings  made  at  Pulkowa  in 
1850  and  1851  with  those  of  other  astronomers 


THE    OUTER   PLANETS.  Ill 

for  the  past  two  hundred  years,  he  reached  the 
conclusion  that  the  inner  diameter  of  the  ring 
was  decreasing  at  the  rate  of  sixty  miles  a-year, 
and  that  the  bodies  composing  the  rings  were 
being  drawn  closer  to  the  planet.  Accordingly, 
Struve  calculated  that  only  three  centuries  would 
be  required  to  bring  about  the  precipitation  of 
the  ring-system  on  to  the  globe  of  Saturn.  In 
1881  and  1882  Struve,  expecting  a  further 
decrease,  made  another  series  of  measures,  but 
these  did  not  confirm  his  theory,  which  was 
accordingly  abandoned. 

The  study  of  the  globe  of  Saturn  has  made 
less  progress  than  that  of  the  rings.  The  surface 
of  the  planet  had  been  known  since  before  the 
time  of  Herschel  to  be  covered  with  belts,  but 
as  spots  seldom  appear  on  Saturn,  only  one  deter- 
mination of  the  rotation  period  had  been  made, 
that  by  Herschel.  Much  interest  was  aroused, 
therefore,  by  the  discovery,  by  Hall,  at  Washing- 
ton, on  December  7,  1876,  of  a  bright  equatorial 
spot.  Hall  studied  this  spot  during  sixty  rota- 
tions of  the  planet,  determining  the  period  as 
10  hours  14  minutes  24  seconds.  This  was  con- 
firmed by  Denning  in  1891,  and  by  Stanley 
Williams,  an  English  observer,  in  the  same  year. 
On  June  16,  1903,  Barnard,  at  the  Yerkes 
Observatory,  discovered  a  bright  spot,  from 


112      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

which  he  deduced  a  rotation  period  of  10  hours 
39  minutes, — a  period  considerably  longer  than 
that  found  by  Hall.  In  the  same  year  various 
spots  on  Saturn  were  observed  by  Denning,  who 
found  a  period  of  10  hours  37  minutes  56*4 
seconds,  and  at  Barcelona  by  Jose  Comas  Sola, 
now  director  of  the  Observatory  there,  who 
may  be  considered  Spain's  leading  astronomer. 
The  result  of  these  observations  has  been  to 
show  that  the  spots  on  Saturn  have  probably 
a  proper  motion  of  their  own,  apart  from  the 
rotation  of  the  planet.  As  to  the  spectrum 
of  Saturn,  little  has  been  learned.  It  closely 
resembles  that  of  Jupiter.  In  1867  Janssen, 
observing  from  the  summit  of  Mount  Etna, 
found  traces  of  aqueous  vapour  in  the  planet's 
atmosphere. 

In  the  chapters  on  Herschel  we  have  seen  that 
he  discovered  the  sixth  and  seventh  satellites 
of  Saturn.  The  next  discovery  was  made  on 
September  19,  1848,  by  W.  C.  Bond,  at 
Harvard,  Massachusetts,  and  independently  by 
William  Lassell  (1799-1880),  at  Starfield,  near 
Liverpool.  The  new  satellite  received  the  name 
of  Hyperion,  and  was  found  to  be  situated  at 
a  distance  of  about  946,000  miles  from  Saturn. 
Its  small  size  led  Sir  John  Herschel  to  the 
idea  that  it  might  be  an  asteroidal  satellite. 


THE   OUTER   PLANETS.  113 

Fifty  years  elapsed  before  another  satellite  of 
Saturn  was  discovered.  In  1888  W.  H.  Picker- 
ing commenced  a  photographic  search  for  new 
satellites  of  the  planet.  At  last,  on  developing 
some  photographs  of  Saturn,  taken  on  August  16, 
17,  and  18,  1898,  he  found  traces  of  a  new 
satellite  which  he  named  "  Phoebe."  But,  as  the 
satellite  was  not  seen  or  photographed  again  for 
some  years,  many  astronomers  were  sceptical  as 
to  its  existence.  However,  photographs  taken 
in  1900,  1901,  and  1902  revealed  the  satellite, 
which  was  again  photographed  in  1904,  and  seen 
visually  by  Barnard  in  the  same  year  with  the 
40-inch  Yerkes  telescope.  At  that  time  the  dis- 
coverer brought  out  the  amazing  fact  that  the 
motion  of  the  satellite  is  retrograde — a  fact  which 
he  attempts  to  explain  by  a  new  theory  of  the 
former  rotation  of  Saturn.  He  likewise  demon- 
strated that  its  distance  from  Saturn  varied 
from  6,120,000  to  9,740,000  miles.  Early  in  1905 
Pickering  announced  the  discovery  of  a  tenth 
satellite  of  Saturn,  which  received  the  name  of 
Themis,  with  a  period  and  mean  distance  nearly 
similar  to  Hyperion,  so  that  Sir  John  Herschers 
idea  of  Hyperion  being  an  asteroidal  satellite  is 
being  confirmed  after  a  lapse  of  half  a  century. 

If  little  is  known  of  the  globe  of  Saturn,  still 
less  is  known  regarding  Uranus.     Dusky  bands 


114      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

resembling  those  of  Jupiter  were  observed  by 
Young  at  Princeton  in  1883.  In  the  following 
year  Paul  and  Prosper  Henry  discerned  at  Paris 
two  grey  parallel  lines  on  the  disc  of  the  planet. 
This  was  confirmed  by  the  observations  of  Per- 
rotin  at  Nice,  which  also  indicated  rotation  in  a 
period  of  ten  hours.  In  1890  Perrotin  again  took 
up  the  study  and  re-observed  the  dark  bands. 
On  the  other  hand,  no  definite  results  regarding 
the  planet  were  obtained  by  the  Lick  observers 
in  1889  and  1890.  Measurements  of  the  planet 
by  Young,  Schiaparelli,  Perrotin,  and  others 
indicate  a  considerable  polar  compression.  The 
spectrum  of  the  planet  has  been  studied  by 
Secchi,  Huggins,  Vogel,  Keeler,  Slipher,  and 
others.  The  spectrum  shows  six  bands  of 
original  absorption,  a  line  of  hydrogen,  which, 
says  Miss  Clerke,  "  implies  accordingly  the 
presence  of  free  hydrogen  in  the  Uranian  atmo- 
sphere, where  a  temperature  must  thus  prevail 
sufficiently  high  to  reduce  water  to  its  con- 
stituent elements."  From  a  photographic  study 
of  the  spectrum  at  the  Lowell  Observatory  in 
1904,  Slipher  observed  a  line  corresponding  to 
that  of  helium,  indicating  the  presence  of  that 
element  in  the  planet's  atmosphere. 

Herschel  left  our  knowledge  of  the  Uranian 
satellites   in  a  very   uncertain   state.     The   two 


THE   OUTER   PLANETS.  115 

outer  satellites,  Titania  and  Oberon,  were  re- 
discovered in  1828  by  his  son,  but  the  other 
four,  which  he  was  believed  to  have  discovered, 
were  never  seen  again.  In  1847  two  inner 
satellites,  Ariel  and  Umbriel,  were  discovered 
by  Lassell  and  Otto  Struve  respectively,  their 
existence  being  finally  confirmed  by  LasselFs 
observations  in  1851. 

After  the  discovery  of  Uranus  by  Herschel, 
mathematical  astronomers  determined  its  orbit 
and  calculated  its  position  in  the  future.  Alexis 
Bouvard,  the  calculating  partner  of  Laplace, 
published  tables  of  the  planet's  motions,  founded 
on  observations  made  by  various  astronomers 
who  had  considered  it  a  star  before  its  discovery 
by  Herschel ;  but  as  the  planet  was  not  in  the 
exact  position  which  Bouvard  predicted,  he 
rejected  the  earlier  observations  altogether.  For 
a  few  years  the  planet  conformed  to  the  French- 
man's predictions,  but  shortly  afterwards  it  was 
again  observed  to  move  in  an  irregular  manner, 
and  the  discrepancy  between  observation  and 
the  calculations  of  mathematicians  became  intol- 
erable. Did  the  law  of  gravitation  not  hold 
good  for  the  frontiers  of  the  Solar  System  ? 
Gradually  astronomers  arrived  at  the  conclusion 
that  Uranus  was  being  attracted  off  its  course 
by  the  influence  of  an  unseen  body,  an  exterior 


116      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

planet.  Bouvard  himself  was  one  of  the  first  to 
make  the  suggestion,  but  died  before  the  planet 
was  discovered.  An  English  amateur,  the  Rev. 
T.  J.  Hussey,  resolved  to  make,  in  1834,  a  deter- 
mination of  the  place  of  the  unseen  body,  but 
found  his  powers  inadequate  ;  and  in  1840  Bessel 
laid  his  plans  for  an  investigation  of  the  problem, 
but  failing  health  prevented  him  carrying  out 
his  design. 

In  1841  a  student  at  the  University  of  Cam- 
bridge resolved  to  grapple  with  the  problem. 
John  Couch  Adams,  born  at  Lidcot  in  Cornwall 
in  1819,  entered  in  1839  the  University  of  Cam- 
bridge, where  he  graduated  in  1843.  From  1858 
Professor  of  Astronomy  at  Cambridge,  and  from 
1861  director  of  the  Observatory,  he  died  on 
January  21,  1892,  after  a  life  spent  in  devo- 
tion to  mathematical  astronomy.  In  1843,  on 
taking  his  degree,  he  commenced  the  investi- 
gation of  the  orbit  of  Uranus.  For  two  years 
he  worked  at  the  difficult  question,  and  by 
September  1845  came  to  the  conclusion  that  a 
planet  revolving  at  a  certain  distance  beyond 
Uranus  would  produce  the  observed  irregulari- 
ties. He  handed  to  James  Challis  (1803-1882), 
the  director  of  the  Cambridge  Observatory,  a 
paper  containing  the  elements  of  what  was 
named  by  Adams  "  the  new  planet."  On 


THE   OUTER   PLANETS.  11 7 

October  21  of  the  same  year  he  visited  Green- 
wich Observatory,  and  left  a  paper  containing 
the  elements  of  the  planet,  and  approximately 
fixing  its  position  in  the  heavens.  But  the 
Astronomer-Royal  of  England,  Sir  George  Biddell 
Airy  (1801-1892),  had  little  faith  in  the  calcula- 
tions of  the  young  mathematician.  He  always 
considered  the  correctness  of  a  distant  mathe- 
matical result  to  be  a  subject  rather  of  moral 
than  of  mathematical  evidence  :  in  fact,  regard- 
ing Uranus,  the  Astronomer-Royal  almost  called 
in  question  the  correctness  of  the  law  of  gravita- 
tion. Besides,  the  novelty  of  the  investigations 
aroused  scepticism,  and  the  fact  that  Adams 
was  a  young  man,  and  inexperienced,  went 
against  Airy's  acceptance  of  the  theory.  How- 
ever, he  wrote  to  Adams  questioning  him  on 
the  soundness  of  his  idea.  Adams  thought  the 
matter  trivial,  and  did  not  reply.  Airy,  there- 
fore, took  no  interest  in  the  investigations,  and 
no  steps  were  taken  to  search  for  the  unseen 
planet.  Meanwhile  the  Rev.  W.  R.  Dawes 
happened  to  see  Adams'  papers  lying  at  Green- 
wich, and  wrote  to  his  friend,  the  well-known 
astronomer  Lassell,  who  was  in  possession  of  a 
very  fine  reflector,  erected  at  his  residence  near 
Liverpool,  asking  him  to  search  for  the  planet. 
But  Lassell  was  suffering  from  a  sprained  ankle, 


118      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

and  Dawes'  letter  was  accidentally  destroyed  by 
a  housemaid.  So  Adams'  theory  remained  in 
obscurity. 

The  question  now  came  under  the  notice  of 
Francois  Jean  Dominique  Arago  (1786-1853), 
the  director  of  the  Paris  Observatory.  He 
recognised  in  a  young  friend  of  his  a  rising 
genius,  who  was  competent  to  solve  the  problem. 
Urban  Jean  Joseph  Le  Verrier,  born  at  Saint  Lo, 
in  Normandy,  in  1811,  became  in  1837  astro- 
nomical teacher  in  the  Ecole  Polytechnique,  and 
in  1853  director  of  the  Paris  Observatory.  In 
consequence  of  differences  with  his  staff  he  was 
obliged,  in  1870,  to  resign  from  this  position,  but 
two  years  later  was  restored  to  the  post,  which 
he  held  till  his  death  on  September  23,  1877. 

In  1845,  ignorant  of  the  fact  that  Adams  had 
already  solved  the  problem,  Le  Verrier  began 
his  investigations  of  the  irregular  motions  of 
Uranus.  In  a  memoir  communicated  to  the 
Academy  of  Sciences  in  November  of  that  year, 
he  demonstrated  that  no  known  causes  could 
produce  these  disturbances.  In  a  second  memoir, 
dated  June  1,  1846,  he  announced  that  an  ex- 
terior planet  alone  could  produce  these  effects. 
But  Le  Verrier  had  now  before  him  the  difficult 
task  of  assigning  an  approximate  position  to  the 
unseen  body,  so  that  it  might  be  telescopically 


THE  OUTER  PLANETS.  119 

discovered.  After  much  calculation  Le  Verrier, 
in  his  third  memoir  (August  31,  1846),  assigned 
to  the  planet  a  position  in  the  constellation 
Aquarius. 

Meanwhile  one  of  Le  Terrier's  papers  happened 
to  reach  Airy.  Seeing  its  resemblance  to  Adams' 
papers,  which  had  been  lying  on  his  desk  for 
months,  his  scepticism  vanished,  and  he  sug- 
gested to  Challis  that  the  planet  should  be 
searched  for  with  the  Cambridge  equatorial.  In 
July  1846  the  search  was  commenced.  The 
planet  was  actually  observed  on  August  4  and 
12,  but,  owing  to  the  absence  of  star  maps,  it 
was  not  recognised.  "  After  four  days  of  observ- 
ing," he  wrote  to  Airy,  "  the  planet  was  in  my 
grasp  if  I  had  only  examined  or  mapped  the 
observations." 

Le  Verrier  wrote  to  Encke,  the  illustrious 
director  of  the  Berlin  Observatory,  desiring  him 
to  make  a  telescopic  search  for  a  planetary  object 
situated  in  the  constellation  Aquarius,  as  bright 
as  a  star  of  the  eighth  magnitude  and  possessed 
of  a  visible  disc.  "  Look  where  I  tell  you," 
wrote  the  French  astronomer,  "  and  you  will  see 
an  object  such  as  I  describe."  Encke  ordered 
his  two  assistants,  Galle  and  D' Arrest,  to  make 
a  search  on  the  night  of  September  23,  1846. 
In  a  few  hours  Galle  observed  an  object  not 


120      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

marked  in  the  star-maps  of  the  Berlin  Observa- 
tory, which  had  been  recently  published.  The 
following  night  sufficed  to  show  that  the  object 
was  in  motion,  and  was  therefore  a  new  planet. 
On  September  29  Challis  found  the  planet  at 
Cambridge,  but  he  was  too  late,  as  the  priority 
of  the  discovery  was  now  lost  to  Adams.  The 
planet  received  the  name  of  "Neptune." 

For  some  time,  indeed,  it  appeared  as  if  the 
French  astronomer  alone  was  to  receive  the 
honour  of  the  discovery.  But  on  October  3, 
1846,  a  letter  from  Sir  John  Herschel  appeared 
in  the  '  Athenaeum '  in  which  he  referred  to  the 
discovery  made  by  Adams.  The  French  scientists 
were  extremely  jealous.  Indeed,  Arago  actually 
declared  that,  when  Neptune  was  under  dis- 
cussion, the  entire  honour  should  go  to  Le 
Verrier,  and  the  name  of  Adams  should  not  even 
be  mentioned, — Arago's  line  of  reasoning  being 
that  it  was  not  the  man  who  first  made  a  dis- 
covery who  should  receive  the  credit,  but  he 
who  first  made  it  public.  However,  the  credit 
of  the  discovery  is  now  given  equally  to  Adams 
and  Le  Verrier,  both  of  whom  are  regarded  as 
among  the  greatest  of  astronomers. 

Only  a  fortnight  after  the  discovery  of  Nep- 
tune, the  astronomer  Lassell  observed  a  satellite 
to  the  distant  planet  on  October  10,  1846.  This 


THE   OUTER  PLANETS.  121 

discovery  was  confirmed  in  July  1847  by  the 
discoverer  himself,  and  shortly  afterwards  by 
Bond  and  Otto  Struve.  Regarding  the  globe 
of  Neptune,  we  know  practically  nothing.  No 
markings  of  any  kind  have  been  observed  on  its 
surface.  However,  in  1883  and  1884,  Maxwell 
Hall,  an  astronomer  in  Jamaica,  noticed  certain 
variations  of  brilliance  which  suggested  a  rota- 
tion-period of  eight  hours,  but  this  was  not 
confirmed  by  any  other  astronomer.  The  spect- 
rum of  Neptune  has  been  investigated  by  various 
observers,  who  have  found  it  to  be  similar  to 
that  of  Uranus. 

The  existence  of  a  trans -Neptunian  planet 
has  been  suspected  by  many  astronomers.  In 
November  1879  the  first  idea  of  its  existence 
was  thrown  out  by  Flammarion  in  his  '  Popular 
Astronomy.'  Flammarion  noticed  that  all  the 
periodical  comets  in  the  Solar  System  have 
their  aphelion  near  the  orbit  of  a  planet.  Thus 
Jupiter  owns  about  eighteen  comets ;  Saturn 
owns  one,  and  probably  two ;  Uranus  two  or 
three ;  and  Neptune  six.  The  third  comet  of 
1862,  however,  along  with  the  August  meteors, 
goes  farther  out  than  the  orbit  of  Neptune. 
Accordingly,  Flammarion  suggested  the  existence 
of  a  great  planet,  assigning  it  a  period  of  330 
years  and  a  distance  of  4000  millions  of  miles. 


122      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

Two  independent  investigators,  David  Peck 
Todd  (born  1855)  in  America  and  George 
Forbes  in  Scotland,  have  since  undertaken  to 
find  the  planet.  Todd,  utilising  the  "residual 
perturbations"  of  Uranus,  assigned  a  period  of 
375  years  for  his  planet.  Forbes,  on  the  other 
hand,  working  from  the  comet  theory,  stated 
his  belief  in  the  existence  of  two  planets  with 
periods  of  1000  and  5000  years  respectively. 
In  October  1901  he  computed  the  position  of 
the  new  planet  on  the  celestial  sphere,  fixing 
its  position  in  the  constellation  Libra,  and 
computing  its  size  to  be  greater  than  Jupiter. 
A  search  was  made  by  means  of  photography, 
in  1902,  but  without  success.  Nevertheless, 
astronomers  are  pretty  confident  of  the  exist- 
ence of  one  or  more  trans -Neptunian  planets. 
Lowell  is  very  definite  on  this  subject  when 
he  says  in  regard  to  meteor  groups,  "  The 
Perseids  and  the  Lyrids  go  out  to  meet  the 
unknown  planet,  which  circles  at  a  distance  of 
about  forty-five  astronomical  units  from  the  Sun. 
It  may  seein  strange  to  speak  thus  confidently 
of  what  no  mortal  eye  has  seen,  but  the  finger 
of  the  sign-board  of  phenomena  points  so  clearly 
as  to  justify  the  definite  article.  The  eye  of 
analysis  has  already  suspected  the  invisible." 


CHAPTER   VII. 

COMETS. 

AT  the  time  of  Herschel  the  ancient  super- 
stitions in  regard  to  comets  had  to  a  great 
extent  vanished,  thanks  mainly  to  the  return 
of  Halley's  comet  in  1758.  Yet,  although 
comets  had  ceased  to  be  objects  of  terror,  no 
explanation  or  rational  theory  of  their  nature 
was  put  forward  until  the  appearance  of  the 
great  comet  of  1811.  This  comet  was  visible 
from  March  26,  1811,  to  August  17,  1812,  a 
period  of  510  days.  It  was  one  of  the  most 
magnificent  comets  ever  seen,  its  tail  being 
100  millions  of  miles  in  length  and  its  head 
127,000  miles  in  diameter.  This  wonderful 
phenomenon  was  the  subject  of  much  investiga- 
tion, particularly  by  Olbers,  the  great  German 
astronomer. 

Heinrich  Wilhelm  Matthias  Olbers  was  born 
at  Arbergen,  a  village  near  Bremen,  October  11, 
1758.  His  father  was  a  clergyman  who,  in 


124      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

addition  to  considerable  mathematical  powers, 
was  an  enthusiastic  lover  of  astronomy.  At 
the  age  of  thirteen  young  Olbers  became  deeply 
interested  in  that  science.  While  taking  an 
evening  walk  in  the  month  of  August,  he 
observed  the  Pleiades,  and  determined  to  find 
out  to  which  constellation  they  belonged.  He 
therefore  bought  some  books  on  astronomy, 
along  with  a  few  charts  of  the  sky,  and  he 
began  to  study  the  science  with  much  en- 
thusiasm. He  read  every  book  he  could  lay 
his  hands  on,  and  a  few  months  sufficed  to 
make  him  acquainted  with  all  the  constellations. 
In  1777,  when  in  his  nineteenth  year, 
Olbers  entered  the  University  of  Gottingen 
to  study  medicine,  and  at  the  same  time 
he  learned  much  regarding  mathematics  and 
astronomy  from  the  mathematician  Kaestner. 
When  twenty  -  one  years  of  age  he  observed 
the  stars  at  Gottingen,  and  devised  a  method 
of  calculating  the  orbits  of  comets,  the  idea 
coming  to  him  while  he  was  attending  at  the 
bedside  of  a  fellow -student  who  had  taken  ill. 
"Although  not  made  public  until  1797,"  writes 
Miss  Clerke,  "'  Olbers'  method'  was  then  uni- 
versally adopted,  and  is  still  regarded  as  the 
most  expeditious  and  convenient  in  cases  where 
absolute  rigour  is  not  required.  By  its  intro- 


COMETS.  125 

duction,  not  only  many  a  toilsome  and  thankless 
hour  was  spared,  but  workers  were  multiplied 
and  encouraged  in  the  pursuit  of  labours  more 
useful  than  attractive." 

Towards  the  end  of  1781  he  returned  to 
Bremen,  settled  as  a  medical  doctor,  and  con- 
tinued in  practice  for  about  forty -one  years. 
But  although  he  had  adopted  perhaps  the  most 
toilsome  profession,  his  love  of  science  prevailed, 
and  night  after  night  he  explored  the  heavens 
with  untiring  zeal.  He  never  slept  more  than 
four  hours,  and  the  upper  part  of  his  house  in 
the  Sandgasse,  in  Bremen,  was  fitted  up  with 
astronomical  instruments.  The  largest  telescope 
which  he  possessed  was  a  refractor  3f  inches 
in  aperture.  He  remained  in  active  practice 
till  1823,  when  he  retired,  and  was  enabled 
to  devote  more  attention  to  his  beloved  science. 
He  died  on  March  2,  1840,  at  the  advanced  age 
of  eighty-one. 

Miss  Clerke  says  of  Olbers,  "  Night  after 
night,  during  half  a  century  and  upwards,  he 
discovered,  calculated,  or  observed  the  cometary 
visitants  of  northern  skies."  He  was  the  dis- 
coverer of  the  comet  of  1815,  known  as  Gibers' 
comet.  It  moves  round  the  Sun  in  a  period 
of  over  seventy  years,  and  returned  to  perihelion 
in  1887,  forty-seven  years  after  the  death  of  its 


126      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

discoverer.  The  great  comet  of  1811  was  the 
subject  of  a  memoir  which  Olbers  published  the 
following  year,  and  in  which  he  originated  the 
"  electrical  repulsion "  theory  of  comets'  tails. 
Even  after  the  fulfilment  of  Halley's  great 
prediction,  comets  were  still  looked  upon  with 
profound  awe,  and  the  popular  fear  regarding 
them  was  still  prevalent.  Olbers,  however, 
showed  that  the  tails  of  comets  resulted  from 
purely  natural  causes.  He  regarded  the  Sun 
as  possessed  of  a  repulsive  as  well  as  an 
attractive  force,  and  considered  the  tails  to 
be  vapours  repelled  from  the  nucleus  of  the 
comet  by  the  Sun.  He  calculated  that  in 
the  comet  of  1811  the  particles  of  matter 
expelled  from  the  head  reached  the  tail  in 
eleven  minutes,  with  a  velocity  comparable  to 
that  of  light.  The  theory  of  electrical  repul- 
sion, since  elaborated  by  other  observers,  is 
now  generally  accepted  among  astronomers.  No 
other  hypothesis  represents  in  such  a  complete 
manner  the  formation  and  growth  of  the  lum- 
inous appendages  of  the  celestial  bodies  so 
picturesquely  called  "pale -winged  messengers" 
as  that  put  forward  by  the  physician  of 
Bremen. 

Some  years  after  Olbers'  famous  theory  was 
given  to  the  world,  a  great  advance  was  made 


COMETS.  127 

in  cometary  astronomy  by  another  great  German 
astronomer,  his  friend  and  pupil  Encke.  The 
son  of  a  Hamburg  clergyman,  Johann  Franz 
Encke  was  born  in  that  city  in  1791,  and 
died  in  1865  at  Spandau.  After  taking  part 
in  the  war  against  Napoleon,  he  was  in  1822 
appointed  director  of  the  Gotha  Observatory, 
being  called  to  Berlin  in  1825.  In  early  life 
he  was  the  pupil  of  Olbers  and  Gauss,  and 
his  investigations  and  discoveries  formed  an 
epoch  in  astronomy.  His  most  famous  dis- 
covery related  to  the  little  comet  which  bears 
his  name.  The  comet  was  discovered  by  J.  L. 
Pons  (1761-1831)  at  Marseilles,  although  it  had 
previously  been  seen  by  Mechain  and  Caroline 
Herschel.  In  1819  Encke  computed  the  orbit 
of  the  comet,  and  boldly  announced  that  it 
would  reappear  in  1822,  its  period  being  about 
3£  years,  or  1208  days.  In  1822  the  comet, 
true  to  Encke's  prediction,  returned  to  peri- 
helion, and  was  observed  at  Paramatta  in  Aus- 
tralia, the  perihelion  passage  taking  place  within 
three  hours  of  the  time  predicted  by  Encke.  As 
Miss  Clerke  remarks,  "  The  importance  of  this 
event  will  be  better  understood  when  it  is  re- 
membered that  it  was  only  the  second  instance 
of  the  recognised  return  of  a  comet ;  and  that 
it,  moreover,  established  the  existence  of  a  new 


128   A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

class  of  celestial  bodies,  distinguished  as  comets 
of  short  period." 

In  1825  the  comet  was  again  observed  by  Valz, 
passing  perihelion  on  September  16,  and  in  1828 
it  was  seen  by  Struve.  Encke  now  made  a  very 
remarkable  discovery.  Determining  its  period 
with  great  accuracy,  in  1832  he  found  that  his 
comet  returned  to  perihelion  two  and  a  half 
hours  before  the  predicted  time.  As  this  re- 
peatedly happened,  Encke  put  forward  the  theory 
that  the  acceleration  was  due  to  the  existence 
of  a  resisting  medium  in  the  neighbourhood  of 
the  Sun,  too  rarefied  to  retard  the  planetary 
motions,  but  quite  dense  enough  to  make  the 
comet's  path  smaller,  and  to  eventually  precipi- 
tate it  on  the  Sun.  The  theory  was  widely 
accepted,  but  after  1868  the  acceleration  began 
to  decrease,  diminishing  by  one-half;  besides, 
no  other  comet  is  thus  accelerated,  and  the 
hypothesis  has  accordingly  been  abandoned. 

The  second  comet  recognised  as  periodic  was 
that  discovered  on  February  27,  1826,  by  an 
Austrian  officer,  Wilhelm  von  Biela  (1782-1856), 
and  ten  days  later  by  the  French  observer, 
Gambart  (1800-1836),  both  of  whom,  in  com- 
puting its  orbit,  noticed  a  remarkable  similarity 
to  the  orbits  of  comets  which  appeared  in  1772 
and  1805.  Accordingly,  they  concluded  it  to 


COMETS.  129 

be  periodic,  with  a  period  of  between  six  and 
seven  years.  The  comet  returned  in  1832.  In 
1828  Olbers  had  published  certain  calculations 
showing  that  portions  of  the  comet  would  sweep 
over  the  part  of  the  Earth's  orbit  a  month 
later  than  the  Earth  itself.  This  gave  rise 
to  a  panic  that  the  comet  would  destroy  the 
Earth,  which  did  not  subside  till  it  was  an- 
nounced by  Arago  that  the  Earth  and  the 
comet  would  at  no  time  approach  to  within 
fifty  million  miles  of  each  other.  The  comet 
returned  again  in  the  end  of  1845.  It  was 
kept  well  in  view  by  astronomers  in  Europe 
and  America.  On  December  19,  1846,  Hind 
noticed  that  the  comet  was  pear-shaped,  and 
ten  days  later  it  had  divided  in  two.  The 
two  comets  returned  again  in  1852  and  were 
well  observed ;  but  they  were  never  seen  again, 
at  least  as  comets.  Their  subsequent  history 
belongs  to  meteoric  astronomy. 

A  comet  discovered  by  Faye  at  Paris  in  1843 
was  found  to  have  a  period  of  seven  and  a 
half  years.  It  has  returned  regularly  since  its 
discovery,  true  to  astronomical  prediction.  Its 
motion  was  particularly  investigated  for  traces 
of  a  resisting  medium,  by  Didrik  Magnus  Axel 
Holler  (1830-1896),  director  of  the  Lund  Ob- 
servatory, who  reached  a  negative  conclusion. 

I 


130      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

In  1835  Halley's  comet  returned  to  perihelion, 
and  was  attentively  studied  by  the  most  famous 
astronomers  of  the  age.  It  was  particularly 
studied  by  Sir  John  Herschel  and  by  Bessel, 
who  assisted  in  developing  Gibers'  theory  of 
electrical  repulsion.  But  the  most  brilliant 
comet  of  the  century  was  that  which  suddenly 
appeared  on  February  28,  1843,  in  the  vicinity 
of  the  Sun.  This  great  comet,  whose  centre 
approached  the  Sun  within  78,000  miles,  rushed 
past  its  perihelion  at  the  speed  of  366  miles  a 
second.  The  comet's  tail  reached  the  length  of 
200  millions  of  miles.  The  comet  of  1843  was 
however  outshone,  not  in  brilliance  but  as  a 
celestial  spectacle,  by  the  great  comet  discovered 
on  June  2,  1858,  by  Giovanni  Battista  Donati 
(1826-1873)  at  Florence,  and  since  known  by 
his  name.  It  became  visible  to  the  naked  eye 
on  August  19,  and  was  telescopically  observed 
until  March  4,  1859.  There  was  abundance  of 
time,  therefore,  to  study  the  comet,  which  was 
exhaustively  observed  by  G.  P.  Bond  at  Harvard. 
His  observations  convinced  him  that  the  light 
from  Donati's  comet  was  merely  reflected  sun- 
shine, and  this  was  generally  accepted.  Another 
great  comet  appeared  in  1861.  Like  that  of 
1843,  its  appearance  was  sudden,  being  observed 
after  sunset  on  June  30,  1861,  when,  says  Miss 


COMETS.  131 

Clerke,  "  a  golden  yellow  planetary  disc,  wrapt 
in  dense  nebulosity,  shone  out  while  the  June 
twilight  in  these  latitudes  was  still  in  its  first 
strength."  On  the  same  evening  the  Earth  and 
the  Moon  passed  through  the  tail  of  the  great 
comet.  The  vast  majority  of  people  never  knew 
that  such  a  phenomenon  had  taken  place,  and 
even  the  astronomers  only  noticed  a  singular 
phosphorescence  in  the  sky  —  a  proof  of  the 
extreme  tenuity  of  comets. 

The  first  application  of  the  spectroscope  to 
the  light  of  comets  was  made  by  Donati  in  1864. 
The  spectrum  was  found  to  consist  of  three  bright 
bands,  but  Donati  was  unable  to  identify  them. 
However,  his  observation  gave  the  death-blow 
to  the  theory  that  comets  shone  by  reflected 
light  alone,  for  it  implied  the  existence  of 
glowing  gas  in  them.  On  the  appearance  in 
1868  of  the  periodic  comet  discovered  by 
Friedrich  August  Theodor  Winnecke  (1835-1897), 
the  spectrum  was  examined  by  Huggins,  who 
identified  the  bright  bands  with  the  spectrum  of 
hydrocarbon.  This  was  confirmed  in  regard  to 
Coggia's  comet  of  1874  by  Huggins  himself,  and 
also  Bredikhine  and  Vogel.  The  hydrocarbon 
spectrum  is  characteristic  of  comets,  and  has  been 
recognised  in  all  those  spectroscopically  studied. 

The  time  had  now  come  for  a  more  complete 


132      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

theory  of  comets  than  that  of  Olbers.  The 
theory  of  electrical  repulsion  was  developed  in 
1871  by  Zollner,  whose  principle  of  investigation 
is  thus  described  by  Miss  Clerke  :  "  The  efficacy 
of  solar  electrical  repulsion  relatively  to  solar 
attraction  grows  as  the  size  of  the  particle 
diminishes."  If  the  particle  is  small  enough, 
it  will  obey  the  repulsive,  and  not  the  attractive, 
power  of  the  Sun.  Zollner  considered  that  the 
smallest  particles  of  comets  obeyed  the  repulsive 
power,  and  thus  formed  the  tails  of  comets.  The 
development  of  a  complete  cometary  theory  is 
due,  however,  to  the  genius  of  a  Russian  astron- 
omer. Theodor  Alexandrovitch  Bredikhine, 
born  in  1831  at  NicolaiefF,  was  employed  at 
Moscow  Observatory  from  1857  to  1890,  when 
he  was  promoted  to  the  position  of  director  at 
Pulkowa.  He  resigned  in  1895,  and  spent  his 
last  years  in  St  Petersburg,  where  he  died  on 
May  14,  1904.  From  the  beginning  of  his 
astronomical  career  he  was  devoted  to  the 
study  of  comets  and  their  tails,  but  it  was  the 
appearance  of  Coggia's  comet  in  1874  which 
marked  the  commencement  of  his  most  important 
observations.  In  that  year,  on  making  certain 
calculations  regarding  the  hypothetical  repulsive 
force  exerted  by  the  Sun  on  various  comets,  he 
reached  the  conclusion  that  the  values  repre- 


COMETS.  133 

senting  the  intensity  of  the  repulsion  fell  into 
three  classes.  This  was  the  first  hint  of  a 
classification  of  cometary  tails.  Meanwhile  he 
carefully  studied  the  tails  of  comets  both  from 
direct  observation  and  from  drawings. 

In  1877  he  wrote:  "I  suspect  that  comets 
are  divisible  into  groups,  for  each  of  which  the 
repulsive  force  is  perhaps  the  same."  Subsequent 
investigations  led  Bredikhine  to  divide  the  tails 
of  comets  into  three  types.  The  first  type  con- 
sists of  long,  straight  tails,  pointed  directly  away 
from  the  Sun,  represented  by  the  tails  of  the 
great  comets  of  1811,  1843,  and  1861.  In  the 
second  type,  represented  by  Donati's  and  Coggia's 
comets,  the  tails,  although  pointed  away  from 
the  Sun,  appear  considerably  curved.  In  the 
third  type  the  tails  are,  to  quote  Miss  Clerke, 
"  short,  strongly-bent,  brushlike  emanations,  and 
in  bright  comets  seem  to  be  only  found  in  com- 
bination with  tails  of  the  higher  classes." 

In  1879  Bredikhine  fully  developed  his  com- 
etary theory.  Assuming  the  reality  of  the  re- 
pulsive force,  he  concluded  that  to  produce  tails 
of  the  first  type,  the  repulsion  requires  to  be 
twelve  times  greater  than  the  solar  attraction ; 
the  production  of  tails  of  the  second  type 
necessitates  a  repulsive  force  about  equal  to 
gravity ;  while  the  force  producing  third  -  type 


134      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

tails  has  only  one-fourth  the  power  of  gravita- 
tion. It  was  concluded  that  the  tails  are  formed 
by  particles  of  matter  repelled  from  the  comet 
by  the  repulsive  force  of  the  Sun,  and  in  tails 
of  the  first  type  the  velocity  with  which  these 
particles  leave  the  body  of  the  comet  is  four  or 
five  miles  a  second.  Bredikhine  reached  the 
conclusion  that  the  Sun's  repulsive  force  is  in- 
variable, and  that  the  different  types  of  tails 
are  formed  by  the  same  force  acting  on  different 
elements.  The  numbers  12,  1,  and  J,  are  in- 
versely proportional  to  the  atomic  weights  of 
hydrogen,  hydrocarbon  gas,  and  iron  vapour. 
Here,  then,  was  the  key  to  the  mystery.  Bre- 
dikhine pointed  out  that  in  all  probability  the 
first-type  tails  are  formed  of  hydrogen,  the  second 
of  hydrocarbon,  and  the  third  of  iron,  with  a 
mixture  of  sodium  and  other  elements. 

Within  a  few  years  of  the  publication  of  Bre- 
dikhine's  theory,  five  bright  comets  made  their 
appearance,  and  there  was  abundant  chance  of 
testing  the  theory  spectroscopically.  In  1882 
Well's  comet  was  particularly  studied  at  Green- 
wich by  Maunder,  who  discerned  a  sodium-line 
in  its  spectrum.  The  magnificent  comet  which 
appeared  in  1882  was  spectroscopically  studied 
at  Dunecht  in  Aberdeen  shire  by  Ralph  Gopeland 
(1837-1905),  Astronomer-Royal  of  Scotland,  who 


COMETS.  135 

identified  in  its  spectrum  the  prominent  iron-lines 
as  well  as  the  sodium-line.  These  observations 
were  certainly  confirmatory  of  Bredikhine's  theory. 
It  should  also  be  stated,  however,  that  several 
comets  have  shown,  in  addition  to  the  hydro- 
carbon spectrum,  that  of  reflected  sunlight,  which 
proves  that  the  light  we  receive  from  comets 
is  of  a  compound  nature. 

The  comet  which  appeared  in  1880  was  an- 
nounced by  Benjamin  Apthorp  Gould  (1824-1896) 
to  be  a  return  of  the  great  comet  of  1843.  Cal- 
culations by  Gould,  Copeland,  and  Hind  revealed 
a  close  similarity  between  the  elements  of  the 
two  orbits.  Eventually  it  had  to  be  admitted 
that  the  comets  were  separate  bodies  travelling 
in  the  same  orbit.  Then,  two  years  later,  the 
great  September  comet  of  1882  was  found  to 
revolve  in  the  same  orbit  as  those  of  1668,  1843, 
and  1880.  Four  years  later,  another  comet,  dis- 
covered in  1887,  was  found  to  move  in  the  same 
path. 

Closely  allied  to  this  subject  is  the  existence 
of  "  comet  families,"  demonstrated  by  Hoek  of 
Utrecht  in  1865,  and  mentioned  in  our  chapter 
on  the  Outer  Planets.  These  comets  are  found 
to  be  dependent  on  the  planets,  Jupiter,  Saturn, 
Uranus,  and  Neptune,  each  possessing  a  comet- 
group.  Various  theories  have  been  advanced  to 


136      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

account  for  the  existence  of  these  groups.  One 
of  these  theories  is  that  the  comets  have  been 
captured  by  the  various  planets,  who  have  forced 
them  into  their  present  orbits.  A  mathematical 
study  by  Jean  Pierre  Octave  Callandrean  (1852- 
1904)  shows  that  the  large  number  of  comets 
possessed  by  the  various  planets  may  be  ex- 
plained by  the  disintegration  of  large  comets  into 
small  ones.  The  capture  theory,  it  must  be  re- 
membered, is  purely  hypothetical,  and  must  not 
be  regarded  as  anything  but  a  theory.  All  that 
we  really  know  is  the  existence  of  comet>-families, 
and  of  comets  moving  in  the  same  orbits. 

The  first  photograph  of  a  comet  was  that  of 
Donati's,  taken  in  1858  by  Bond.  In  1881  Teb- 
butt's  comet  was  photographed  in  England  by 
Huggins,  and  in  America  by  Henry  Draper 
(1837-1882),  while  in  1882  Gill  secured  excellent 
photographs  of  the  great  September  comet.  The 
first  photographic  discovery  of  a  comet  was  made 
by  Barnard  in  1892.  Since  then  photography 
has  been  much  used  in  cometary  astronomy.  No 
bright  comets  have  appeared  since  1882, — if  we 
except  the  comet  of  1901,  only  seen  in  the 
southern  hemisphere,  —  although  several  have 
been  just  visible  to  the  naked  eye,  among  them 
Swift's  comet  of  1892  and  Perrine's  in  the 
autumn  of  1902.  Telescopic  comets,  however, 


COMETS.  137 

are  very  numerous,  and  a  year  never  passes 
without  one  or  more  being  discovered.  The 
ordinary  periodic  comets,  such  as  Encke's,  Faye's, 
and  others,  are  very  faint,  and  are  becoming 
fainter  at  each  return — a  clear  proof  that  comets 
die,  as  Kepler  said  three  centuries  ago.  This 
brings  us  to  the  subject  of  the  next  chapter, 
Meteoric  Astronomy. 


CHAPTER    VIII. 

METEORS. 

THERE  is  no  more  interesting  chapter  in  the 
history  of  astronomy  than  that  relating  to 
meteors.  A  hundred  years  ago  shooting -stars 
were  not  considered  to  be  astronomical  phe- 
nomena. They  were  supposed  to  be  merely 
inflammable  vapours  which  caught  fire  in  the 
upper  regions  of  our  atmosphere,  although  both 
Halley  and  the  scientist  Ernst  Chladni  (1756- 
1827)  had  notions  of  their  celestial  origin.  For 
thirty -three  years  after  the  beginning  of  the 
century,  however,  nothing  was  heard  of  meteoric 
astronomy,  nor  was  the  subject  considered  as 
part  of  the  astronomer's  labours. 

A  great  meteoric  shower  took  place  on 
the  night  of  November  12  and  morning  of 
November  13,  1833.  The  shower  was  probably 
the  grandest  ever  witnessed,  the  shooting-stars 
being  literally  innumerable.  The  display  was 
best  observed  in  America,  and  was  attentively 


METEORS.  139 

watched  by  Denison  Olmsted  (1791-1859),  Pro- 
fessor of  Mathematics  at  Yale,  and  by  the  Ameri- 
can physicist,  A.  C.  Twining  (1801-1884).  These 
investigators  discovered  that  all  the  meteors 
which  fell  during  the  great  shower  seemed  to 
come  from  the  same  part  of  the  celestial  vault. 
In  other  words,  their  paths,  when  traced  back, 
were  found  to  converge  to  a  point  near  the  star 
y  Leonis.  This  observation  gave  the  death- 
blow to  the  theory  of  their  terrestrial  origin. 
The  point  known  as  the  "radiant"  was  clearly 
a  point  independent  of  the  Earth.  Olmsted  also 
recognised  the  fact  that  the  shower  had  taken 
place  in  the  previous  year,  and  he  regarded  it  as 
produced  by  a  swarm  of  particles  moving  round 
the  Sun  in  a  period  of  182  days.  Soon  after  this 
it  was  noticed  that  the  phenomenon  took  place 
in  1834  and  subsequent  years  with  gradually 
decreasing  intensity.  It  was  then  remembered 
that  Humboldt  had  observed  in  November  1799 
a  very  brilliant  shower,  and  accordingly  Olbers 
suggested  that  another  shower  might  be  seen 
in  1867. 

The  falling  stars  of  August  were  next  proved 
by  Adolphe  Quetelet  (1791-1874)  to  form  another 
meteoric  system ;  and  accordingly  the  theory  of 
Olmsted  that  the  November  meteors  moved 
round  the  Sun  in  182  days  had  to  be  abandoned, 


140      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

for,  says  Miss  Clerke,  "  If  it  would  be  a  violation 
of  probability  to  attribute  to  one  such  agglomera- 
tion a  period  of  an  exact  year  or  sub -multiple 
of  a  year,  it  would  be  plainly  absurd  to  suppose 
the  movements  of  two  or  more  regulated  by  such 
highly  artificial  conditions."  Accordingly  Erman 
suggested  in  1839  the  theory  that  meteors  re- 
volved in  closed  rings,  intersecting  the  terrestrial 
orbit ;  and  that  when  the  Earth  crossed  through 
the  point  of  intersection,  it  met  some  members 
of  the  swarm.  The  subject  now  remained  in 
abeyance  for  thirty-four  years,  if  we  except  some 
wonderful  ideas  put  forward  in  1861  by  Daniel 
Kirkwood  (1813-1896),  an  American  astronomer, 
who  stated  his  belief  in  the  disintegration  of 
comets  into  meteors ;  but  little  attention  was 
paid  to  his  opinions.  In  1864  the  subject  was 
taken  up  by  Hubert  Anson  Newton  (1830- 
1896),  Professor  at  Yale,  who  undertook  a  search 
through  ancient  records  for  the  thirty-three-year 
period  of  the  Leonids  or  November  meteors.  His 
search  was  highly  successful,  and  having  demon- 
strated the  existence  of  the  period,  Newton  set 
himself  to  determine  the  orbit.  He  indicated 
five  possible  orbits  for  the  swarm,  ranging  from 
33  years  to  354J  days.  Newton  was  unable  to 
solve  the  question  mathematically ;  but  here 
Adams,  the  discoverer  of  Neptune,  came  to  the 


METEORS.  141 

rescue,  and  demonstrated  that  the  period  of  33|- 
years  was  alone  possible,  and  that  the  others 
were  untenable.  These  investigations,  completed 
in  March  1867,  proved  the  existence  of  a  great 
meteoric  orbit  extending  to  the  orbit  of  Uranus. 
Meanwhile  Newton  had  predicted  a  meteoric 
shower  on  the  evening  of  November  13  and 
morning  of  November  14,  1866.  His  prediction 
was  fulfilled.  The  shower  was  inferior  to  that  of 
1833,  but  was  still  a  magnificent  spectacle.  Sir 
Robert  Ball,  then  employed  at  Lord  Rosse's 
Observatory,  observed  the  shower,  and  records 
the  impossibility  of  counting  the  meteors.  This 
great  shower  attracted  the  attention  of  astron- 
omers all  over  the  world  to  the  study  of  meteors. 
Meanwhile  Schiaparelli  had  been  working  at 
the  subject  for  some  time,  and  in  four  letters 
addressed  to  Secchi,  towards  the  end  of  1866,  he 
showed  that  meteors  were  members  of  the  Solar 
System,  possessed  of  a  greater  velocity  than  that 
of  the  Earth,  and  travelling  in  orbits  resembling 
those  of  comets,  in  the  fact  that  they  moved  in  no 
particular  plane,  and  that  their  motion  was  both 
direct  and  retrograde.  Schiaparelli  computed 
the  orbit  of  the  Perseids  or  August  meteors, 
and  was  astonished  to  find  it  identical  with  the 
comet  of  August  1862.  This  was  a  proof  of  the 
connection  between  these  two  apparently  widely 


142      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

different  types  of  celestial  bodies.  Early  in  1867 
Sehiaparelli  found  that  Le  Verrier's  elements  for 
the  orbit  of  the  Leonids  were  identical  with 
those  of  the  comet  of  1866,  discovered  by  Ernst 
Tempel  (1821-1889).  Peters  of  Altona  had 
meanwhile  reached  the  same  conclusion ;  while 
Edmund  Weiss  (born  1837)  of  Vienna  pointed 
out  the  similarity  of  the  orbit  of  a  star-shower 
on  April  20  and  that  of  the  comet  of  1861. 
He  also  drew  attention,  independently  of  Galle 
and  D' Arrest,  to  the  close  connection  between 
the  orbits  of  the  lost  Biela's  comet  and  the 
Andromedid  meteors  of  November. 

All  doubt  as  to  the  connection  of  comets  and 
meteors  was  removed  by  the  great  shower  on 
November  27,  1872.  Biela's  lost  comet  was  due 
at  perihelion  in  1872,  and  although  searched  for 
was  not  observed ;  but  when  the  Earth  crossed 
its  orbit,  a  great  meteoric  shower  took  place. 
"It  became  evident,"  says  Miss  Clerke,  "that 
Biela's  comet  was  shedding  over  us  the  pulver- 
ised products  of  its  disintegration."  The  shower 
was  little  inferior  to  that  of  1866.  Meanwhile 
Ernst  Klinkerfues  (1827-1884),  Professor  at 
Gottingen,  believing  that  Biela's  comet  itself  had 
encountered  the  Earth,  telegraphed  to  Norman 
Robert  Pogson  (1829-1891),  Government  astron- 
omer at  Madras,  to  search  for  the  comet  in  the 


METEORS.  143 

opposite  region  of  the  sky.  Pogson  did  observe 
a  comet,  but  certainly  not  Biela's,  although  prob- 
ably another  fragment  of  the  missing  body. 

The  theory  of  the  actual  disintegration  of 
comets  was  enunciated  by  Schiaparelli  in  1873, 
and  developed  in  his  work  '  Le  Stelle  Cadenti/ 
He  was  led  to  regard  comets  as  cosmical  clouds 
formed  in  space  by  "  the  local  concentration  of 
celestial  matter."  He  then  remarks  that  a  cos- 
mical cloud  seldom  penetrates  to  the  interior  of 
the  Solar  System,  "  unless  it  has  been  trans- 
formed into  a  parabolic  current,"  which  may 
occupy  years,  or  centuries,  in  passing  its 
perihelion,  "  forming  in  space  a  river,  whose 
transverse  dimensions  are  very  small  with  respect 
to  its  length  :  of  such  currents,  those  which  are 
encountered  by  the  earth  in  its  annual  motion 
are  rendered  visible  to  us  under  the  form  of 
showers  of  meteors  diverging  from  a  certain 
radiant." 

Schiaparelli  next  pointed  out  that  when  the 
current  of  meteors  encounters  a  planet,  the  re- 
sulting perturbations  cause  some  of  the  meteoric 
bodies  to  move  in  separate  orbits,  forming  the 
bolides  and  aerolites  which  fall  from  the  sky  at 
intervals.  "  The  term  falling  stars"  he  says, 
"  expresses  simply  and  precisely  the  truth 
respecting  them.  These  bodies  have  the  same 


144      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

relation  to  comets  that  the  small  planets 
between  Mars  and  Jupiter  have  to  the  larger 
planets."  In  the  third  chapter  of  his  '  Le 
Stelle  Cadenti'  he  explicitly  states  that 
"the  meteoric  currents  are  the  products  of 
the  dissolution  of  comets,  and  consist  of  minute 
particles  which  certain  comets  have  abandoned 
along  their  orbits,  by  reason  of  the  disintegrat- 
ing force  which  the  Sun  and  planets  exert  on 
the  rare  materials  of  which  they  are  composed." 
In  1878  Alexander  Stewart  Herschel  (born 
1836),  son  of  Sir  John  Herschel,  and  a  famous 
meteoric  observer,  published  a  list  of  known  or 
suspected  coincidences  of  meteoric  and  cometary 
orbits,  amounting  to  seventy -six.  Meanwhile 
much  progress  has  since  been  made  in  the 
observation  of  meteoric  showers  and  the  deter- 
mination of  their  radiant  points.  In  this  branch 
of  astronomy,  by  far  the  greatest  name  is  that 
of  William  Frederick  Denning,  the  self-made 
English  astronomer.  Born  at  Redpost,  in 
Somerset,  in  1848,  his  career  of  meteoric  ob- 
servation commenced  in  1866.  For  the  past 
forty  years  he  has  attentively  devoted  him- 
self to  the  observation  of  meteors.  From  1872 
to  1903  he  determined  the  radiant  points  of 
no  fewer  than  1179  meteoric  showers.  In 
addition  to  this,  he  published,  in  1899,  a 


METEORS.  145 

catalogue  of  meteoric  radiants,  containing  436*7  ; 
and  he  has  carefully  studied  the  remarkable 
objects  known  as  fireballs  or  "  sporadic  meteors." 
He  has  occasionally  been  able  to  trace  a  con- 
nection between  fireballs  and  weak  meteoric 
showers,  but  he  concludes  that  they  "  must 
either  be  merely  single  sporadic  bodies,  or  else 
the  survivors  of  some  meteor  group,  nearly 
exhausted  by  the  waste  of  its  material  during 
many  past  ages."  All  of  Denning's  meteoric 
work  has  been  done  in  his  spare  time,  for  it 
must  be  borne  in  mind  that  he  pursues  the 
profession  of  accountant  in  Bristol,  and  that 
only  his  leisure  hours  have  been  devoted  to 
the  science  of  astronomy.  His  researches  have 
been  entirely  conducted  with  the  unaided  eye. 
His  only  instrument  is  a  perfectly  straight 
wand,  which  he  uses  as  a  help  and  corrective 
to  the  eye  in  ascribing  the  paths  of  the  meteors. 
Thanks  to  the  laborious  work  of  this  able 
English  astronomer,  the  observation  of  meteors 
is  now  a  scientific  branch  of  astronomy.  In 
the  words  of  Maunder,  "  for  six  thousand  years 
men  stared  at  meteors  and  learned  nothing,  for 
sixty  years  they  have  studied  them  and  learned 
much,  and  half  of  what  we  know  has  been 
taught  us  in  half  that  time  by  the  efforts  of 
a  single  observer." 

K 


146      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

Further  meteoric  showers  from  Biela's  comet 
were  seen  in  1885  and  1892.  The  Leonid 
shower  was  confidently  predicted  for  1899,  in 
accordance  with  the  thirty -three -year  period, 
but  the  great  display  did  not  come  off,  either 
in  1899  or  1900.  In  1901  there  was  a  certain 
weak  shower  observed  in  America  ;  and  similar 
displays  took  place  in  1903  and  1904.  Many 
explanations  have  been  given  as  to  the  failure 
of  the  shower,  the  most  probable  idea  being 
that  the  attraction  of  Jupiter  diverted  the 
meteors  from  their  course. 

Denning's  observations  on  meteors  resulted, 
as  early  as  1877,  in  the  discovery  of  so-called 
"stationary  radiants."  The  radiant-point  of 
a  long  enduring  shower  usually  exhibits  an 
apparent  motion,  resulting  from  the  combined 
orbital  motions  of  the  Earth  and  the  meteors ; 
but  Denning  found  that  in  some  cases  the 
shower,  though  lasting  for  months,  persistently 
exhibited  the  same  radiant-point,  implying  that 
the  motion  of  the  Earth  must  be  insignificant 
compared  with  that  of  the  meteors,  computed 
by  Ranyard  at  880  miles  per  second.  The  dif- 
ficulty of  admitting  so  great  a  velocity  led 
the  French  astronomer,  Francois  Felix  Tisserand 
(1845-1896),  to  doubt  the  existence  of  these 
stationary  radiants ;  but  the  fact  of  their 


METEORS.  147 

existence  cannot  be  doubted,  although  no  really 
satisfactory  explanation  has  been  offered. 

Another  type  of  meteors  comprises  the  bodies 
termed  respectively  as  bolides,  uranoliths,  and 
aerolites, — stones  which  fall  to  the  Earth  from 
the  sky.  In  1800  the  French  Academy  declared 
the  accounts  of  stones  having  fallen  from  the 
heavens  to  be  absolutely  untrue.  Three  years 
later  an  aerolite  fell  at  Laigle,  in  the  Depart- 
ment of  Orne,  on  April  26,  1803,  attended  by 
a  terrific  explosion.  In  the  words  of  Flammarion, 
"  Numerous  witnesses  affirmed  that  some  minutes 
after  the  appearance  of  a  great  bolide,  moving 
from  south-east  to  north-east,  and  which  had 
been  perceived  at  Alen9on,  Caen,  and  Falaise, 
a  fearful  explosion,  followed  by  detonations  like 
the  report  of  cannon  and  the  fire  of  musketry, 
proceeded  from  an  isolated  black  cloud  in  a 
very  clear  sky.  A  great  number  of  meteoric 
stones  were  then  precipitated  on  the  surface  of 
the  ground,  where  they  were  collected,  still 
smoking,  over  an  extent  of  country  which 
measured  no  less  than  seven  miles  in  length." 

Some  aerolites,  instead  of  being  shattered  into 
fragments,  have  been  observed  to  fall  to  the 
Earth  intact,  and  bury  themselves  in  the  ground. 
Numerous  instances  have  been  observed  during 
the  last  century,  and  masses  of  meteoric  stones 


148      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

have  been  found  in  positions  which  clearly  in- 
dicate that  they  must  have  fallen  from  the  sky. 
Chemists  have  made  analyses  of  the  elements  in 
these  remarkable  bodies,  and  have  found  them 
to  contain  iron,  magnesium,  silicon,  oxygen, 
nickel,  cobalt,  tin,  copper,  &c.  The  spectrum 
of  these  aerolites,  raised  to  incandescence,  has 
been  studied  by  Vogel  and  by  the  Swedish 
observer,  Bernhard  Hasselberg  (born  1848),  who 
detected  the  presence  of  hydrocarbons,  which  are 
also  present  in  cometary  spectra. 

When  the  existence  of  aerolites  as  celestial 
bodies  was  first  recognised,  Laplace  suggested 
that  they  had  been  ejected  from  volcanoes  on 
the  Moon.  This  theory,  although  supported 
by  Olbers  and  other  astronomers,  was  soon 
rejected.  Next,  it  was  suggested  that  they 
were  ejected  from  the  Sun,  and  Proctor  believed 
them  to  come  from  the  giant  planets.  A  very 
detailed  discussion  of  the  subject  is  to  be  found 
in  Ball's  '  Story  of  the  Heavens'  (1886),  in  which 
he  expresses  views  in  harmony  with  those  of 
the  Austrian  physicist  Tschermak.  Ball  demon- 
strated that  the  meteors  which  fall  to  the  Earth 
cannot  have  come  from  any  other  planet,  nor 
from  the  Sun.  Accordingly,  he  concluded  that 
they  were  originally  ejected  by  the  volcanoes 
of  the  Earth  many  ages  ago,  when  they  were 


METEORS.  149 

active  enough  to  throw  up  pieces  of  matter  with 
a  velocity  great  enough  to  carry  them  away 
from  the  Earth  altogether.  Such  meteors  would, 
however,  intersect  the  terrestrial  orbit  at  each 
revolution. 

The  alternative  theory  to  this,  supported  by 
Schiaparelli  and  Lockyer,  is  that  the  aerolites 
are  merely  larger  members  of  the  meteor- swarms, 
which  have  been  deflected  from  their  paths.  The 
chief  objection  to  this  theory  is  the  absence 
of  connection  between  the  meteoric  showers  and 
the  falls  of  aerolites  and  bolides.  Only  on  one 
occasion  was  a  meteoric  stone  observed  to  fall 
during  a  shower.  On  November  27,  1885,  during 
the  shower  of  Andromedid  meteors  from  Biela's 
comet,  a  large  bolide,  weighing  more  than  eight 
pounds,  fell  at  Mazapil,  in  Mexico.  This,  how- 
ever, was  the  only  case  hitherto  observed ;  and 
it  may  have  been  merely  a  coincidence. 


CHAPTEE   IX. 

THE   STARS. 

THE  most  remarkable  progress  in  astronomy 
during  the  past  century  has  been  in  the  de- 
partment of  sidereal  science,  or  the  study  of 
the  Suns  of  space,  observed  for  their  own  sakes, 
and  not  merely  for  the  purpose  of  determining 
the  positions  of  the  Sun  and  Moon,  and  to  assist 
navigation.  Thanks  to  Herschel,  the  nineteenth 
century  witnessed  the  steady  development  of 
stellar  astronomy,  combined  with  many  import- 
ant discoveries  and  investigations. 

The  one  pre  -  Herschelian  problem  in  sidereal 
astronomy  was  the  distance  of  the  stars.  Owing 
to  its  bearing  on  the  Copernican  theory,  the 
problem  was  attacked  by  the  astronomers  of  the 
seventeenth  and  eighteenth  centuries.  Herschel 
made  numerous  attempts  to  detect  the  parallax 
of  the  brighter  stars,  but  failed.  Meanwhile 
there  had  been  many  illusions.  Piazzi  believed 
that  his  instruments — which  in  reality  were 


THE    STARS.  151 

worn  out  and  unfit  for  use  —  had  revealed 
parallaxes  in  Sirius,  Aldebaran,  Procyon,  and 
Vega ;  Calandrelli,  another  Italian,  and  John 
Brinkley  (1763-1835),  Astronomer-Royal  of  Ire- 
land, were  similarly  deluded;  and  in  1821  it  was 
shown  by  Friedrich  Georg  Wilhelm  Struve  (1793- 
1864),  the  great  German  astronomer,  that  no 
instruments  then  in  use  could  possibly  be  suc- 
cessful in  measuring  the  stellar  parallax.  A  few 
years  later,  however,  Fraunhofer  brought  the 
refractor  to  a  degree  of  perfection  surpassing  all 
previous  efforts.  In  1829  he  mounted  for  the  ob- 
servatory at  Konigsberg  a  heliometer,  the  object- 
glass  of  which  was  divided  in  two,  and  capable 
of  very  accurate  measurements.  This  heliometer 
eventually  revealed  the  parallax  of  the  stars  in 
the  able  hands  of  Friedrich  Wilhelm  Bessel. 

Friedrich  Wilhelm  Bessel  was  born  at  Minden, 
on  the  Weser,  south-west  of  Hanover,  on  July 
22,  1784.  His  father  was  an  obscure  Govern- 
ment official,  unable  to  provide  a  university 
education  for  his  son.  Bessel's  love  of  figures, 
together  with  an  aversion  to  Latin,  led  him 
to  pursue  a  commercial  career.  At  the  age  of 
fourteen,  therefore,  he  entered  as  an  apprenticed 
clerk  the  business  of  Kuhlenkamp  &  Sons,  in 
Bremen.  He  was  not  content,  however,  to 
remain  in  that  humble  position.  His  great 


152      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

ambition  was  to  become  supercargo  on  one  of 
the  trading  expeditions  sent  to  China ;  and  so 
he  learned  English,  Spanish,  and  geography. 
But  he  never  became  a  supercargo.  In  order 
to  be  fully  equipped  for  such  a  position,  he 
determined  to  learn  how  to  take  observations 
at  sea,  and  his  acquaintance  with  observation 
aroused  a  desire  to  study  astronomy.  He  con- 
structed for  himself  a  sextant,  and  by  means  of 
this,  along  with  a  common  clock,  he  determined 
the  longitude  of  Bremen. 

Such  enthusiasm  could  not  be  long  without 
its  reward.  For  several  years  Bessel  remained 
a  clerk,  and  the  hours  devoted  to  study  were 
those  spared  from  sleep.  He  studied  the  works 
of  Bode,  Von  Zach,  Lalande,  and  Laplace,  and 
in  two  years  was  able  to  compute  the  orbits  of 
comets  by  means  of  mathematics.  From  some 
observations  of  Halley's  comet  at  its  appearance 
in  1607,  Bessel  calculated  its  orbit,  and  for- 
warded the  calculation  to  Olbers,  then  the 
greatest  authority  on  cometary  astronomy. 
Olbers  was  delighted  at  this  work,  and  he 
sent  the  results  to  Von  Zach,  who  published 
them.  The  self-taught  young  astronomer  had 
accomplished  a  piece  of  work  which  fifteen  years 
before  had  taxed  the  skill  and  patience  of  the 
French  Academy  of  Sciences. 


THE   STARS.  153 

In  1805,  Harding,  Schroter's  assistant  at 
Lilienthal,  resigned  his  position  for  a  more 
promising  one  at  Gottingen.  Gibers  procured 
for  Bessel  the  offer  of  the  vacant  post,  which  the 
latter  accepted.  At  Lilienthal  Bessel  received 
his  training  as  a  practical  astronomer.  He  re- 
mained in  Schroter's  observatory  until  1809. 
Although  only  twenty -five  years  of  age,  he 
had  become  so  well  known  in  Germany  that  in 
that  year  he  was  appointed  Professor  of  As- 
tronomy in  the  University  of  Konigsberg,  and 
was  chosen  to  superintend  the  erection  of  the 
new  observatory  there.  Within  a  few  years 
a  clerk  in  a  commercial  office  had  worked  his 
way  from  obscurity  to  fame. 

In  1813  the  Konigsberg  Observatory  was 
completed,  and  here  Bessel  worked  for  thirty- 
three  years,  until  his  death,  on  March  17,  1846. 
It  was  only  about  ten  years  before  his  death  that 
he  commenced  his  search  for  the  stellar  parallax, 
with  the  aid  of  Fraunhofer's  magnificent  helio- 
meter.  He  determined  to  make  a  series  of  meas- 
ures on  a  small  double  star  of  the  fifth  mag- 
nitude in  the  constellation  Cygnus,  named  61 
Cygni,  the  large  proper  motion  of  which  led  him 
to  suspect  its  proximity  to  the  Solar  System. 
From  August  1837  to  September  1838  he  made 
observations  on  61  Cygni,  and  he  found  that 


154      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

there  was  an  annual  displacement  which  could 
only  be  attributed  to  parallax.  In  order  to  have 
no  mistake,  he  made  another  year's  observa- 
tions, which  confirmed  the  results  he  arrived  at 
previously,  and  all  doubt  was  removed  by  a 
third  series.  The  resulting  parallax  was  0*3483", 
corresponding  to  a  distance  of  600,000  times 
the  Earth's  distance  from  the  Sun.  This  was 
confirmed  some  years  later  by  C.  A.  F.  Peters 
at  Pulkowa,  and  still  later  by  Otto  Struve,  who 
estimated  the  distance  at  forty  billions  of  miles. 
Meanwhile,  F.  G.  W.  Struve,  working  at  Pul- 
kowa, found  a  parallax  of  0*2613"  for  Vega, 
but  this  was  afterwards  found  to  be  consider- 
ably in  error.  Accordingly,  Struve  does  not 
rank  with  Bessel  as  a  successful  measurer  of  star- 
distance.  But  independently  of  Bessel,  another 
accurate  measure  had  been  made  by  Thomas 
Henderson,  the  great  Scottish  astronomer. 

Born  in  Dundee  in  1798,  Thomas  Henderson 
was  the  youngest  of  five  children  of  a  hard- 
working tradesman.  After  education  in  his 
native  town  he  went  to  Edinburgh,  where  he 
worked  for  years  as  an  advocate's  clerk,  pur- 
suing studies  in  astronomy  as  a  recreation  from 
his  boyhood.  In  1831  he  had  become  so  well 
known,  that  he  received  the  appointment  of 
Astronomer -Royal  at  the  new  observatory  at 


THE   STARS.  155 

the  Cape  of  Good  Hope.  But  the  climate  of 
South  Africa  did  not  suit  his  health,  and  after 
a  year  he  returned  to  Scotland.  In  1834  he 
became  Professor  of  Astronomy  in  the  Uni- 
versity of  Edinburgh,  and  Astronomer-Royal  of 
Scotland,  which  position  he  held  till  his  death 
on  November  23,  1844,  at  the  early  age  of 
forty-six. 

During  a  year's  work  at  the  Cape,  Hender- 
son undertook  a  series  of  observations  on  the 
bright  southern  star,  a  Centauri,  with  a  view 
to  determining  its  parallax.  These  observations 
were  made  in  1832  and  1833,  but  were  not 
reduced  until  Henderson's  return  to  Scotland. 
At  length,  on  January  3,  1839,  he  announced 
to  the  Royal  Astronomical  Society  that  he 
had  succeeded  in  measuring  the  parallax  of 
a  Centauri,  which  he  determined  as  about  one 
second  of  arc,  corresponding  to  a  distance  of 
about  twenty  billions  of  miles.  This  result 
was  confirmed  by  the  observations  of  Thomas 
Maclear  (1794-1879),  his  successor  at  the  Cape, 
and  by  those  of  later  observers,  notably  Sir 
David  Gill,  who  has  reduced  the  parallax  to 
075". 

Other  determinations  of  stellar  parallax,  some 
genuine  and  others  illusory,  were  made  soon  after 
these  successful  observations.  C.  A.  F.  Peters 


156      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

and  Otto  Struve  at  Pulkowa  were  among  the 
most  famous  parallax-hunters  in  the  middle  of  the 
century.  One  of  the  most  successful  searchers 
after  parallax  was  the  German  astronomer  Fried- 
rich  Briinnow  (1821-1891),  who  was  employed 
from  1865  to  1874  as  Astronomer-Royal  of  Ire- 
land. He  determined  the  parallax  of  Vega  as 
0*13",  and  this  was  confirmed  in  1886  by  Hall 
at  Washington  :  while  he  measured  the  parallax 
of  the  star  Groombridge  1830,  which  turned  out 
to  be  0'09".  He  resigned  his  post  in  1874,  and 
his  successor  at  Dublin  Observatory  proved  to 
be  his  successor  also  in  this  branch  of  astronomy. 
Robert  Stawell  Ball,  born  in  Dublin  in  1840, 
was  astronomer  to  Lord  Rosse  in  1865  and  1866, 
and  became  in  1874  Astronomer-Royal  of  Ire- 
land in  succession  to  Briinnow,  a  position  which 
he  filled  until  his  appointment  in  1892  as  Pro- 
fessor of  Astronomy  at  Cambridge,  and  director 
of  the  observatory  there.  During  his  term  of 
office  in  Dublin  he  undertook,  in  1881,  a 
"  sweeping  search  "  for  large  parallaxes,  thereby 
disproving  certain  ideas  as  to  the  proximity  to 
the  Earth  of  red  and  temporary  stars;  while 
he  also  determined  the  parallax  of  the  star 
1618  Groombridge. 

But  the  greatest  extension  of  our  knowledge 
of  stellar  distances,  in  recent  years,  is  due  to  a 


THE    STARS.  15*7 

Scottish  astronomer,  who  has  maintained  the 
reputation  of  Scotland,  and  also  of  the  Cape 
Observatory,  in  this  line  of  research.  Born  in 
Aberdeen  in  1843,  David  Gill  directed  Lord 
Lindsay's  private  observatory  at  Dunecht,  in 
Aberdeenshire,  from  1876  to  1879.  In  the  latter 
year  he  succeeded  Edward  James  Stone  (1831- 
1897)  as  Astronomer-Royal  at  the  Cape,  a  posi- 
tion which  he  has  since  filled  with  conspicuous 
ability.  From  1881  he  has  been  engaged  in  the 
hunt  for  parallax.  In  conjunction  with  William 
Lewis  Elkin  (born  1855),  now  director  of  Yale 
College  Observatory,  he  determined  the  par- 
allaxes of  nine  stars  with  the  aid  of  Lord 
Lindsay's  heliometer.  In  1887,  with  a  larger 
instrument,  he  resumed  the  search,  while  Elkin 
worked  in  co-operation  with  him,  but  at  Yale 
Observatory,  where  he  undertook  the  measure- 
ment of  the  parallaxes  of  northern  stars.  He 
fixed  in  1888  an  average  parallax  for  first- 
magnitude  stars,  which  was  determined  at  0*089", 
corresponding  to  a  journey  for  light  of  thirty- 
six  years. 

Most  of  the  successful  determinations  of  par- 
allax have  been  made  by  the  "  relative  "  method — 
that  is,  the  determination  of  the  displacement 
of  a  star  in  reference  to  another  star,  assumed 
to  be  situated  at  an  immeasurable  distance. 


158      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

The  method  of  absolute  parallax,  on  the  other 
hand, — the  star's  displacement  in  right  ascension 
and  decimation, — has  been  seldom  used,  owing 
to  the  laborious  reduction  which  has  to  be  gone 
through  before  the  result  can  be  reached.  In 
1885,  however,  a  series  of  observations  were 
undertaken  at  Leyden  by  Jacobus  Cornelius 
Kapteyn  (born  1851),  who  determined  by  the 
absolute  method  the  parallaxes  of  fifteen  north- 
ern stars. 

The  first  application  of  photography  to  the 
problem  was  due  to  the  zeal  and  energy  of 
Charles  Pritchard  (1808-1893),  Professor  of 
Astronomy  at  Oxford,  who  determined  by  this 
method  the  parallax  of  61  Cygni,  which  he 
announced  in  1886  to  be  0*438",  in  agreement 
with  Ball's  determination.  He  also  determined 
the  average  parallax  of  second-magnitude  stars, 
which  came  out  as  0'056".  Since  the  time  of 
Pritchard's  observations  various  other  more  or 
less  satisfactory  determinations  of  parallax  have 
been  made.  Few  of  the  parallax  determinations 
are  probably  very  accurate,  and  none  exact ;  but 
an  idea  of  the  difficulty  of  the  measurement  may 
be  gathered  from  the  remark  of  an  American 
writer,  Mr  G.  P.  Serviss,  that  the  displacement 
"  is  about  equal  to  the  apparent  distance  between 
the  heads  of  two  pins,  placed  an  inch  apart,  and 


THE    STARS.  159 

viewed  from  a  distance  of  a  hundred  and  eighty 
miles." 

Closely  allied  to  the  question  of  parallax  is 
the  determination  of  the  exact  positions  of  the 
stars  and  the  formation  of  star-catalogues.  In 
this  branch,  too,  much  is  due  to  the  genius  of 
Bessel.  The  observations  of  Bradley  at  Green- 
wich from  1750  to  1762  were  reduced  by  Bessel 
into  the  form  of  a  catalogue,  which  was  published 
in  1818,  with  the  title  of  'Fundamenta  Astro- 
nomiae.'  During  the  years  1821  to  1823  Bessel 
took  75,011  observations,  by  which  he  brought 
up  the  number  of  accurately  known  stars  to 
50,000.  At  the  same  time  notable  catalogues 
had  been  constructed,  particularly  by  the  Eng- 
lish astronomer,  Francis  Baily  (1774  -  1844), 
and  by  Giovanni  Santini  (1786-1877),  director 
of  the  observatory  at  Padua ;  but  Bessel's  suc- 
cessor in  this  branch  of  research  was  Friedrich 
Wilhelm  August  Argelander  (1799  -  1875).  In 
1821  he  became  assistant  to  Bessel  at  Konigs- 
berg,  in  1823  director  of  the  Observatory  at  Abo, 
in  Finland,  and  in  1837  of  that  at  Bonn.  Here 
he  commenced  in  1852  the  great  *  Bonn  Durch- 
musterung,'  a  catalogue  and  atlas  of  324,198 
stars  visible  in  the  northern  hemisphere.  The 
great  catalogue  was  published  in  1863.  After 
Argelander's  death  it  was  extended  so  as  to 


160      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

include  133,659  stars  in  the  southern  hemisphere, 
by  his  assistant  Eduard  Schonfeld  (1828-1891), 
who  succeeded  him  in  1875  as  director  of  Bonn 
Observatory,  where  he  died  in  1891.  Meanwhile 
a  greater  undertaking  was  commenced  in  1865  by 
the  Astronomische  Gesellschaft.  This  was  the 
co-operation  of  thirteen  observatories  in  Europe 
and  America  for  the  exact  determination  of  the 
places  of  100,000  of  Argelander's  stars. 

In  the  southern  hemisphere,  working  at  Cor- 
dova in  Argentina,  was  the  great  American 
astronomer,  Gould,  whose  c  Uranometria  Argen- 
tina/ published  in  1879,  gives  the  magnitudes 
of  8198  stars,  and  whose  Argentine  General 
Catalogue,  containing  reference  of  32,448  stars, 
was  published  in  1886.  The  late  Radcliffe  ob- 
server, Stone,  published  a  useful  catalogue  in 
1880  from  his  observations  at  the  Cape. 

The  application  of  photography  to  the  work 
of  star  -  charting  dates  from  1882,  when  Gill 
photographed  the  comet  of  1882,  and  was  struck 
with  the  distinctness  of  the  stars  on  the  back- 
ground. For  some  time  he  had  contemplated  the 
extension  of  the  *  Durchmusterung,'  from  the 
point  where  Schonfeld  left  it,  to  the  southern 
pole,  and  the  idea  struck  him  to  utilise  phot- 
ography for  the  purpose.  In  1885,  accordingly, 
Gill  commenced  work,  and  in  four  years  all  the 


THE   STARS.  161 

photographs  were  taken.  The  reduction  of  the 
observations  into  the  form  of  a  catalogue  was 
spontaneously  undertaken  by  the  great  Dutch 
astronomer,  Kapteyn,  who  was  occupied  with  the 
work  for  fourteen  years,  until  in  1900  the  great 
catalogue,  known  as  the  '  Cape  Photographic 
Durchmusterung,'  was  completed.  Half  a  million 
stars  are  represented  on  the  plates  taken  at  the 
Cape. 

By  the  time  the  '  Durchmusterung '  was  com- 
pleted, a  greater  undertaking  was  in  progress. 
Paul  and  Prosper  Henry,  astronomers  at  the 
Paris  Observatory,  when  engaged  in  continuing 
Chacornac's  ecliptic  charts,  applied  photography 
to  their  work,  and  found  it  very  successful. 
Accordingly  Gill's  proposal,  on  June  4,  1886,  of 
an  International  Congress  of  Astronomers,  to 
undertake  a  photographic  survey  of  the  heavens, 
was  enthusiastically  received  by  the  French 
astronomers.  The  Congress  met  at  Paris  in 
1887,  under  the  presidentship  of  Amedee  Mou- 
chez  (1821-1892),  director  of  the  Paris  Observa- 
tory, fifty -six  astronomers  of  all  nations  being 
present.  The  Congress  resolved  to  construct  a 
Photographic  Chart,  and  a  Catalogue,  the  former 
containing  twenty  million  stars,  the  latter  a 
million  and  a  quarter.  Meetings  were  held  in 
Paris  in  1891,  1893,  1896,  and  1900  to  super- 

L 


162      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

intend  the  progress  of  the  work,  which  is  now 
(1906)  well  advanced  towards  completion. 

A  unique  star  catalogue  is  in  course  of  prep- 
aration by  the  Scottish  astronomer,  William 
Peck  (born  1862),  astronomer  to  the  City  of 
Edinburgh  since  1889.  Mr  Peck's  catalogue  is 
accompanied  by  a  series  of  charts.  His  star- 
magnitudes  are  those  of  all  famous  catalogues 
reduced  to  a  standard  scale.  This  catalogue, 
the  result  of  more  than  fifteen  years'  work,  will 
be  an  important  addition  to  the  many  valuable 
works  of  the  kind  already  in  existence,  and  will 
further  increase  the  already  great  reputation  of 
Scotsmen  in  practical  astronomy. 

The  determination  of  the  proper  motions  of 
the  stars  is  another  important  branch  of  practi- 
cal astronomy  in  which  much  progress  has  been 
made  since  the  time  of  Herschel.  Stars  with 
much  larger  proper  motions  than  those  of  the 
first  magnitude  have  been  discovered.  For 
many  years  the  small  sixth -magnitude  star  in 
Ursa  Major,  1830  Groombridge,  was  supposed 
to  be  the  swiftest  of  the  stars,  and  was  named 
by  Newcomb  the  "  runaway  star."  But  in 
1897,  on  examining  the  plates  of  the  'Cape 
Durchmusterung/  Kapteyn  discovered  a  still 
swifter  star  of  the  eighth  magnitude,  situated 
in  the  southern  constellation,  Pictor.  The  rate 


THE   STABS.  163 

of  its  motion  is  over  eight  seconds  of  arc 
yearly ;  and  an  idea  of  the  vast  distance  of  the 
stars  may  be  obtained  by  the  statement  that  it 
would  take  200  years  for  the  star — known  as 
Gould's  Cordova  Zones,  V  Hour  243 — to  move 
over  a  space  equal  to  the  moon's  diameter. 
Important  observations  have  been  made  on  the 
stellar  motions,  and  on  their  bearing  on  the 
structure  of  the  Universe,  by  various  astron- 
omers, including  J.  C.  Kapteyn  and  Ludwig 
Struve  (born  1858),  son  of  Otto  Struve;  but 
these  must  be  reserved  for  a  later  chapter. 

Richard  Anthony  Proctor,  born  at  Chelsea,  in 
London,  in  1837,  graduted  at  Cambridge  in  1860. 
For  the  next  twenty -eight  years  he  earned  his 
living  by  publishing  many  volumes  on  astronomy, 
popular  and  technical,  fifty-seven  having  appeared 
at  the  time  of  his  death,  which  took  place  at 
New  York  on  September  12,  1888.  Notwith- 
standing the  vast  amount  of  work  bestowed  on 
his  books,  his  original  investigations  were  per- 
manent contributions  to  astronomical  science. 
In  1870  he  undertook  to  chart  the  directions 
and  amounts  of  1600  proper  motions.  While 
engaged  on  this  work,  it  occurred  to  him  that 
it  would  be  "  desirable  and  useful  to  search  for 
subordinate  laws  of  motion."  He  found,  from 
the  laborious  process  of  charting,  that  five  of 


164      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

the  seven  stars  of  the  Plough  had  a  motion  in 
common — that  is  to  say,  were  moving  in  the 
same  direction  at  the  same  rate.  This  phe- 
nomenon was  termed  by  Proctor  "  star  -drift." 
He  also  recognised  other  instances  of  star-drift 
in  other  portions  of  the  heavens. 

The  subject  was  soon  afterwards  taken  up 
by  the  French  astronomer,  Camille  Flammarion. 
Born  in  1842  at  Montigny-le-Roi,  in  Haute 
Marne,  Flammarion  was  appointed  assistant 
to  Le  Verrier  in  1858,  but  gave  up  his  post  in 
1862.  Employed  successively  at  the  Bureau  des 
Longitudes,  and  as  editor  of  scientific  papers, 
he  founded  in  1882  his  private  observatory  at 
Juvisy-sur-Orge,  where  he  has  since  continued 
his  investigations. 

Following  up  Proctor's  discovery  of  star-drift, 
Flammarion  drew  charts  of  proper  motions.  He 
demonstrated  the  "  common  proper  motion "  of 
Regulus  and  an  eighth-magnitude  star,  Lalande 
19,749,  from  a  comparison  of  his  measures  in 
1877  with  those  of  Christian  Mayer  a  century 
previously ;  while  he  discovered  many  other 
instances.  His  reflections  on  these  motions,  as 
given  in  his  'Popular  Astronomy/  are  worthy 
of  reproduction :  "  Such  are  the  stupendous 
motions  which  carry  every  sun,  every  system, 
every  world,  all  life,  and  all  destiny  in  all 


THE   STARS.  165 

directions  of  the  infinite  immensity,  through  the 
boundless,  bottomless  abyss ;  in  a  void  for  ever 
open,  ever  yawning,  ever  black,  and  ever  un- 
fathomable ;  during  an  eternity,  without  days, 
without  years,  without  centuries,  or  measures. 
Such  is  the  aspect,  grand,  splendid,  and  sublime, 
of  the  universe  which  flies  through  space  before 
the  dazzled  and  stupefied  gaze  of  the  terrestrial 
astronomer,  born  to-day  to  die  to-morrow,  on  a 
globule  lost  in  the  infinite  night." 

Measures  of  proper  motion  only  enable  us  to 
determine  the  motion  of  stars  across  the  line 
of  sight.  They  do  not  tell  us  whether  the 
star  is  advancing  or  receding.  Here,  however, 
the  spectroscope  comes  to  our  aid  by  means  of 
Doppler's  principle,  described  in  the  chapter  on 
the  Sun.  It  occurred  to  Huggins  that,  by 
observing  the  displacement  of  the  lines  in  the 
spectra  of  the  stars,  he  could  determine  their 
motion  in  the  line  of  sight.  His  first  results 
were  announced  in  1868.  In  the  case  of 
Sirius,  the  displacement  of  the  line  marked  F 
was  believed  to  indicate  a  velocity  of  recess- 
ion of  29  miles  a  second.  Some  time  later 
Huggins  announced  that  Betelgeux,  Eigel, 
Castor,  and  Regulus  were  retreating,  while 
Arcturus,  Pollux,  Vega,  and  Deneb  were  ap- 
proaching. Soon  after  this  successful  work  the 


166      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

subject  was  taken  up  by  Maunder  at  Greenwich 
and  by  Vogel  at  Bothkamp ;  but  the  delicacy 
of  the  measurements  prevented  satisfactory  re- 
sults from  being  reached  through  visual  observa- 
tions, and  accordingly  the  measurements  were 
very  discordant. 

In  1887  H.  C.  Vogel,  working  at  Potsdam 
Astrophysical  Observatory,  applied  photography 
to  the  measurement  of  radial  motion.  Assisted 
by  Julius  Scheiner  (born  1858),  he  determined 
the  radial  motions  of  fifty-one  bright  stars  by 
photographing  the  stellar  spectra  and  measur- 
ing the  photographs.  Vogel  found  10  miles  a 
second  to  be  the  average  velocity  of  stars  in 
the  line  of  sight,  the  tendency  of  the  eye  being 
to  exaggerate  the  displacements.  The  swiftest 
of  the  stars  measured  by  Vogel  proved  to  be 
Aldebaran,  with  a  velocity  of  recession  of  30 
miles  a  second.  Since  1892  the  subject  has 
been  pursued  by  Vogel  himself  with  the  new 
30 -inch  refractor  at  Potsdam,  by  Campbell  at 
the  Lick  Observatory,  B^lopolsky  at  Pulkowa, 
and  other  observers.  Towards  the  end  of  1896 
Campbell  undertook,  with  the  36  -  inch  Lick 
refractor,  a  series  of  measures  on  radial  motion, 
and  many  important  discoveries  were  made. 
These,  however,  must  be  reserved  for  the  chapter 
dealing  with  double  stars. 


THE   STABS.  167 

Herschel's  great  discovery,  from  the  apparent 
motions  of  the  stars,  of  the  movement  of  the 
Solar  System  was  not  accepted  by  the  next 
generation  of  astronomers.  Bessel  declared  in 
1818  that  there  was  absolutely  no  evidence  to 
show  that  the  Sun  was  moving  towards  Hercules. 
Even  Sir  John  Herschel  rejected  his  father's 
views,  although  some  confirmatory  results  had 
been  reached  by  Gauss.  At  length,  in  1837, 
Argelander,  in  a  memorable  paper,  based  on  his 
observations  at  Abo,  in  Finland,  attacked  the 
problem,  and  demonstrated,  from  a  discussion  of 
the  motions  of  390  stars,  quite  independently  of 
Herschel's  work,  that  the  Solar  System  was 
moving  towards  Hercules.  This  was  confirmed 
in  1841  by  Otto  Struve,  in  1847  by  Thomas 
Galloway,  and  in  1859  and  1863  by  Airy  and 
Edwin  Dunkin  (1821-1898),  assistant  at  Green- 
wich Observatory. 

Meanwhile,  in  1886,  Arthur  Auwers,  perma- 
nent Secretary  of  the  Berlin  Academy  of  Sciences, 
completed  the  re-reduction  of  Bradley's  observa- 
tions at  Greenwich,  and  brought  out  300  reliable 
proper  motions,  which  were  utilised  by  Ludwig 
Struve,  whose  investigation  removed  the  solar 
apex  from  Hercules  to  the  neighbouring  con- 
stellation Lyra :  this  slight  change  was  con- 
firmed by  Oscar  Strumpe,  of  Bonn,  and  Lewis 


168      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

Boss  (born  1847),  director  of  the  Observatory 
at  Albany,  New  York.  An  investigation  by 
Newcomb  fully  confirmed  the  previous  results. 
In  1900,  1901,  and  1902  Kapteyn  made  three 
distinct  investigations  on  the  solar  motion,  and 
still  further  confirmed  the  previous  investiga- 
tions. 

These  investigations  are  fully  confirmed  by 
the  application  to  the  question  of  Doppler's 
principle  of  measuring  radial  motion.  The 
spectroscopic  researches  of  Campbell  at  the 
Lick  Observatory  place  the  solar  apex  very 
near  the  position  assigned  to  it  by  Newcomb 
and  Kapteyn.  Campbell  finds  the  solar  velocity 
to  be  about  12  miles  a  second,  and  Kapteyn 
thinks  a  velocity  of  about  11  miles  a  second  is 
"  the  most  probable  value  that  can  at  present 
be  adopted." 


CHAPTER  X. 

THE   LIGHT   OF   THE   STABS. 

"  THAT  a  science  of  stellar  chemistry  should  not 
only  have  become  possible,  but  should  already 
have  made  material  advances,  is  assuredly  one 
of  the  most  amazing  features  in  the  swift  pro- 
gress of  knowledge  our  age  has  witnessed/'  So 
writes  Miss  Agnes  Mary  Clerke,  the  historian 
of  modern  astronomy.  As  long  ago  as  1823 
Fraunhofer  observed  the  spectra  of  the  brighter 
stars,  and  gathered  the  first  hint  of  the  group- 
ing of  the  stars  into  three  classes.  Then,  after 
Fraunhofer's  death,  the  subject  lay  in  abeyance 
for  thirty-seven  years.  At  length,  in  1860,  on 
Kirchhoffs  explanation  of  the  Fraunhofer  lines, 
the  study  of  stellar  spectra  was  inaugurated  at 
Florence  by  Donati,  who  carefully  fixed  the  posi- 
tions of  the  more  important  lines.  His  instru- 
mental means,  however,  were  very  limited,  and 
his  observations  were  not  successful.  In  1862 
Rutherford,  in  New  York,  commenced  the  study 


170      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

of  stellar  spectra,  but  shortly  afterwards  turned 
his  attention  to  astronomical  photography.  The 
actual  founders  of  stellar  spectroscopy  were  the 
eminent  Italian  observer,  Angelo  Secchi,  and  the 
illustrious  Englishman,  William  Huggins. 

Angelo  Secchi  was  born  in  1818  at  Reggio,  in 
the  Emilia.  Educated  in  the  Collegio  Romano, 
he  was  ordained  priest  in  1847,  but  his  love  of 
science,  and  particularly  astronomy,  dates  from 
the  beginning  of  his  career.  In  1849  he  suc- 
ceeded Di  Vico  as  director  of  the  Observatory 
of  the  Collegio  Romano.  This  post  he  filled 
with  conspicuous  ability  for  a  period  of  twenty  - 
nine  years,  until  his  death  on  February  26,  1878. 
To  Secchi  is  due  the  credit  of  the  first  spectro- 
scopic  survey  of  the  heavens.  He  reviewed  the 
spectra  of  4000  stars,  and  classified  them  into 
four  distinct  groups,  which  are  recognised  to 
this  day.  The  first  type  embraces  over  half 
of 'those  which  Secchi  examined.  This  type  is 
represented  by  Sirius,  Vega,  Altair,  and  other 
bluish -white  stars,  and  is  characterised  by  the 
intensity  of  the  hydrogen  lines.  The  second 
type  embraces  the  yellow  stars,  such  as  Capella, 
Arcturus,  Aldebaran,  Pollux,  and  the  Sun  itself, 
and  is  known  as  the  Solar  type.  The  spectra 
of  these  stars  closely  resemble  that  of  the  Sun, 
and  are  distinguished  by  innumerable  lines. 


THE   LIGHT   OF   THE   STARS.  171 

Secchi's  third  type,  or  red  stars,  represented  by 
Betelgeux,  Antares,  and  others,  are  characterised 
by  strong  absorption  bands,  and  the  spectra  have 
been  described  as  "  fluted."  The  third- type  stars 
are  comparatively  scarce  compared  with  the  first 
and  second,  and  the  fourth  is  even  less  numerous. 
The  fourth -type  stars  are  also  red  with  broad 
absorption  lines.  To  Secchi's  four  types  a  fifth 
was  added  in  1867  by  Wolf  and  Rayet  of  Paris 
Observatory — namely,  the  gaseous  stars.  Secchi 
aimed  at  a  comprehensive  survey  of  the  stellar 
spectra,  and  he  accomplished  much  valuable 
work.  He  did  not  devote  his  time  to  analys- 
ing individual  stars.  This  branch  of  study — 
analysis  of  spectra  and  the  determination  of  the 
elements  in  the  stars  —  was  undertaken  by  his 
contemporary,  William  Huggins,  one  of  the 
greatest  astronomers  whom  England  has  ever 
produced. 

Born  in  London  in  1824,  William  Huggins 
commenced  his  astronomical  researches  at  the 
age  of  twenty -eight.  In  1856  he  erected,  at 
Tulse  Hill,  London,  an  observatory  which  he 
equipped  at  great  expense.  He  commenced 
observations  on  the  usual  astronomical  lines, 
taking  times  of  transits  and  making  drawings 
of  the  surfaces  of  the  planets.  But  he  soon 
tired  of  the  routine  of  ordinary  astronomical 


172      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

work,  and  on  the  publication  of  Kirchhoff's 
explanation  of  the  Fraunhofer  lines  in  the  solar 
spectrum,  he  commenced  to  investigate  the 
spectra  of  the  stars.  Having  constructed  a  suit- 
able spectroscope,  he  commenced  observations  in 
1862  in  conjunction  with  his  friend,  William 
Allen  Miller,  Professor  of  Chemistry  in  London. 
He  exhaustively  investigated  the  two  red  stars, 
Betelgeux  and  Aldebaran,  ascertaining  the  exist- 
ence in  the  former  star  of  sodium,  iron,  calcium, 
magnesium,  and  bismuth ;  and  in  the  latter  star 
the  same  elements,  with  the  addition  of  tellurium, 
antimony,  and  mercury. 

In  1863  Huggins  made  an  attempt  to  photo- 
graph the  spectra  of  the  stars,  and,  indeed, 
obtained  prints  of  Sirius  and  Capella,  but  no 
lines  were  visible  in  them.  In  1874  Draper  of 
New  York  obtained  a  photograph  of  the  spectrum 
of  Vega,  showing  four  lines.  Two  years  later 
Huggins  again  attacked  the  problem,  and  secured 
a  photograph  of  the  spectrum  of  Vega,  showing 
seven  strong  lines.  In  1879  he  was  enabled  to 
communicate  satisfactory  results  of  his  work  to 
the  Royal  Society,  and  since  then  he  has  secured 
many  admirable  representations.  ID  1899  the 
monumental  work,  '  An  Atlas  of  Representative 
Stellar  Spectra/  the  joint  work  of  Sir  William 
and  Lady  Huggins,  was  published. 


THE   LIGHT   OF   THE   STARS.  1*73 

In  1874  the  German  Government  established 
at  Potsdam  the  Astrophysical  Observatory,  for 
the  spectroscopic  study  of  the  Sun  and  stars. 
A  position  on  the  staff  was  given  to  Hermann 
Carl  Vogel,  whose  researches  in  astronomical 
spectroscopy  rank  with  those  of  Secchi  and 
Huggins.  Born  in  Leipzig  in  1842,  he  was  from 
1865  to  1869  employed  in  the  Leipzig  Observa- 
tory. Called  to  Bothkamp  as  director  in  1870, 
he  resigned  his  post  in  1874  to  accept  a  position 
on  the  staff  at  Potsdam  Observatory.  In  1882 
he  became  director  of  that  Institution,  which 
position  he  still  retains. 

In  1874  Vogel  revised  Secchi's  classification  of 
stellar  spectra,  and  in  1895  he  further  improved 
on  it.  His  classification  improves  rather  than 
supersedes  the  previous  work  of  Secchi ;  never- 
theless, he  approached  the  question  from  a 
different  standpoint.  Vogel  concluded  in  1874 
that  a  rational  scheme  of  stellar  classification 
"can  only  be  arrived  at  by  proceeding  from  the 
standpoint  that  the  phrase  of  development  of  the 
particular  body  is,  in  general,  mirrored  in  its 
spectrum."  Vogel  divides  Secchi's  first  type  into 
three  classes.  In  the  first  type,  designated  la, — 
represented  by  Sirius  and  Vega, — the  metallic 
lines  are  "  very  faint  and  fine,"  and  the  hydrogen 
lines  conspicuous.  In  16  no  hydrogen  lines  are 


174      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

visible,  while  in  Ic  the  hydrogen  lines  are  bright. 
This  class  includes  the  gaseous  stars.  In  1895, 
after  the  recognition  of  helium  in  the  stars  by 
his  assistant,  Scheiner,  Vogel  separated  the  stars 
of  class  16  from  the  first  type  altogether.  These 
stars  are  sometimes  designated  as  "  Type  O,"  and 
sometimes  as  helium  stars  and  Orion  stars,  as 
the  majority  of  the  stars  in  Orion  are  of  that 
type.  The  solar  type  is  divided  into  two  classes, 
Ila  being  represented  by  the  Sun,  Capella,  and 
other  well-known  stars,  while  116  includes  the 
Wolf-  Rayet  stars.  Secchi's  third  and  fourth 
types  are  both  classified  by  Vogel  as  of  the 
third  type.  These  red  stars  were  specially 
studied  from  1878  to  1884  by  Duner  at  Lund. 
His  results  were  published  in  a  descriptive  cata- 
logue which  appeared  at  Stockholm  in  1884. 
His  researches  related  to  the  spectra  of  352 
stars,  297  of  Secchi's  third  type  and  55  of  his 
fourth.  Duner  is  perhaps  the  greatest  authority 
on  stars  with  banded  spectra. 

Vogel's  classification  of  spectra  is  generally 
adopted  by  astronomers,  although  others  have 
been  proposed  by  Lockyer  and  by  Edward  Charles 
Pickering  (born  1846),  director  of  the  Harvard 
Observatory.  Lockyer's  classification  was  de- 
signed to  fit  in  with  his  "  meteoritic  hypothesis," 
discussed  in  the  chapter  on  Celestial  Evolution. 


THE   LIGHT   OF   THE   STABS.  175 

The  stars  were  divided  by  Lockyer  into  seven 
groups,  according  to  his  views  of  their  tempera- 
ture, rising  through  gaseous  stars,  red  stars  of 
Secchi's  third  type,  and  a  division  of  solar  stars 
to  the  Sirian  type,  and  falling  through  a  second 
division  of  the  solar  type  to  red  stars  of  Secchi's 
fourth  type. 

The  first  spectroscopic  star  -  catalogue  was 
published  in  1883  by  Vogel,  assisted  by  Gustav 
Mutter  (born  1851),  a  son-in-law  of  Sporer.  The 
catalogue  contained  details  of  4051  stars  to  the 
seventh  magnitude,  and  more  than  half  of  these 
proved  to  be  of  Secchi's  first  type.  Vogel's  work 
was  completed  in  different  latitudes  by  Duner 
at  Upsala,  and  by  Nicolaus  Thege  von  Konkoly 
(born  1842)  at  O'Gyalla  in  Hungary. 

The  famous  *  Draper  Catalogue '  ranks  as  the 
greatest  catalogue  of  stellar  spectra.  It  was 
undertaken  at  Harvard  Observatory  by  E.  C. 
Pickering,  in  the  form  of  a  memorial  to  Henry 
Draper,  the  successful  spectroscopist.  Com- 
menced in  1886,  and  published  in  1890,  it  con- 
tains photographs  of  the  spectra  of  no  fewer 
than  10,351  stars,  down  to  the  eighth  magnitude. 
Pickering  subdivided  Secchi's  types  into  various 
classes,  the  first  or  Sirian  into  four  classes,  the 
second  into  eight,  while  the  third  and  fourth 
types  each  constitute  a  separate  class.  Pickering 


176      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

designated  his  classes  by  the  capital  letters  of 
the  alphabet. 

Much  useful  work  has  been  done  also  in  the 
analysis  of  the  various  spectra.  Julius  Scheiner, 
now  " chief  observer"  at  Potsdam  Astrophysical 
Observatory,  has,  since  1890,  done  much  valuable 
work  in  this  direction.  Special  attention  was 
devoted  to  the  spectrum  of  Capella,  490  lines  in 
the  spectrum  of  which  were  measured  by  Scheiner. 
In  his  own  words,  "  he  believes  a  complete  proof 
of  the  absolute  agreement  between  its  spectrum 
and  that  of  the  Sun  to  be  thereby  furnished." 
Other  stars  of  the  Sirian  and  solar  classes  were 
exhaustively  studied  by  Scheiner. 

The  study  of  the  exact  brilliance  of  the  stars 
was  a  branch  of  research  long  neglected,  yet  it 
is  of  much  importance  in  astronomy,  for  it  is  only 
through  exact  measurement  of  stellar  brilliance 
that  stellar  variation  can  be  detected.  Herschel 
commenced  the  study,  which  was  continued  by 
his  son  at  the  Cape,  but  it  is  only  within  the 
last  twenty  years  that  stellar  photometry  has 
become  a  recognised  branch  of  astronomy ;  and 
the  credit  of  this  is  due  to  the  energy  and  zeal 
of  the  great  American  observer,  Edward  Charles 
Pickering. 

Born  in  Boston  in  1846,  Edward  Charles 
Pickering  was  appointed  in  1865  Instructor  of 


THE   LIGHT    OF   THE   STARS.  177 

mathematics  in  the  Lawrence  Scientific  School 
at  Harvard,  after  a  distinguished  university 
career.  In  1876  he  succeeded  Winlock  as 
director  of  the  Harvard  Observatory,  and  in  the 
following  year  he  commenced  his  photometric 
studies.  He  invented  an  instrument  named  the 
meridian  photometer,  with  the  aid  of  which  he 
succeeded  in  determining,  in  the  years  1879  to 
1882,  the  exact  brilliance  of  4260  stars  to  the 
sixth  magnitude  between  the  north  celestial  pole 
and  thirty  degrees  of  south  declination.  At  a 
later  date  he  devised  a  larger  photometer,  with 
which  he  made  over  one  million  observations. 
Pickering  next  extended  his  survey  to  the 
southern  hemisphere,  erecting  the  photometer  on 
the  slope  of  the  Andes,  where  the  Harvard 
auxiliary  station  at  Arequipa  is  now  located, 
and  where  8000  determinations  of  stellar  brilli- 
ance were  made.  Meanwhile  Pritchard,  at  Ox- 
ford, published  in  1885  his  *  Uranometria  Nova 
Oxoniensis,'  with  photometric  determinations  of 
the  brilliance  of  2784  stars  from  the  pole  to 
ten  degrees  of  south  declination.  Both  of 
these  catalogues  were  epoch-making  works,  and 
testify  to  the  enthusiasm  and  perseverance  of 
the  astronomers  who  designed  them. 

The  study  of  stellar   photometry  glides   into 
that  of  stellar  variation.     At  the  beginning  of 

M 


178      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

the  nineteenth  century  the  number  of  known 
variable  stars  was  very  small,  as  a  glance  at  the 
list  given  in  Brewster's  edition  of  Ferguson's 
Astronomy  (1811)  will  show.  Some  remarkable 
investigations  were  due  to  the  English  astron- 
omer, John  Goodricke  (1764-1786),  who  redis- 
covered the  variability  of  the  star  Algol,  and 
accurately  determined  its  period  in  1782.  Good- 
ricke suggested  that  the  regular  variations  in 
the  light  of  Algol  were  due  to  the  partial 
eclipse  of  its  light  by  a  dark  satellite,  a  hypo- 
thesis now  fully  confirmed.  Two  years  later,  in 
1784,  Goodricke  discovered  other  two  variables, 
8  Cephei  and  y8  Lyreo.  He  died  in  1786  at  the 
age  of  twenty-one,  and  thus  variable-star  astron- 
omy was  deprived  of  its  founder. 

The  foundation  of  variable-star  astronomy  as 
an  exact  branch  of  the  science  is  due  to  Arge- 
lander.  In  the  years  1837-1845,  while  residing 
at  Bonn  during  the  erection  of  the  observatory, 
of  which  he  had  been  made  director,  he  erected 
a  temporary  observatory,  and  there  he  carefully 
determined  the  magnitudes  of  all  stars  visible  in 
Central  Europe.  From  this  he  was  led  to  the 
discussion  of  stellar  variation,  to  which  subject 
he  continued  to  give  much  attention.  He  was 
the  first  to  describe  a  method  of  observing 
variable  stars  scientifically  and  accurately, — a 


THE   LIGHT   OF   THE   STABS.  179 

method  consisting  in  estimating  in  "  steps "  or 
" grades"  the  difference  in  brilliance  between  the 
variable,  or  suspected  variable,  and  other  stars 
which  are  selected  for  comparison,  and  which 
are  of  various  degrees  of  brilliance,  so  that  they 
may  be  available  for  comparison  with  the  vari- 
able throughout  its  fluctuations.  Argelander's 
"  steps "  are  tenths  of  a  magnitude,  and  Gore 
describes  the  method  of  observation  as  follows : 
"If  we  call  a  and  b  the  comparison  stars,  and  v 
the  variable,  a  being  brighter  than  b,  and  if  v 
is  judged  to  be  midway  in  brightness  between  a 
and  6,  we  write  a5v5b.  If  v  is  slightly  nearer  to 
6,  we  write  a§v4b.  We  may  also  write  a3v7b, 
or  a7v3b,  the  sum  of  the  steps  being  always 
ten." 

This  method,  described  in  1844,  led  to  many 
discoveries  at  Bonn  in  the  following  twenty 
years  by  Argelander  and  his  assistants  Schmidt 
and  Schonfeld.  At  this  time  Eduard  Heis 
(1806-1877),  at  Minister,  who  also  ranks  as  one 
of  the  founders  of  meteoric  astronomy,  while 
engaged  on  the  construction  of  his  great  atlas, 
attentively  determined  the  change  of  magnitude 
of  stars  visible  to  the  naked  eye ;  and  by  means 
of  the  naked  eye,  the  opera-glass,  and  a  small 
telescope,  he  amassed  a  large  number  of  observa- 
tions. At  the  same  time  two  English  observers, 


180      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

Hind  and  Pogson,  were  making  remarkable  dis- 
coveries which  greatly  increased  the  number  of 
known  variables.  Among  Hind's  discoveries 
were  S  Cancri  of  the  Algol  type ;  while 
Schmidt  discovered  another  of  the  same  class, 
8  Librae,  and  also  the  famous  £  Geminorum. 
While  director  of  the  Observatory  of  Mannheim, 
an  institution  equipped  with  very  antiquated 
instruments,  Schonfeld  devoted  himself  to  the 
study  of  variable  stars,  and  increased  the  num- 
ber of  known  variables  considerably.  In  the 
southern  hemisphere  Gould,  in  South  America, 
did  for  the  observation  of  variable  stars  what 
Argelander  did  in  the  northern. 

In  1874  a  very  important,  although  not  so 
obvious,  service  to  variable-star  astronomy  was 
rendered  by  the  Danish  observer,  Hans  Carl 
Fredrik  Christian  Schjellerup  (1827-1887).  He 
translated  from  Arabic  into  French  the  works 
of  the  Persian  astronomer  of  a  thousand  years 
ago,  Al-Sufi,  and  thus  rendered  his  observations 
available  to  modern  astronomers.  Al-Sufi  was 
a  most  accurate  observer,  and,  by  comparing 
his  catalogue  with  those  of  modern  observers, 
it  can  be  found  whether  stars  have  changed 
in  brilliance  during  the  past  thousand  years. 

The  study  of  variable  stars  has  been  pursued 
in  recent  years  by  many  astronomers,  both  by 


THE   LIGHT    OF   THE   STABS.  181 

means  of  photography  and  by  the  visual  method. 
The  most  important  names  in  the  visual  dis- 
covery of  variables  are  Gustav  Miiller  and  Paul 
Friedrich  Ferdinand  Kempf(bom  1856)  of  Pots- 
dam ;  Alexander  William  Roberts  of  Lovedale, 
South  Africa ;  Seth  Carlo  Chandler  of  Boston  ; 
Nils  Christopher  Duner  at  Upsala ;  and  John 
Ellard  Gore  (born  1845)  in  Dublin. 

The  researches  of  J.  E.  Gore  are  a  brilliant 
example  of  how  much  may  be  done  for  astronomy 
by  means  of  very  moderate  instruments.  Born 
in  1845  at  Athlone,  in  Connaught,  he  went  to 
India  in  1868  as  engineer  on  the  Sirhind  Canal 
in  the  Punjab.  While  in  India  he  erected  his 
small  telescopes  on  brick  pillars,  and  took  ob- 
servations, many  of  them  of  stellar  brilliance. 
In  1879  he  returned  to  Ireland,  and  since  then 
has  devoted  himself  to  astronomy  with  zeal  and 
enthusiasm.  His  discoveries  and  investigations 
of  variables  have  been  made  by  means  of  the 
binocular.  On  December  13,  1885,  he  discovered 
a  remarkable  star  in  Orion,  which  was  at  first 
considered  to  be  temporary,  and  called  "  Nova 
Orionis,"  but  was  afterwards  found  to  be  a  long- 
period  variable  star. 

Recently  photography  has  come  much  to  the 
front  in  the  discovery  of  variable  stars.  Picker- 
ing at  Harvard,  and  Wolf  at  Heidelberg,  have 


182      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

particularly  distinguished  themselves  in  this 
branch,  and  the  number  of  known  variables  is 
now  very  large,  as  every  year  brings  fresh  dis- 
coveries, mostly  by  aid  of  photography.  Many 
of  these  newly-discovered  variables  are  in  star- 
clusters  and  nebulae. 

Pickering  proposed  in  1880  the  following 
classification  of  variable  stars,  which  has  been 
adopted  all  over  the  scientific  world :  Class 
I.,  temporary  star ;  Class  II.,  stars  undergoing 
in  several  months  large  variations,  such  as 
Mira  Ceti  and  U  Orionis ;  Class  III.,  irregular 
variables,  such  as  Betelgeux  and  a  Hercu- 
lis;  Class  IV.,  short -period  variables,  such  as 
S  Cephei,  £  Geminorum,  and  ft  Lyrse ;  Class  V., 
11  Algol  variables,"  which  undergo  variations  last- 
ing but  a  few  hours.  It  is  doubtful  whether 
new  stars  should  be  included  in  a  classification 
of  variables,  although  in  one  case,  at  least,  a 
new  star  was  found  to  be  a  long-period  variable. 
To  these  a  sixth  class  may  now  be  added. 
This  class,  the  detection  of  which  is  mainly  due 
to  the  profound  investigations  of  Gore,  is  com- 
posed of  what  have  been  termed  "secular  vari- 
ables," which  undergo  slow  fluctuations  in 
periods  of  many  years,  and  sometimes  of  cen- 
turies. This  Class  includes  8  Ursse  Majoris, 
Al  -  Fard,  X  Draconis,  6  Serpentis,  e  Pegasi, 


THE   LIGHT   OF   THE   STABS.  183 

83  Ursae  Majoris,  £  Piscis  Australia,  fi  Leonis, 
a  Ophiuchi,  77  Crateris,  and  others.  The  secular 
variations  of  some  of  these  stars  have  been 
detected  by  Gore  himself  during  the  past  thirty 
years,  while  in  other  cases  he  has  detected  them 
by  comparison  of  the  most  important  star-cata- 
logues, from  Hipparchus  and  Al-Sufi  down  to 
our  own  time.  In  some  cases  the  star  in  ques- 
tion seems  to  be  slowly  gaining  in  brilliance, 
in  others  slowly  diminishing. 

Thanks  to  the  application  of  the  spectroscope, 
much  is  now  known  of  the  cause  of  the  light 
changes  in  variable  stars.  Goodricke's  theory  of 
the  variations  of  Algol  was  theoretically  con- 
firmed by  the  researches  of  E.  C.  Pickering  in 
1880.  In  1889  Vogel  proved  beyond  a  doubt 
that  the  variation  in  the  light  of  Algol  is  due  to 
the  partial  eclipse  of  its  light  by  a  dark  satellite. 
It  was  obvious  to  Vogel  that,  as  both  Algol 
and  its  companion  are  in  revolution  round  their 
common  centre  of  gravity,  the  motion  of  Algol 
in  the  line  of  sight  might  be  detected  by  the 
spectroscopic  method  of  observation.  Vogel 
found  that  before  each  eclipse  Algol  was  retreat- 
ing from  our  system,  while  on  recovering  it  gave 
signs  of  rapid  approach,  proving  conclusively  that 
both  the  star  and  its  dark  satellite  were  in 
revolution  round  their  centre  of  gravity, — Algol 


184      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

suffering  partial  eclipse  only  because  the  plane 
of  the  orbit  lies  in  our  line  of  sight.  Algol, 
therefore,  is  not  inherently  a  variable  star,  but 
merely  a  binary.  Following  up  his  researches, 
Vogel,  assuming  that  the  bright  and  dark  stars 
are  of  equal  density,  arrived  at  the  conclusion 
that  Algol  is  a  globe  about  one  and  a  half 
million  miles  in  diameter,  the  satellite  equalling 
the  size  of  the  Sun,  and  the  centres  of  the  stars 
being  separated  by  about  3,230,000  miles.  Thus, 
star- variables  of  the  Algol  type  are  not  variable 
in  the  true  sense  of  the  word.  Even  the  most 
irregular  of  the  Algol  variables  have  been  ex- 
plained. Perhaps  the  most  irregular  was  Y 
Cygni,  discovered  by  Chandler  in  1886.  It  was 
soon  found,  however,  that  the  variations  recurred 
with  great  irregularity :  in  less  than  two  years 
the  phases  differed  by  as  much  as  seven  hours 
from  the  predicted  times.  At  length  the  subject 
was  taken  up  by  Dune'r  at  Upsala.  A  series  of 
observations  made  with  the  14-inch  refractor  at 
Upsala  in  1891  and  1892  convinced  him  in  the 
latter  year  that  two  eclipses  take  place  in  the 
course  of  one  revolution :  one  star  occults  the 
other.  Duner  showed  that  the  intervals  between 
minima  were  thus — 1  day  9  hours;  1  day  15 
hours;  1  day  9  hours,  and  so  on.  Thus,  the 
first,  third,  fifth,  and  seventh  sets  of  minima 


THE   LIGHT   OF   THE    STAKS.  185 

obeyed  a  different  law  from  the  second,  fourth, 
sixth,  and  eighth.  Duner  proved  that  two  stars 
revolve  round  their  centre  of  gravity  in  less 
than  three  days,  alternately  occulting  each  other, 
while  the  ellipticity  of  the  orbit  explains  the 
irregularity  of  the  light  changes.  In  April  1900 
Duner  gave  his  final  conclusions  as  follows : 
"  The  variable  star  Y  Cygni  consists  of  two  stars 
of  equal  size  and  equal  brightness,  which  move 
about  their  common  centre  of  gravity  in  an 
elliptical  orbit,  whose  major  axis  is  eight  times 
the  radius  of  the  stars/'  He  also  stated  the 
exact  period  of  revolution  and  the  eccentricity 
of  the  orbit. 

In  the  case  of  the  short  -  period  variables, 
such  as  ft  Lyrae,  8  Cephei,  £  Geminorum,  and 
T)  Aquilae,  the  variations  do  not  seem  to  be 
due  to  eclipse.  It  was  discovered  by  Professor 
Pickering  that  ft  Lyrse  is  a  spectroscopic 
binary,  but  Vogel  and  Keeler  showed  that 
the  supposed  orbit  is  incompatible  with  the 
eclipse  theory.  Vogel  says :  "  I  am  convinced 
that  ft  Lyrse  represents  a  binary  or  multiple 
system,  the  fundamental  revolutions  of  which  in 
12  days  22  hours  in  some  way  control  the  light 
change."  The  eclipse  theory,  however,  is  still 
maintained  by  Belopolsky,  who  has  framed  a 
hypothesis  according  to  which  the  chief  minimum 


186      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

of  the  star's  light  corresponds  with  the  obscura- 
tion of  the  lesser  star,  the  lesser  minimum  with 
that  of  the  primary,  implying  that  the  primary 
is  much  less  luminous  in  proportion  to  its  light 
than  its  satellite, — a  state  of  affairs  which  Miss 
Clerke  concludes  to  be  improbable. 

The  variable  stars,  8  Cephei  and  T?  Aquilae, 
were  both  found  in  1894  by  Belopolsky  to  be 
binaries ;  but  as  the  times  of  minimum  light 
do  not  correspond  with  those  of  eclipses  in 
the  hypothetical  orbits,  he  concludes  that  the 
variations  cannot  be  explained  on  the  eclipsing 
satellite  theory.  Miss  Clerke  is  inclined  to  the 
theory  that  the  increase  of  luminosity  in  short- 
period  variables  is  due  to  tidal  action,  so  that 
while  the  revolutions  of  the  stars  control  their 
variability,  they  are  inherently  unstable  in  light. 
A  large  number  of  these  stars  are  known,  and 
it  is  a  remarkable  fact  that  the  majority  of  these 
variables  lie  on  or  near  the  Galaxy,  so  that  their 
variations  have  probably  something  to  do  with 
their  vicinity. 

We  now  come  to  the  long-period  variables  of 
which  Mira  Ceti,  x  Cygni,  and  U  Orionis  are 
examples.  Although  varying  in  regular  periods, 
generally  of  about  a  year,  they  are  subject  to 
remarkable  irregularities,  so  that  an  exact  period 
cannot  be  assigned  even  to  Mira  Ceti,  of  which 


THE   LIGHT   OF   THE   STABS.  187 

the  maxima  are  at  times  retarded  and  at  others 
accelerated  with  no  apparent  law.  The  spectro- 
scopic  investigations  of  Campbell  in  1898  have 
shown  that  Mira  Ceti  is  a  solitary  star,  while 
bright  lines  of  hydrogen  appear  in  its  spectrum 
at  maximum,  showing  that  the  variations  are 
due  to  periodical  conflagrations  in  its  atmo- 
spheres. In  many  other  long  -  period  variables 
bright  lines  have  been  observed. 

A  remarkable  fact  regarding  these  stars  is  the 
amount  of  their  light  change.  Mira  Ceti,  for 
instance,  varies  from  the  first  to  the  ninth 
magnitude,  and  U  Orionis  from  the  sixth  to 
the  twelfth.  As  M.  Flammarion  says,  "the 
longer  the  period  the  greater  the  variation." 
Another  remarkable  fact  is  that  their  light 
curves  show  a  curious  resemblance  to  the  curves 
of  the  solar  spots,  only  on  a  vastly  greater  scale, 
which  indicates  that,  relatively,  these  long-period 
variables  are  much  older  than  our  Sun,  the  small 
variations  in  the  light  of  which  are  imperceptible. 
"Here,  if  anywhere,"  says  Miss  Clerke,  "will  be 
found  the  secret  of  stellar  variability." 

To  the  irregular  variables  no  period  can  be 
assigned.  Betelgeux,  in  Orion,  the  variation  of 
which  was  noted  by  Sir  John  Herschel  in  1840, 
is  a  typically  irregular  variable.  But  the  most 
extraordinary  of  all  variables  is  77  Argus,  in 


188      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

the  southern  hemisphere,  which  is  probably  a 
connecting  link  between  variable  and  temporary 
stars.  The  traveller  Burchell,  from  1811  to  1815, 
observed  the  star  as  of  the  second  magnitude, 
but  in  1827  he  noted  it  to  be  of  the  first 
magnitude.  In  the  following  year  it  fell  to  the 
second  magnitude.  In  1834  Sir  John  Herschel 
noted  the  star  to  be  between  the  first  and  second 
magnitude,  and  in  1838  it  rose  to  the  first,  being 
equal  to  a  Centauri.  After  a  decline,  it  be- 
came in  1843  equal  to  Canopus,  and  not  much 
inferior  to  Sirius.  Then  it  began  to  fade,  and 
in  1868  it  was  only  of  the  sixth  magnitude.  In 
1899  Innes  estimated  it  as  771.  Eudolf  Wolf 
suggested  a  period  of  46  years,  and  Loomis 
67  years ;  but  astronomers  generally  agree  with 
Schonfeld  that  the  star  has  no  regular  period. 

The  first  temporary  star  of  the  nineteenth 
century  was  discovered  by  Hind,  in  London, 
April  28,  1848.  It  was  of  the  fifth  magnitude 
at  maximum,  and  soon  after  began  to  fade, 
falling  to  the  tenth  magnitude.  In  1860  a  new 
star  appeared  in  the  cluster  Messier  80  in  Scorpio, 
and  was  discovered  by  Auwers  at  Konigsberg. 
It  reached  only  the  seventh  magnitude. 

On  the  night  of  May  12,  1866,  a  new  star 
of  the  second  magnitude  blazed  out  in  the  con- 
stellation Corona  Borealis.  It  was  first  observed 


THE   LIGHT   OF   THE   STABS.  189 

at  Tuam,  in  Ireland,  by  the  Irish  astronomer, 
John  Birmingham.  Four  hours  earlier  Schmidt 
had  been  observing  that  part  of  the  heavens, 
and  it  was  not  then  visible.  Birmingham  at 
once  communicated  the  discovery  to  Huggins, 
at  Tulse  Hill,  who  had  commenced  his  spectro- 
scopic  observations.  On  May  16  Huggins  ob- 
served its  spectrum.  In  the  words  of  Miss 
Clerke,  "  The  star  showed  what  was  described 
as  a  double  spectrum.  To  the  dusky  flutings 
of  Secchi's  third  type,  four  brilliant  rays  were 
added.  The  chief  of  these  agreed  in  position 
with  lines  of  hydrogen ;  so  that  the  immediate 
cause  of  the  outburst  was  plainly  perceived  to 
have  been  the  eruption,  or  ignition,  of  vast 
masses  of  that  subtle  kind  of  matter."  Nine 
days  after  the  appearance  of  the  new  star  it 
was  invisible  to  the  naked  eye,  and  afterwards 
fell  to  the  tenth  magnitude.  In  1856  Schonfeld 
had  observed  it  at  Bonn  as  a  telescopic  star, 
so  that  it  was  not  a  "new  star"  in  the  true 
sense  of  the  word. 

The  next  temporary  star  observed  was  dis- 
covered by  Schmidt,  at  Athens,  November  24, 
1876.  It  was  of  the  third  magnitude,  situated 
in  the  constellation  Cygnus.  On  December  2 
its  spectrum  was  examined  at  Paris  by  Alfred 
Cornu  (1841-1902),  and  some  days  later  at 


190      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

Potsdam  by  Vogel  and  Lohse.  It  was  closely 
similar  to  that  of  the  new  star  of  1866,  bright 
lines  of  hydrogen  and  other  elements  standing 
out  in  front  of  an  "absorption"  spectrum.  By 
the  end  of  1876  the  star  was  of  the  seventh 
magnitude.  On  September  2,  1877,  Nova  Cygni 
was  observed  at  Dunecht,  and  its  spectrum  was 
found  to  have  been  transformed  into  that  of  a 
planetary  nebula.  Three  years  later,  however, 
the  ordinary  stellar  spectrum  reappeared. 

A  new  star  appeared  in  the  centre  of  the 
great  nebula  in  Andromeda  in  August  1885. 
The  first  announcement  of  the  discovery  was  by 
Karl  Ernst  Albrecht  Hartwig  (born  1851),  who 
observed  the  new  star  on  August  31 ;  but  it 
had  been  previously  seen  by  several  other  ob- 
servers. On  September  1  it  was  of  the  seventh 
magnitude,  and  by  March  of  the  following  year 
had  fallen  to  the  sixteenth.  Observed  by  Vogel, 
Young,  and  Hasselberg,  the  new  star  gave  a 
continuous  spectrum,  but  Huggins  and  Copeland 
succeeded  in  discerning  bright  lines.  Hall,  at 
Washington,  undertook  a  series  of  measures  to 
detect  the  parallax  of  Nova  Andromedse,  but 
his  efforts  were  unsuccessful. 

The  discovery  of  the  next  temporary  star  was 
announced  February  1,  1892,  by  the  Rev.  Thomas 


THE   LIGHT   OF   THE   STARS.  191 

D.  Anderson,  a  Scottish  amateur  astronomer,  in 
a  post-card  to  the  Astronomer-Royal  of  Scotland. 
The  star  was  situated  in  the  constellation  Auriga. 
An  examination  of  photographs,  taken  at  Harvard 
Observatory,  showed  that  the  new  star  had  ap- 
peared December  10,  1891,  and  had  risen  to 
a  maximum  of  the  fourth  magnitude  ten  days 
later.  On  a  photograph  taken  by  Max  Wolf 
on  December  8  the  new  star  was  not  visible. 
After  Anderson's  visual  discovery,  the  spectrum 
of  the  new  star  was  studied  by  Copeland, 
Huggins,  Lockyer,  Vogel,  Campbell,  and  others. 
Bright  hydrogen  lines  were  visible  in  the  spec- 
trum, which  appeared  to  be  actually  double, 
giving  support  to  the  theory  that  the  outburst 
was  the  result  of  a  collision  between  two  dark 
bodies ;  and  this  was  confirmed  by  the  measure- 
ments of  radial  motion  by  the  Potsdam  astron- 
omers. 

After  March  9,  1892,  the  new  star  steadily 
faded,  falling  to  the  sixteenth  magnitude  on 
April  26.  But  on  August  17  Edward  Singelton 
Holden  (born  1846),  director  of  the  Lick  Observ- 
atory, and  his  assistants,  Schaeberle  and  Camp- 
bell, found  it  of  the  tenth  magnitude.  On 
August  19  Barnard  found  it  transformed  into  a 
planetary  nebula :  while  various  spectroscopic 


192      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

observations  of  the  revived  Nova  revealed  the 
nebular  lines.  By  the  end  of  1894  the  new 
star  had  faded  to  the  eleventh  magnitude,  and 
early  in  1901  was  observed  as  a  minute  nebula. 

After  1892  several  new  stars  appeared,  and 
were  detected  on  photographic  plates  by  Mrs 
Fleming  (born  1857),  of  Harvard  Observatory. 
The  first  of  these,  in  the  southern  constellation 
Norma,  was  discovered  in  1893  by  its  peculiar 
spectrum  on  a  Draper  spectrographic  plate  taken 
at  Harvard.  But  the  new  star  rose  only  to  the 
seventh  magnitude.  Other  new  stars  were  dis- 
covered in  Carina  (Argo)  in  1895,  in  Cen- 
taurus  in  1895,  in  Sagittarius  in  1898,  and  in 
Aquila  in  1900.  Nova  Sagittarii  was,  at  its 
brightest,  fully  equal  to  Nova  Aurigae,  and  was 
plainly  visible  to  the  naked  eye,  but  was  never 
observed  visually. 

A  temporary  star,  appropriately  designated 
"  the  new  star  of  the  new  century,"  blazed  out 
in  Perseus  on  the  night  of  February  21,  1901. 
It  was  discovered  independently  by  several  ob- 
servers :  on  February  21,  by  Borisiak,  a  student 
at  Kiev,  in  Russia ;  on  the  following  morning, 
by  Anderson  in  Edinburgh  ;  and  on  the  next 
evening,  by  Gore  at  Dublin,  Nordvig  in  Den- 
mark, Grimmler  at  Erlangen,  and  other  ob- 
servers. When  first  seen  by  Anderson,  it  was 


THE   LIGHT   OF   THE   STARS.  193 

equal  to  Algol,  of  the  second  magnitude.  A 
photograph  by  Williams  at  Brighton  showed 
that  it  must  have  been  fainter  than  the  twelfth 
magnitude  on  February  20.  On  the  evening 
of  February  23  the  star  was  brighter  than 
Capella,  and  was  then  the  brightest  star  in  the 
northern  hemisphere.  On  February  25  it  fell  to 
the  first  magnitude ;  on  March  1  to  the  second, 
and  on  March  6  to  the  third.  During  the  spring 
and  summer  the  light  fluctuated  considerably, 
but  in  September  and  October  faded  to  the 
6*7  magnitude.  In  March  1902  it  was  of  the 
eighth  magnitude,  and  in  July  1903  of  the 
twelfth. 

The  spectrum  of  Nova  Persei  was  found  by 
Pickering  to  be  of  the  Orion  type  on  February 
22  and  23.  On  February  24  the  spectrum  had 
become  one  of  the  bright  and  dark  lines,  and 
the  hydrogen  lines  indicated  a  velocity  of  700 
to  1000  miles  a  second.  Measures  of  the  sodium 
and  calcium  lines,  by  Campbell  and  others,  in- 
dicated a  velocity  of  only  three  miles  a  second, 
so  that  the  displacements  of  the  hydrogen  lines 
may  have  been  due  to  an  outburst  of  hydrogen 
in  the  star.  The  spectrum  was  carefully  studied 
during  the  spring  and  summer  by  Pickering, 
Lockyer,  Huggins,  Vogel,  and  others.  On  June 
25  Pickering  reported  that  the  spectrum  was 

N 


194      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

slowly  changing  into  that  of  a  gaseous  nebula. 
In  August  and  September  1901  the  nebular 
spectrum  became  more  apparent. 

In  August  1901  Wolf  at  Heidelberg  discovered 
a  faint  trace  of  nebula  near  the  nova.  On  Sep- 
tember 20  this  nebula  was  photographed  by 
George  Ritchey  at  the  Yerkes  Observatory,  and 
was  seen  to  be  of  a  spiral  form.  This  was  con- 
firmed by  Perrine,  who  also  found,  from  plates 
taken  in  November,  that  the  nebula  was  moving 
at  the  rate  of  eleven  minutes  of  arc  a  year. 
This  extraordinary  velocity  was  exceedingly 
puzzling  to  astronomers,  and  at  length  Kapteyn 
suggested  that  the  nebula  shone  only  by  re- 
flected light  from  the  new  star,  and  that  the 
apparent  motion  was  an  illusion  caused  by  the 
flare  of  the  explosion  travelling  out  from  the 
nova. 

On  March  16,  1903,  Herbert  Hall  Turner 
(born  1861),  Professor  of  Astronomy  at  Oxford, 
discovered  a  new  star  of  the  seventh  magnitude 
in  the  constellation  Gemini,  from  an  examination 
of  photographic  plates.  Photographs  taken  at 
Harvard  showed  that  on  March  1  it  must  have 
been  fainter  than  the  twelfth  magnitude,  while 
five  days  later  it  was  of  the  fifth.  In  August 
1903  Pickering  found  its  spectrum  nebular.  In 
August  1905  another  small  nova  was  found  by 


THE   LIGHT   OF   THE   STABS.  195 

Mrs  Fleming  on  the  Harvard  photographs,  situ- 
ated in  Aquila. 

Many  theories  have  been  advanced  to  account 
for  temporary  stars.  Flammarion  has  shown 
that  a  body  surrounded  by  a  hydrogen  atmo- 
sphere, on  grazing  a  dark  body  enveloped  in 
oxygen,  would  produce  a  tremendous  explosion. 
In  1892  Huggins  suggested  that  the  outburst 
of  Nova  Aurigae  was  due  to  the  near  approach 
of  two  bodies  with  large  velocities,  disturbances 
of  a  tidal  nature  resulting  and  producing  enor- 
mous outbursts.  Vogel  suggested  that  the  new 
star  was  due  to  the  encounter  of  a  dark  star 
with  a  worn  -  out  system  of  planets ;  while 
Lockyer  believes  all  new  stars  to  be  due  to 
the  collision  of  swarms  of  meteors.  Perhaps 
the  most  probable  theory  is  that  of  Seeliger, 
which  attributes  these  outbursts  to  the  move- 
ment of  a  dark  body  through  nebulous  matter, 
which  is  extensively  diffused  throughout  space. 
This  theory  explains  the  changes  in  the  spectra 
as  well  as  the  revivals  of  brightness  which 
characterised  Nova  Aurigse  and  the  fluctations 
of  Nova  Persei.  In  a  paper  read  to  the  Royal 
Society  of  Edinburgh  in  November  1904,  the 
German  astronomer,  Jacobus  Halm,  of  the  Royal 
Observatory,  Edinburgh,  extended  and  developed 
Seeliger's  theory,  showing  also  that  the  necessary 


196      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

consequence  of  such  an  encounter  as  the  theory 
assumes  is  the  formation  of  an  atmosphere  of 
incandescent  gases,  followed  by  that  of  a  re- 
volving ring  of  nebulous  matter.  In  the  hands 
of  Halm,  therefore,  Seeliger's  theory  leads  to 
the  nebular  hypothesis  as  advanced  by  Laplace 
and  Herschel. 


CHAPTER    XL 

STELLAR   SYSTEMS   AND   NEBULJE. 

THE  study  of  double  stars,  commenced  by 
Herschel,  was  taken  up  after  his  death  by 
several  of  the  foremost  astronomers,  and  has 
since  been  pursued  by  quite  a  number  of  ob- 
servers and  computers.  Herschel's  immediate 
successor  in  the  study  of  double  stars  was  his 
son,  who  ranks  only  second  to  his  father  as  a 
student  of  stellar  systems.  Born  at  Slough  on 
March  7,  1792,  John  Frederick  William  Herschel 
passed  his  childhood  "  within  the  shadow  of 
the  great  telescope."  Although  his  early  life 
was  spent  with  his  father  and  aunt,  astronomy 
does  not  appear  to  have  taken  up  his  attention 
as  a  boy.  Chemistry,  however,  always  inter- 
ested him,  and,  as  his  aunt  recorded,  even  while 
a  child  he  was  fond  of  making  experiments. 
He  was  educated  at  Hitcham,  and  afterwards 
at  Eton.  He  was  delicate,  however,  so  his 
mother  removed  him  from  school,  and  he  was 


198      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

trained  at  Slough  by  Mr  Rogers,  a  Scot- 
tish mathematician.  At  the  age  of  seventeen 
Herschel  entered  the  University  of  Cambridge, 
and  Caroline  Herschel,  who  was  exceedingly 
proud  of  him,  recorded  in  her  memoirs  that  he 
gained  all  the  first  prizes  without  exception. 
He  left  the  University  in  1813. 

John  Herschel  did  not  turn  his  attention  to 
astronomy  until  he  had  attained  the  age  of 
twenty-four.  In  a  letter  to  a  friend,  September 
10,  1816,  he  said,  "I  am  going,  under  my 
father's  directions,  to  take  up  star-gazing."  It 
was  only  reverence  for  his  father  that  made  him 
turn  to  astronomy,  and  he  gave  up  the  science 
he  loved  most — chemistry.  But  his  unselfishness 
received  its  reward.  In  1820  John  Herschel 
constructed  his  first  reflector  under  his  father's 
guidance.  Four  years  previously  he  had  begun 
to  observe  double  stars,  which  had  been  for  long 
studied  by  his  father,  who  discovered  their 
revolutions.  These  observations  were  continued 
from  1821  to  1823  at  the  Observatory  of  Sir 
James  South  (1786-1867).  John  Herschel  and 
South  measured  380  of  the  elder  Herschel's 
double  stars.  These  investigations  gained  for 
Herschel  and  South  the  Lalande  Prize  of  the 
French  Academy  and  the  Gold  Medal  of  the 
Royal  Astronomical  Society. 


STELLAR   SYSTEMS    AND   NEBULA.  199 

When  his  mother  died  Sir  John  Herschel 
decided  to  sail  to  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope  to 
make  an  investigation  of  the  stars  of  the 
southern  hemisphere,  which  until  then  had  been 
much  neglected.  He  was  offered  a  free  passage 
in  a  ship  of  war,  but  declined.  In  November 
1833  he  left  England,  taking  with  him  his  great 
telescopes.  In  two  months  he  arrived  at  Cape 
Town,  and  erected  his  astronomical  instruments 
at  Feldhausen,  a  short  distance  off.  In  October 
1835  he  informed  his  aunt  that  he  had  almost 
completed  his  survey  of  the  southern  hemisphere. 
During  his  "sweeps"  of  the  heavens  he  dis- 
covered 1202  double  stars,  and  1708  nebulae 
and  star-clusters.  In  1838  he  returned  to  Eng- 
land, and  devoted  the  remainder  of  his  life  to 
the  publication  of  his  results,  as  well  as  to 
other  branches  of  science.  He  died  at  Colling- 
wood,  in  Kent,  on  May  11,  1871,  at  the  age  of 
seventy-nine. 

John  Herschel's  favourite  objects  of  study 
were  double  stars,  of  which  he  discovered  3347 
in  the  northern  hemisphere,  and  2102  in  the 
southern.  He  also  computed  several  stellar 
orbits ;  but  the  first  calculation  of  a  stellar 
orbit  was  made  by  the  French  astronomer  Felix 
Savary  (1797-1841),  who  computed  the  orbit  of 
f  Ursae  Majoris,  and  found  the  period  to  be 


200      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

about  sixty  years.  Contemporary  with  John 
Herschel  was  his  great  rival  in  double  -  star 
astronomy,  Friedrich  Georg  Wilhelm  Struve. 
Born  at  Altona  in  1793,  Struve  took  his  degree 
in  1811  at  the  Russian  University  of  Dorpat. 
In  1813  he  became  director  of  the  Dorpat 
Observatory,  and  was  in  1839  promoted  to 
Pulkowa,  as  director  of  the  great  Observatory 
there,  remaining  at  its  head  until  within  three 
years  of  his  death,  on  November  23,  1864. 
Struve's  first  recorded  observation  was  on  the 
double  star  Castor.  In  1819  he  commenced  to 
measure  the  position-angles  of  double  stars,  of 
which  he  published  a  catalogue  of  795.  In 
1825  he  commenced  a  review  of  the  heavens 
down  to  fifteen  degrees  south,  and  thus  dis- 
covered 2200  previously  unknown  objects.  The 
results  were  published  in  Struve's  '  Mensurae 
Merometricae,'  which  appeared  in  1836,  giving 
the  places,  distances,  colours,  position  -  angles, 
and  relative  brilliance  of  3112  double  and  mul- 
tiple stars. 

Struve's  successor  in  this  branch  of  astronomy 
was  his  son,  Otto  Wilhelm  von  Struve,  born  in 
1819  at  Dorpat,  who  became  in  1837  assistant 
to  his  father,  and  in  1861  succeeded  him  as 
director  of  the  Pulkowa  Observatory.  In  1890 
he  retired  from  this  post,  settling  in  Germany, 


STELLAR   SYSTEMS   AND   NEBULJS.  201 

at  Carlsruhe,  where,  on  April  14,  1905,  he  died 
in  his  eighty-sixth  year.  Otto  Struve  detected 
500  double  stars,  among  them  y  Andromedse, 
discovered  in  1842,  and  8  Equulei,  discovered 
in  1852,  within  a  period  of  between  five  and 
eleven  years. 

Various  other  astronomers  have  devoted  them- 
selves to  the  observation  of  double  stars,  among 
them  Ercole  DembowsJci  (1815-1881),  of  Milan; 
Karl  Hermann  Struve  (born  1854),  son  of 
Otto  Struve;  William  Doberck  (born  1845); 
William  J.  Hussey  (born  1864),  now  director  of 
the  Detroit  Observatory;  Camille  Flammarion; 
N.  C.  Duner;  G.  V.  Schiaparelli ;  Thomas 
Jefferson  Jackson  See  (born  1866).  But  the 
greatest  living  discoverer  is  Sherburne  Wesley 
Burnham  (born  1838),  now  employed  at  the 
Yerkes  Observatory,  in  Wisconsin.  Born  in 
1838  at  Thetford,  Vermont,  he  commenced  his 
career  as  a  shorthand  reporter,  studying  astron- 
omy in  his  leisure  hours.  With  a  small  6-inch 
refractor,  mounted  in  a  home-made  observ- 
atory, Burnham  commenced  in  1871  his  dis- 
coveries of  double  stars,  which  soon  attracted 
the  attention  of  noted  astronomers,  who  per- 
mitted him  to  use  larger  telescopes,  with  which 
he  continued  his  researches.  His  first  official 
appointment  was  in  1888,  when  he  became 


202      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

chief  assistant  at  the  Lick  Observatory,  which 
position  he  resigned  in  1892.  Some  years  later 
he  became  astronomer  in  the  Yerkes  Observa- 
tory. Altogether  he  has  discovered  1308  double 
stars,  with  telescopes  ranging  from  a  6  -  inch 
refractor  to  the  gigantic  40 -inch  of  the  Yerkes 
Observatory. 

The  computation  of  double-star  orbits  has  been 
undertaken  by  various  astronomers,  among  them 
Madler,  Klinkerfues,  Duner,  Flammarion,  Seeliger, 
See,  Gore,  Burnham,  Robert  Grant  Aitken  (born 
1864)  of  the  Lick  Observatory,  and  Giovanni 
Celoria  (born  1842),  who  was,  from  1866  to 
1900,  assistant  in  the  Brera  Observatory  of 
Milan,  and  since  1900  director  of  that  institu- 
tion. On  June  9,  1890,  Gore  presented  to  the 
Royal  Irish  Academy  a  catalogue  of  computed 
binaries  containing  reference  to  fifty-nine  stars. 

In  1844  Bessel  discovered  a  remarkable  irreg- 
ularity in  the  proper  motion  of  Sirius.  He 
ascribed  this  to  the  gravitational  influence  of 
some  obscure  body,  probably  a  large  satellite. 
In  1857  Peters  calculated  an  orbit  for  the 
supposed  satellite  with  a  period  of  50  years. 
In  1861  an  orbit  was  computed  by  Truman 
Henry  Safford  (1836-1901),  which  indicated  the 
position  of  the  satellite.  Close  to  this  position 
it  was  accidentally  discovered  by  Alvan  Clark 


STELLAR   SYSTEMS   AND   NEBULAE.  203 

(1832-1897),  the  famous  American  optician. 
The  period  of  the  star  seems  to  be  about  50 
years.  In  1844  Bessel  noticed  irregularities  in 
the  proper  motion  of  Procyon,  and  put  forward 
the  idea  of  a  disturbing  satellite,  as  in  the  case 
of  Sirius.  This  was  confirmed  by  Madler,  and 
in  1874  an  orbit  was  computed  by  Auwers,  who 
found  a  period  of  40  years.  In  1896  the 
satellite  was  found  by  Schaeberle  with  the 
36-inch  refractor  of  the  Lick  Observatory.  A 
period  of  40  years  was  found  by  See,  in 
agreement  with  the  hypothetical  orbit. 

In  putting  forward  these  theories  as  to  in- 
visible stellar  satellites,  Bessel  remarked  that 
"light  is  no  real  property  of  mass,"  and  that 
the  existence  of  countless  visible  stars  is  nothing 
against  the  existence  of  countless  invisible  and 
dark  ones.  In  this  he  laid  the  foundation  of 
the  branch  of  science  termed  by  Madler  the 
"  Astronomy  of  the  invisible."  In  recent  years 
the  astronomy  of  the  invisible  has  become 
a  recognised  branch  of  astronomical  research, 
through  the  application  and  interpretation  of 
Doppler's  principle  in  spectroscopic  observations. 
In  the  course  of  photographing  the  stellar 
spectra  for  the  Draper  Catalogue,  E.  C.  Pick- 
ering photographed  the  spectrum  of  Mizar 
(£  Ursae  Majoris)  in  1887  and  again  in  1889.  On 


204      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

some  of  these  photographs  the  line  K  was  seen 
double,  while  on  others  it  was  seen  under  its 
normal  aspect.  This  doubling  of  the  lines 
indicated  that  the  star  which  we  see  as  single 
is  in  reality  composed  of  two  bodies  in  revolu- 
tion round  their  centre  of  gravity,  so  close 
together  that  even  the  largest  telescopes  cannot 
divide  them.  Pickering  assigned  a  period  of 
104  days,  but  in  1901  Vogel  diminished  this 
to  20  days.  In  the  same  year  the  star 
ft  Aurigae  was  similarly  found  to  be  double ; 
and  in  1890  Vogel,  from  photographs  taken 
at  Potsdam,  independently  inaugurated  the 
discovery  of  spectroscopic  binaries.  In  the 
spectrum  of  Spica  he  discovered  the  spectral 
lines  to  be,  not  doubled,  but  periodically  dis- 
placed, indicating  the  existence  of  a  dark  or 
nearly  dark  companion,  both  stars  revolving 
round  their  centre  of  gravity.  Spica  was  seen 
to  belong  to  the  same  class  as  Algol,  only  that 
in  the  case  of  Algol  the  plane  of  the  satellite's 
orbit  passes  through  the  Earth  and  eclipses  the 
star,  while  in  the  case  of  Spica  the  orbit  is 
inclined,  and  the  star  is  constant  in  light. 

The  line  of  research  commenced  by  Vogel  and 
Pickering  was  soon  followed  up  by  these  investi- 
gators, as  well  as  by  Belopolsky  at  Pulkowa, 
Campbell  at  the  Lick  Observatory,  Slipher  at 


STELLAR   SYSTEMS   AND    NEBULAE.  205 

the  Lowell  Observatory,  and  by  Edwin  Brant 
Frost  (born  1866),  now  director  of  the  Yerkes 
Observatory,  and  his  assistant,  Walter  Adams. 
In  1894  Belopolsky  discovered  the  duplicity  of 
several  variable  stars,  and  in  1896  that  of  Castor, 
in  Gemini.  Late  in  1896  Campbell  undertook  a 
systematic  investigation  of  radial  motions,  and 
has  since  discovered  about  sixty  spectroscopic 
binaries, — among  them,  in  1899,  the  Pole  Star, 
and  in  1900  Capella.  The  latter  discovery  was 
made  independently  by  Hugh  Frank  Newall 
(born  1857)  at  Cambridge,  in  England.  It  was 
found  by  Campbell  that  the  revolution  of  the 
stars  round  their  centre  of  gravity  is  performed 
in  104  days ;  and  it  soon  became  apparent 
that,  owing  to  the  large  size  of  the  orbit,  the 
duplicity  of  Capella  might  be  observed  tele- 
scopically.  At  Greenwich  the  star  was  seen 
to  be  elongated,  but  at  the  Lick  Observatory 
it  was  seen  persistently  single. 

Campbell  finds  that  of  285  stars  observed  by 
him,  more  than  one  in  nine  is  a  spectroscopic 
binary.  He  concludes  that  at  least  one  star  in 
five  or  six  will  be  found  to  be  spectroscopically 
double,  and  considers  that  "  the  proven  existence 
of  so  large  a  number  of  stellar  systems,  differing 
so  widely  in  structure  from  the  Solar  System, 
gives  rise  to  a  suspicion  at  least  that  our 


206      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

system  is  not  of  the  prevailing  type  of  stellar 
systems." 

The  study  of  triple  and  multiple  stars  is  of 
deep  interest,  but  the  orbits  of  these  objects 
cannot  be  said  to  be  fully  investigated  by  any 
means.  The  first  application  of  the  problem  of 
three  bodies  to  stellar  astronomy  was  made  by 
Seeliger  in  1889.  His  researches,  relating  to 
the  famous  star,  £  Cancri,  disclosed  the  exist- 
ence of  three  stars  revolving  round  a  dark  body, 
apparently  the  most  massive  in  the  system. 
The  system  of  £  Cancri,  at  least,  seems  to  be 
modelled  on  the  Ptolemaic  design. 

In  the  study  of  star-clusters  and  nebulae,  as 
in  the  investigation  of  double  stars,  Herschel's 
successor  was  his  son.  His  observations,  both  in 
England  and  at  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope,  resulted 
in  a  large  number  of  new  discoveries,  and  the 
results  of  his  studies  in  this  direction  were 
published  in  1864  in  his  catalogue  of  all  known 
clusters  and  nebulae,  amounting  to  5079.  This 
catalogue  was  enlarged  and  revised  in  1888  by 
John  Louis  Emil  Dreyer  (born  1852),  a  Danish 
astronomer,  but  director  of  the  Observatory  at 
Armagh,  in  Ireland ;  and  the  same  observer 
published  from  1888  to  1894  a  supplementary 
list,  bringing  the  number  of  known  clusters  and 
nebulae  to  about  10,000. 


STELLAR   SYSTEMS   AND   NEBULJE.  207 

In  the  early  part  of  his  career,  John  Herschel 
held  firmly  to  the  views  of  his  father  of  the 
difference  between  star-clusters  and  nebulae,  con- 
sidering the  latter  to  be  composed  of  "shining 
fluid."  But  he  fell  off  from  this  view  with  the 
resolution  into  stars  of  many  irresolvable  nebulae. 
In  1845  William  Parsons,  third  Earl  of  Rosse 
(1800-1867),  erected  at  Birr  Castle,  in  Ireland, 
his  great  6 -foot  reflector,  which  still  surpasses 
all  other  telescopes  in  point  of  size.  With  this 
instrument  Lord  Rosse  believed  himself  to  have 
resolved  the  Crab  nebula  in  Taurus  and  the 
Nebula  in  Orion,  which  was  also  said  to  have 
been  resolved  by  Bond  with  the  15 -inch  refractor 
at  Harvard;  and  in  1854  Olmsted  declared  the 
"resolution"  of  these  nebulae  to  be  the  signal 
for  the  renunciation  of  Herschel's  nebular  theory. 
Most  astronomers  fell  in  with  the  view  that  all 
the  nebulae  were  distant  clusters,  which  would 
eventually  be  resolved  into  stars,  although  it  is 
only  right  to  state  that  the  Scottish  astronomer, 
John  Pringle  Nichol  (1804-1859),  and  some  other 
investigators,  held  to  the  theory  of  Herschel. 

The  solution  of  the  great  problem  was  in  1864, 
when  on  August  29  of  that  year  Huggins  turned 
his  spectroscope  on  a  bright  planetary  nebula  in 
Draco.  To  his  amazement  the  spectrum  was 
one  of  bright  lines,  proving  conclusively  that  the 


208      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

nebula  was  not  a  star-cluster,  but  a  mass  of  glow- 
ing gas, — hydrogen,  and  some  other  unknown 
substance,  now  named  "nebulium."  By  1868 
Huggins  had  observed  the  spectra  of  seventy 
nebulse.  Of  these  one  -  third  proved  to  be 
gaseous,  among  them  the  great  Orion  nebula 
which  Lord  Rosse  was  believed  to  have  resolved 
into  stars.  In  the  spectrum  of  the  latter,  the 
"  chief  nebular  line "  was  at  first  ascribed  by 
Huggins  to  nitrogen,  but  this  was  a  mistake. 
Later,  it  was  believed  by  Lockyer  to  coincide 
with  the  fluting  of  magnesium,  but  this  was 
disproved  by  Huggins  in  1889-90,  and  by 
Keeler  in  1890-91.  The  great  nebula  in 
Andromeda  and  the  great  spiral  in  Canes 
Venatici  were  found  by  Huggins  to  display  a 
continuous  spectrum,  and  a  similar  discovery 
was  made  in  regard  to  the  cluster  M  13  in 
Hercules,  and  other  star-clusters.  In  the  case 
of  the  nebulae,  it  is  not  believed  that  the  con- 
tinuous spectrum  is  due  to  the  existence  of  sun- 
like  bodies,  as  a  gas  under  pressure  would  give 
a  continuous  spectrum. 

The  Orion  nebula  has  been  more  thoroughly 
studied  than  any  other  object  of  its  class.  The 
application  of  photography  to  spectroscopy  has 
done  much  to  further  the  study  of  the  lines  in 
the  nebular  spectrum.  In  1886  Copeland  de- 


STELLAR   SYSTEMS   AND   NEBULA.  209 

tected  in  the  spectrum  of  the  Orion  nebula  the 
yellow  ray  of  helium.  On  February  13,  1890, 
Scheiner  announced  an  important  discovery, 
namely,  the  possession  by  both  the  nebula  and 
the  stars  in  Orion — with  the  exception  of  Betel- 
geux — of  a  line,  which  appeared  bright  in  the 
nebular  spectra  and  dark  in  the  stellar.  This 
line  was  identified  by  Vogel,  Lockyer,  and  others 
with  that  of  helium. 

Nebular  photography  was  inaugurated  in  1880 
by  Draper,  who  obtained  a  remarkably  good 
representation  of  the  Orion  nebula  in  that  year. 
His  work  in  this  direction,  cut  short  by  his 
death  in  1882,  was  taken  up  by  Janssen  at 
Meudon,  and  by  Common  in  England,  who 
obtained,  in  1883,  several  excellent  photographs. 
Later  photographs  have  shown  the  Orion  nebula 
to  be  much  more  extended  than  visual  observa- 
tions would  lead  one  to  expect.  A  photograph 
secured  in  1890  by  W.  H.  Pickering  revealed 
the  nebulous  matter  in  Orion  in  its  true  form, 
that  of  a  gigantic  spiral,  starting  from  near 
Bella trix,  sweeping  past  K  Orionis  and  Rigel  to 
17,  and  joining  with  the  great  nebula  surrounding 
0;  the  entire  constellation  being  thus  shown  to 
be  enwrapped  in  nebulous  haze. 

In  1885  nebular  photography  was  commenced 
by  Isaac  Roberts  (1829  -  1904),  the  English 


210      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

amateur  astronomer,  who  secured  admirable 
representations  of  clusters  and  nebulae.  He 
published,  in  1893  and  1900,  two  volumes  of 
collected  photographs  of  clusters  and  nebulae. 
This  monumental  work  was  thus  referred  to  by 
Dr  William  James  Lockyer :  "  Dr  Roberts  has 
not  only  nobly  enriched  astronomical  science, 
but  has  raised  a  monument  to  himself  which 
will  last  as  long  as  astronomy  has  any  interest 
for  mankind." 

Perhaps  the  most  remarkable  revelation  made 
by  photography  in  this  branch  of  research  has 
been  the  discovery  of  the  nebulae  in  the 
Pleiades.  In  1859  Tempel  observed  at  Flor- 
ence an  elliptical  nebula  south  of  the  star 
Merope.  On  November  16,  1885,  the  brothers 
Henry  obtained  at  Paris  a  photograph  of  the 
Pleiades,  revealing  the  existence  of  a  small 
spiral  nebula.  This  was  confirmed  by  visual 
observations,  and  particularly  by  the  photo- 
graphs of  Roberts,  which  also  showed  the  entire 
cluster  to  be  nebulous,  and  that  "  the  nebulosity 
extends  in  streamers  and  fleecy  masses,  till  it 
seems  almost  to  fill  the  spaces  between  the  stars, 
and  to  extend  far  beyond  them."  In  1888  a 
further  advance  was  made  by  the  brothers 
Henry,  who  found  seven  stars  to  be  strung  on 
a  nebulous  streak. 


STELLAR   SYSTEMS   AND   NEBULJS.  211 

Since  1890  nebular  photography  has  been 
pursued  by  Max  Wolf  in  Germany,  and  by 
E.  E.  Barnard  and  J.  E.  Keeler  in  America. 
Wolf's  photographs  of  the  constellation  Cygnus 
brought  out  the  close  connection  between  the 
stars  and  the  extensively  diffused  nebulosities 
discovered  by  him.  In  1901  Wolf  discovered 
a  "  nebelhaufen "  or  cluster  of  nebulse,  and  in 
1902  published  a  catalogue  of  1528  nebulae 
round  the  pole  of  the  Galaxy,  showing  them 
to  be  systematically  distributed.  Keeler  made 
his  memorable  observations  with  the  great 
36 -inch  reflecting  telescope,  which  was  con- 
structed in  England  many  years  ago  by 
Common.  It  afterwards  passed  into  the  hands 
of  Mr  Crossley  of  Halifax,  who  presented  it  to 
the  Lick  Observatory.  With  this  great  instru- 
ment Keeler  commenced  to  take  photographs 
of  the  heavens.  On  one  occasion  he  photo- 
graphed a  well-known  nebula,  and  on  develop- 
ing the  plate  was  surprised  to  find  seven  new 
nebulae  besides  that  which  he  had  photographed. 
On  another  occasion  he  exposed  a  plate  to  a 
nebula  in  Pegasus.  He  was  amazed  to  find 
altogether  twenty -one  nebulae  included  in  the 
photograph.  To  give  another  instance,  a  plate 
directed  to  the  constellation  Andromeda  con- 
tained no  fewer  than  thirty-two  nebulous  objects. 


212      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

This  has  given  an  enormous  extension  to  our 
knowledge  of  the  nebulae.  But  even  this  is  not 
all.  Keeler  found  on  his  plates  numerous  points 
of  light  which  seem  to  be  also  nebulae,  either  too 
small  or  too  remote  to  appear  as  such.  Appar- 
ently, however,  they  are  not  stars.  Keeler's 
work  convinced  him  that,  on  a  modest  estimate, 
there  must  be  at  least  one  hundred  and  twenty 
thousand  new  nebulae  within  reach  of  the 
Crossley  reflector.  Half  of  these,  he  announced, 
were  probably  spiral.  An  idea  of  the  vast 
importance  of  Keeler's  work  may  be  gained  if 
we  reflect  that  the  observations  of  all  the  earlier 
astronomers  resulted  in  the  discovery  of  six 
thousand  nebulae.  The  investigations  of  Keeler, 
in  all  probability,  were  the  means  of  adding 
120,000  more. 

Many  observations  have  been  made  on  nebulae, 
for  the  purpose  of  ascertaining  their  proper 
motions — but  without  success.  Measurements 
were  made  by  D' Arrest  in  1857  and  by  Burn- 
ham  in  1891,  but  none  of  these  revealed  any 
motion  of  the  nebulae  across  the  line  of  sight. 
Even  the  new  spectroscopic  method  of  deter- 
mining motions  in  the  line  of  sight,  in  the  hands 
of  Huggins,  failed  in  the  case  of  the  nebulae. 
With  the  great  Lick  refractor  at  his  disposal, 
Keeler  attacked  the  subject  in  1890,  and 


STELLAR   SYSTEMS   AND   NEBULAE.  213 

measured  the  radial  velocities  of  ten  nebulae. 
He  found  that  the  well-known  planetary  nebula 
in  Draco  was  moving  towards  the  Solar  System 
at  the  rate  of  40  miles  a  second;  for  the 
Orion  nebula  he  found  a  motion  of  recession  of 
11  miles  a  second;  but  probably  this  belongs 
chiefly  to  the  movement  of  the  Solar  System  in 
the  opposite  direction. 

Unfortunately  Keeler  did  not  live  to  carry 
on  his  investigations  in  nebular  astronomy.  His 
early  death  brought  to  an  abrupt  end  these 
fruitful  investigations.  Appointed  director  of 
the  Lick  Observatory  in  1898,  he  died  suddenly 
at  San  Francisco  on  August  12,  1900,  at  the 
early  age  of  forty-two. 


CHAPTEE    XII. 

STELLAR   DISTRIBUTION   AND   THE    STRUCTURE 
OF   THE    UNIVERSE. 

AFTER  the  death  of  Herschel  there  was  little 
done  in  the  direction  of  furthering  our  knowledge 
of  stellar  distribution,  or  the  construction  of  the 
heavens.  Here,  as  elsewhere,  Herschel's  im- 
mediate successor  was  his  son,  whose  star-gauges, 
both  in  England  and  in  South  Africa,  were  a 
worthy  sequel  to  those  of  his  father  ;  but  John 
Herschel,  in  his  books  on  astronomy,  reproduced 
his  father's  disc-theory,  unaware  that  the  elder 
Herschel  had  himself  abandoned  it.  The  work  of 
the  younger  Herschel  was  entirely  supplement- 
ary to  that  of  his  father. 

To  Wilhelm  Struve  belongs  the  credit  of 
showing  the  disc-theory  to  be  untenable,  and  of 
demonstrating  that  Herschel  had  abandoned  it. 
This  he  was  able  to  do  after  a  perusal  of 
Herschel's  papers,  presented  to  him  by  John 
Herschel.  Having  demonstrated  this,  he  under- 


STELLAR   DISTRIBUTION.  215 

took  a  series  of  investigations  which  resulted  in 
his  famous  theory  of  the  Universe.  This  was 
published  in  his  work  'Etudes  d'Astronomie 
Stellaire,'  which  was  published  in  1847.  His 
researches  were  based  on  the  star-catalogues  of 
Bessel,  Piazzi,  and  others ;  and  dealing  with 
52,199  stars,  he  discussed  the  number  of  stars 
in  each  zone  of  Right  Ascension.  He  found, 
in  the  words  of  Mr  Gore,  "  that  the  numbers 
increase  from  hour  i  to  hour  vi,  where  they 
attain  a  maximum.  They  then  diminish  to  a 
minimum  at  hour  xiii,  and  rise  to  another  but 
smaller  maximum  at  hour  xviii,  again  decreas- 
ing to  a  second  minimum  at  hour  xxii.  As  the 
hours  vi  and  xviii  are  those  crossed  by  the 
Milky  Way,  the  result  is  very  significant." 
He  concluded  the  Galaxy  to  be  produced  by  a 
collection  of  irregularly-condensed  clusters,  the 
stars  condensed  in  parallel  planes.  Next,  he 
considered  the  Universe  as  perhaps  infinitely 
extended  in  the  direction  of  the  Galaxy,  and 
accordingly  he  put  forward  the  idea  that  the 
light  from  the  fainter  and  more  distant  stars 
was  extinguished  in  its  passage  through  the 
ether  of  space,  which  he  regarded  as  imper- 
fectly transparent.  The  theory,  as  Struve  pro- 
pounded it,  was  disposed  of  by  Sir  John  Herschel, 
who  remarked  that  we  were  not  permitted  to 


216      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

believe  that  at  one  part  of  the  sky  our  view 
was  limited  by  extinction,  while  at  another  a 
clear  view  right  through  the  Galaxy  could  be 
had  ;  and  by  Robert  Grant  (1814-1892),  director 
of  the  Glasgow  Observatory,  who  showed  that, 
were  the  theory  true,  the  Galaxy  should  present 
a  uniform  appearance  throughout  its  course. 
On  the  whole,  Struve's  theory  was  no  improve- 
ment on  Herschel's ;  for,  as  Encke  pointed  out, 
Struve's  theory  was  built  on  five  assumptions, 
all  of  which  were  questionable. 

At  the  time  of  Struve's  investigation  Madler, 
at  Dorpat,  was  engaged  in  an  attempt  to  solve 
the  question  of  the  construction  of  the  heavens 
by  quite  another  method,  that  of  stellar  proper 
motion.  He  determined  to  investigate  the  sub- 
ject of  proper  motion  in  order  to  discover  the 
central  body  of  the  Milky  Way.  If  such  a 
centre  existed,  however,  the  motions  near  it 
would  be  somewhat  different  from  those  in  the 
Solar  System.  In  our  Solar  System  the  planets 
nearest  the  Sun  move  swiftest,  owing  to  the 
strength  of  the  force  of  gravitation.  In  the 
Sidereal  System,  on  the  other  hand,  the  move- 
ments at  the  centre,  as  Madler  pointed  out, 
would  be  slowest.  As  there  would  be  no  very 
large  preponderating  body,  the  mutual  attrac- 
tions of  the  different  stars  would  cause  the  bodies 


STELLAR   DISTRIBUTION.  217 

at  the  boundaries  of  the  Universe  to  move  faster 
than  those  at  the  centre,  the  central  sun — the 
object  of  Madler's  search — being  in  a  state  of 
rest  relative  to  the  Sidereal  System.  Madler 
accordingly  began  to  search  the  heavens  for  a 
region  of  sluggish  proper  motions. 

In  the  constellation  Taurus,  Madler  noticed 
that  the  proper  motions  of  the  stars  were  very 
slow.  The  idea  occurred  to  him  that  the  bright 
red  star  Aldebaran  might  be  the  central  sun, 
but  its  very  large  proper  motion  was  obviously 
against  this  inference.  Star  after  star  was  now 
subjected  by  Madler  to  the  most  careful  scrutiny. 
At  length,  after  a  laborious  investigation,  he 
announced  that  the  star  which  fulfilled  the  con- 
ditions of  a  central  body  was  Alcyone,  the 
brightest  of  the  Pleiades,  a  group  possessed  of 
no  proper  motion  except  that  due  to  the  sun's 
drift  in  the  opposite  direction.  In  1846  Madler 
published  his  hypothesis  in  his  elaborate  work, 
'The  Central  Sun/  He  announced  that  his 
observations  had  led  him  to  the  conclusion  that 
Alcyone  occupied  the  centre  of  gravity  of  the 
Sidereal  System,  and  was  the  point  round  which 
the  stars  of  the  Galaxy  were  all  revolving.  His 
profound  imagination,  however,  did  not  stop 
here.  This  speculation  led  him  to  the  sublime 
thought  that  the  centre  of  the  Universe  was 


218      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

the  Abode  of  the  Creator.  In  1847  Struve  re- 
jected Madler's  theory  as  "  much  too  hazardous," 
and  this  has  been  the  general  opinion  of  astron- 
omers. Madler's  theory  is  now  regarded  as 
quite  untenable. 

Herschel's  earlier  idea  that  the  nebulae  were 
external  galaxies  was  long  held  by  the  majority 
of  astronomers,  in  preference  to  his  later  and 
more  advanced  ideas.  The  supposed  resolution 
of  the  nebulae  by  Lord  Bosse's  telescope  gave 
support  to  this  external  galaxy  theory.  It  was 
clearly  shown,  however,  by  William  Whewell 
(1794-1866)  in  1853,  and  by  Herbert  Spencer 
(1820-1903)  in  1858,  that  the  systematic  dis- 
tribution of  the  nebulae  in  regard  to  the  stars 
precluded  the  possibility  of  their  being  external 
galaxies.  This  was  confirmed  by  the  spectro- 
scopic  discovery  of  the  gaseous  nature  of  some 
of  the  nebulae,  and  by  the  later  researches  of 
R.  A.  Proctor.  Not  only  did  Proctor  make  fresh 
discoveries,  but  it  fell  to  him  to  clear  away  the 
erroneous  ideas  regarding  the  construction  of  the 
heavens,  and  to  put  the  study  on  a  new  basis. 
In  1870  Proctor  plotted  on  a  single  chart  all 
the  stars,  to  the  number  of  324,198,  contained 
in  Argelander's  '  Durchmusterung '  charts.  This 
work  gave  the  death-blow  to  the  "  disc-theory." 
In  his  own  words,  "  In  the  very  regions  where 


STELLAR   DISTRIBUTION.  219 

the  Herschelian  gauges  showed  the  minutest 
telescopic  stars  to  be  most  crowded,  my  chart 
of  324,198  stars  shows  the  stars  of  the  higher 
orders  (down  to  the  eleventh  magnitude)  to  be 
so  crowded,  that  by  their  mere  aggregation 
within  the  mass  they  show  the  Milky  Way  with 
all  its  streams  and  clusterings.  It  is  utterly  im- 
possible that  excessively  remote  stars  could  seem 
to  be  clustered  exactly  where  relatively  near 
stars  were  richly  spread." 

Proctor  showed  also  that  in  all  probability  the 
stars  composing  the  nebulous  light  of  the  Galaxy 
are  much  smaller  than  the  brighter  stars,  and 
not  at  such  a  great  distance  as  their  faintness 
would  lead  us  to  suppose, — a  conclusion  confirmed 
by  the  work  of  Celoria.  Proctor  was  not  so  for- 
tunate in  theorising  as  in  direct  investigation. 
He  thought  that  the  Magellanic  clouds  were 
probably  external  galaxies ;  and  further,  he  put 
forward  the  idea  that  the  Milky  Way  is  a  spiral, 
the  gaps  and  coal- sacks  being  due  to  loops  in 
the  stream,  but  neither  of  these  ideas  has  found 
favour  with  astronomers.  But  the  chief  work 
accomplished  by  Proctor  was  a  revision  of  our 
knowledge  of  the  Universe,  which  he  thus 
describes :  "  Within  one  and  the  same  region 
coexist  stars  of  many  orders  of  real  magnitude, 
the  greatest  being  thousands  of  times  larger 


220      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

than  the  least.  All  the  nebulae  hitherto  dis- 
covered, whether  gaseous  and  stellar,  irregular, 
planetary,  ring -formed,  or  elliptic,  exist  within 
the  limits  of  the  Sidereal  System." 

Proctor's  discovery  of  the  excess  of  bright  stars 
on  the  Galaxy  was  confirmed  by  Jean  CJiarles 
Houzeau  (1820-1888),  director  of  the  Brussels 
Observatory.  Some  time  later  J.  E.  Gore  care- 
fully examined  the  positions  of  all  the  brighter 
stars  in  the  northern  and  southern  hemisphere. 
Following  this,  he  made  an  enumeration  of  the 
stars  in  the  atlas  of  Heis  and  in  the  charts 
constructed  by  Harding ;  the  outcome  of  the  in- 
vestigation being  to  show  that  stars  of  each 
individual  magnitude  taken  separately  tend  to 
aggregate  on  the  Galaxy,  the  aggregation  being 
noticed  even  in  first  -  magnitude  stars.  Gore 
further  pointed  out  many  cases  of  close  con- 
nection between  the  lucid  stars  and  the  galactic 
light.  A  similar  investigation  was  undertaken 
by  Schiaparelli  in  1889.  Schiaparelli,  basing  his 
work  on  the  catalogue  of  Gould  and  the  photo- 
metric measures  of  Pickering,  constructed  a  series 
of  planispheres  which  demonstrated  the  crowd- 
ing of  the  lucid  stars  towards  the  plane  of  the 
Galaxy.  These  investigations  were  still  further 
continued  by  Simon  Newcomb,  who  demonstrated 
that  "  the  darker  regions  of  the  Galaxy  are  only 


STELLAR   DISTRIBUTION.  221 

slightly  richer  in  stars  visible  to  the  naked  eye 
than  other  parts  of  the  heavens,  while  the  bright 
areas  are  between  60  and  100  per  cent  richer 
than  the  dark  areas."  The  Dutch  astronomer, 
Charles  Easton,  finds  a  connection  between  the 
distribution  of  ninth -magnitude  stars  and  the 
luminous  and  obscure  spots  in  the  Galaxy. 

It  was  noticed  by  Gould,  from  observations 
made  at  Cordova,  that  "  a  belt  or  stream  of 
bright  stars  appears  to  girdle  the  heavens 
very  nearly  in  a  great  circle  which  intersects 
the  Milky  Way."  According  to  Gould,  the 
belt  includes  Orion,  Canis  Major,  Argo,  Crux, 
Centaurus,  Lupus,  and  Scorpio  in  the  southern 
hemisphere,  and  Taurus,  Perseus,  Cassiopeia, 
Cepheus,  Cygnus,  and  Lyra  in  the  northern. 
This  was  interpreted  by  Celoria  as  indicating 
the  existence  of  two  galactic  rings,  but  Gould 
considered  the  zone  of  bright  stars  to  form  with 
the  Sun  a  subordinate  cluster  of  about  five 
hundred  stars  within  the  Galaxy. 

Perhaps  the  most  elaborate  investigations  on 
the  structure  of  the  Universe  have  been  those 
of  Kapteyn,  commenced  in  1891.  In  that  year 
he  demonstrated  that  stars  are  bluer  and 
more  easily  photographed  in  the  Galaxy  than 
elsewhere,  a  discovery  independently  made  by 
Gill  at  the  Cape,  and  Pickering  at  Har- 


222      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

vard.  In  1893  Kapteyn  announced  his  con- 
clusions, derived  from  a  novel  method  of 
studying  the  distance  of  the  stars  from  their 
proper  motions.  In  order  to  reach  a  definite 
idea  of  the  distances  of  the  stars,  he  made  use 
of  the  component  of  the  proper  motion,  meas- 
ured at  right  angles  to  a  great  circle  of  the 
sphere  which  passes-  through  a  given  star  and 
the  apex  of  the  solar  motion.  He  found  that 
stars  of  the  first  spectral  type  have  smaller 
proper  motions  than  those  of  the  second,  indi- 
cating that  stars  of  the  second  type  are  on  the 
average  nearer  to  the  Solar  System  than  those 
of  the  first,  the  near  vicinity  containing  almost 
exclusively  second  -  type  stars.  Kapteyn  con- 
cluded that  the  group  of  second  -  type  stars 
formed  one  system,  named  the  solar  cluster, 
which  he  considered  to  be  roughly  spherical  in 
shape.  In  1902  he  abandoned  this  idea,  retain- 
ing, however,  his  opinions  as  to  the  relative 
distances  of  the  different  types.  That  the 
second -type  stars  are  nearer  to  the  Sun  than 
the  first  is,  he  remarked  in  a  letter  to  the 
writer,  incontrovertible. 

In  the  investigation  of  the  motions  in,  and 
extent  of,  the  Universe,  the  name  of  Simon 
Newcomb  stands  out  pre-eminently.  Born  in 
1835  at  Wallace,  in  Nova  Scotia,  he  went  to 


STELLAR   DISTRIBUTION.  223 

the  States  in  1853.  In  1862  he  received  an 
appointment  at  Washington  Observatory,  and  he 
retained  an  official  position  until  1897.  Through- 
out his  scientific  career  he  has  been  specially 
attracted  by  the  question  of  the  construction  of 
the  heavens,  which  he  fully  discussed  in  his 
book  on  'The  Stars'  in  1901.  Newcomb's  in- 
vestigations have  shown  that  some  of  the  stars 
are  not  permanent  members  of  the  Sidereal 
System,  among  them  the  swiftly -moving  1830 
Groombridge.  He  has  shown  that  the  Stellar 
Universe  does  not  possess  that  form  of  stability 
which  is  seen  in  the  Solar  System.  Newcomb 
considers  the  Universe  to  be  limited  in  extent, 
as  opposed  to  the  opinions  of  Struve  and  others, 
who  believed  it  to  be  infinite.  He  has  brought 
clearly  before  his  readers  a  calculation,  based  on 
the  known  law  that  there  are  three  times  as 
many  stars  of  any  given  magnitude  as  of  that 
immediately  brighter,  the  increase  of  number 
compensating  for  the  decrease  of  brilliance. 
Were  the  Universe  infinitely  extended,  the  whole 
heavens  would  shine  with  the  brilliance  of  the 
Sun.  Newcomb,  therefore,  concludes  that  "  that 
collection  of  stars  which  we  call  the  Universe 
is  limited  in  extent." 

Positive  evidence   that   this   is   the  case  was 
obtained  by  Giovanni   Celoria,   now  director  of 


224      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

the  Milan  Observatory,  in  the  course  of  a  series 
of  star-gauges  at  the  north  galactic  pole.  Using 
a  small  refractor,  showing  stars  barely  to  the 
eleventh  magnitude,  he  found  he  could  see 
exactly  the  same  number  of  stars  as  Herschel's 
large  reflector,  indicating  that  increase  of  optical 
power  will  not  increase  the  number  of  stars 
visible  in  that  direction.  Celoria's  observation 
can  only  be  explained  on  the  assumption  that 
the  Universe  is  limited  in  extent,  as  otherwise 
Herschel's  telescope  should  have  shown  more 
stars  than  Celoria's,  even  granting  an  extinction 
of  light, — a  theory  which  Newcomb,  Schiaparelli, 
and  others  have  shown  to  be  quite  untenable. 
That  the  Universe  is  limited  in  extent  is  about 
all  that  is  known  for  certain,  although  even  this 
has  been  called  in  question,  notably  by  E.  W. 
Maunder  and  H.  H.  Turner.  The  problem  of 
the  construction  of  the  heavens  is  by  no  means 
solved,  although  several  more  or  less  probable 
theories  have  been  advanced. 

A  series  of  investigations  on  stellar  distri- 
bution, from  1884  to  1898,  led  Hugo  Seeliger, 
director  of  the  Munich  Observatory,  to  some 
remarkable  deductions.  He  believes  the  Uni- 
verse to  be  flattened  at  the  galactic  poles.  The 
Galaxy  is  the  zone  of  stellar  condensation,  and 
he  concludes  the  distance  of  the  Solar  System 


STELLAR   DISTRIBUTION.  225 

from  the  inner  border  of  the  zone  to  be  500 
times  the  distance  of  Sirius,  while  the  external 
border  is  1100  times  that  distance.  The  Uni- 
verse is  finite  in  extent,  its  limits  being  about 
9000  light  years  from  the  Solar  System.  In 
Seeliger's  opinion  the  extinction  of  light  may 
come  into  play  beyond  our  Universe,  and  pre- 
vent us  seeing  other  collections  of  stars. 

The  question  of  external  universes  is  purely  a 
hypothetical  one,  although  there  is  undoubtedly 
much  to  be  said  in  its  favour.  These  universes 
have  never  been  seen,  and  we  can  only  speculate 
as  to  their  existence.  The  last  word  on  the 
subject  is  by  Gore,  in  1893,  in  his  elaborate 
work,  *  The  Visible  Universe/  He  regards  the 
Solar  System  as  a  system  of  the  first  order, 
and  the  Galaxy  and  its  fellow-universes  of  the 
second.  He  makes  a  calculation  of  the  possible 
distance  of  an  external  universe  of  his  second 
order.  He  assumes  the  distance  of  the  nearest 
universe  from  our  Galaxy  as  proportional  to 
that  separating  the  Sun  from  a  Centauri, 
and  reaches  the  amazing  conclusion  that  the 
distance  of  the  nearest  Galaxy  is  no  less  than 
520,149,600,000,000,000,000  miles,  — a  distance 
which  light,  with  its  inconceivable  velocity  of 
186,000  miles  a  second,  would  take  almost 
ninety  millions  of  years  to  traverse. 

p 


226      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

These  calculations  absolutely  overwhelm  the 
mind,  which  is  unable  to  comprehend  such  vast 
distances.  Our  universe  is  indeed,  as  Flammarion 
expresses  it,  a  point  in  the  infinite.  The  cal- 
culations of  J.  E.  Gore  represent  our  highest 
scientific  conception  of  the  universe.  He  sums 
up  his  investigations  with  the  following  words : 
"  Although  we  must  consider  the  number  of 
visible  stars  as  strictly  finite,  the  numbers  of 
stars  and  systems  really  existing,  but  invisible 
to  us,  may  be  practically  infinite.  Could  we 
speed  our  flight  through  space  on  angel  wings 
beyond  the  confines  of  our  limited  universe  to 
a  distance  so  great  that  the  interval  which 
separates  us  from  the  remotest  fixed  star  might 
be  considered  as  merely  a  step  on  our  celestial 
journey,  what  further  creations  might  not  then 
be  revealed  to  our  wondering  vision  ?  Systems 
of  a  higher  order  might  there  be  unfolded  to 
our  view,  compared  with  which  the  whole  of 
our  visible  heavens  might  appear  like  a  grain 
of  sand  on  the  ocean  shore, — systems  perhaps 
stretching  out  to  infinity  before  us,  and  reach- 
ing at  last  the  glorious  *  mansions '  of  the 
Almighty,  the  Throne  of  the  Eternal." 


CHAPTER    XIII. 

CELESTIAL    EVOLUTION. 

IN  the  second  chapter  we  outlined  the  nebular 
hypothesis  as  propounded  by  Herschel.  Some 
time  earlier  the  French  mathematician,  Laplace, 
had  put  forward  his  theory  of  the  evolution  of 
the  Solar  System.  Pierre  Simon  Laplace  was 
born  at  Beaumont- en -Auge,  near  Honfleur,  in 
1749,  and  was  educated  in  the  Military  School 
of  his  native  town.  In  1767  he  became  Assist- 
ant Professor  of  Mathematics  at  Beaumont, 
and  some  years  later  at  the  Military  School 
in  Paris,  which  position  he  retained  for  many 
years.  Member  of  the  Institute  and  Minister 
of  the  Interior  under  Napoleon,  he  was  created 
a  Marquis  by  Louis  XVIII.,  and  died  at  Arcuile 
on  March  5,  1827. 

In  the  last  chapter  of  his  popular  work,  the 
'  Systeme  du  Monde/  Laplace  put  forward  his 
nebular  theory  "with  that  distrust  which  every- 
thing ought  to  inspire  that  is  not  the  result  of 


228      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

observation  or  calculation."  Laplace  noticed 
that  in  the  Solar  System  all  the  planets  re- 
volved round  the  Sun  in  the  same  direction, 
from  west  to  east,  and  that  the  satellites  of 
the  planets  obeyed  the  same  law.  He  also 
observed  that  the  Sun,  Moon,  and  planets 
rotated  on  their  axes  in  the  same  direction  as 
they  revolved  round  the  Sun ;  also  that  the 
planets  moved  round  the  Sun,  and  the  satellites 
round  their  primaries,  in  almost  the  same  plane 
as  the  Earth's  orbit,  the  plane  of  the  ecliptic. 
It  was  evident  that  these  remarkable  congruities 
were  not  the  result  of  chance,  and  accordingly 
Laplace  expressed  his  belief  that  the  Solar 
System  originated  from  a  great  nebula,  which 
in  condensing  detached  various  rings  in  the 
process  of  rotation.  These  rings  condensed  into 
the  various  planets  and  their  satellites. 

Laplace's  theory  was  powerfully  supported  by 
Herschel's  observations  of  the  various  nebulae 
in  the  heavens.  But,  with  the  supposed  resolu- 
tion of  the  various  nebulae  after  the  erection  of 
the  Rosse  reflector  in  1845,  the  evidence  in 
favour  of  the  nebular  theory  seemed  to  be 
greatly  reduced.  In  1864,  however,  the  dis- 
covery of  the  gaseous  nebulae,  by  means  of  the 
spectroscope,  gave  further  support  to  the  theory. 
Powerful  aid  was  lent  to  the  nebular  hypoth- 


CELESTIAL   EVOLUTION.  229 

esis  by  the  famous  German  physicist,  Hermann 
Ludwig  Ferdinand  von  Helmholtz  (1821-1894), 
in  1854,  in  his  theory  of  the  maintenance  of  the 
Sun's  heat.  Many  theories  had  been  already 
advanced  to  account  for  this.  After  the  dis- 
covery of  the  conservation  of  energy,  Julius 
Robert  Mayer,  one  of  the  discoverers,  put 
forward  the  theory  that  the  Solar  heat  was 
sustained  by  the  inflow  of  meteorites  from  space, 
and  this  idea  was  developed  in  1854  by  Sir 
William  Thomson,  now  Lord  Kelvin  (born 
1824),  but  it  was  soon  apparent  that  the 
supply  of  meteors  required  to  sustain  the  Solar 
heat  was  such  as  would  have  increased  the 
mass  of  the  Sun  very  considerably.  Accord- 
ingly the  hypothesis  was  partially  abandoned, 
and  was  succeeded  by  that  of  Helmholtz,  who 
pointed  out  that  the  radiation  of  the  Sun's 
heat  was  the  result  of  its  contraction  through 
cooling.  The  rate  was  then  estimated  at  380 
feet  yearly,  or  a  second  of  arc  in  6000  years. 
This  theory  was  at  once  generally  accepted.  It 
assumes  the  Sun  to  be  still  contracting,  and 
therefore,  on  going  backwards  in  imagination, 
we  reach  a  period  when  the  Sun  must  have 
been  much  larger  than  now,  and,  in  fact, 
extended  beyond  the  orbit  of  Neptune. 

Several  objections  to  Laplace's  nebular  theory 


230      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

were  urged  by  various  investigators.  Among 
these  was  the  retrograde  motions  of  the  satellites 
of  Uranus  and  Neptune,  and  the  extremly  rapid 
revolution  of  the  inner  satellite  of  Mars.  Other 
objections  were  urged  by  Babinet,  Kirkwood,  and 
others,  and  at  length  a  sweeping  reform  of  the 
nebular  theory  was  proposed  by  Faye  in  1884, 
in  his  work,  '  Sur  1'Origine  du  Monde/  Faye  put 
forward  the  idea  that  all  the  planets  interior 
to  the  orbit  of  Uranus  were  formed  inside  the 
solar  nebula,  while  Uranus  and  Neptune  came 
into  existence  after  the  development  of  the  Sun 
was  far  advanced.  But  the  objections  to  Faye's 
theory  are  formidable,  and  the  hypothesis  has 
not  been  accepted. 

A  popular  exposition  of  the  nebular  theory 
was  given  in  1901  in  Ball's  work  on  'The 
Earth's  Beginning/  He  exhaustively  discusses 
the  whole  question,  and  explains  the  retrograde 
motion  of  the  satellites  of  Uranus  and  Neptune 
as  due  to  the  fact  that  the  planes  of  the  orbits 
of  the  satellites  will  eventually  be  brought  to 
coincide  with  the  ecliptic.  These  motions,  says 
Ball,  do  not  disprove  the  nebular  theory.  "  They 
rather  illustrate  the  fact  that  the  great  evolu- 
tion which  has  wrought  the  Solar  System  into 
its  present  form  has  not  finished  its  work  :  it 
is  still  in  progress." 


CELESTIAL   EVOLUTION.  231 

The  theory  that  the  Sun's  heat  was  main- 
tained by  meteors,  was  extended  by  Proctor  in 
1870  to  explain  the  growth  of  the  planets 
through  meteoric  aggregation  as  well  as  nebular 
condensation.  Certainly  the  theory,  as  developed 
by  Proctor,  accounted  fairly  well  for  the  various 
features  of  the  Solar  System ;  but  the  highest 
development  of  the  meteoritic  theory  is  due  to 
Lockyer,  who  published  his  views  in  1890,  in 
his  work,  *  The  Meteoritic  Hypothesis.'  Lockyer 
claims  that  his  views  are  merely  extensions  of 
Schiaparelli's  ideas  regarding  the  concentration 
of  celestial  matter.  He  considered  the  chief 
nebular  line  to  be  identical  with  the  remnant 
of  the  magnesium  fluting,  which  is  conspicuous 
in  cometic  and  meteoric  spectra ;  but  Huggins 
and  Keeler,  with  more  powerful  instruments, 
disproved  the  supposed  coincidence.  Lockyer 
considers  that  "  all  self-luminous  bodies  in  the 
celestial  space  are  composed  either  of  swarms 
of  meteorites  or  of  masses  of  meteoric  vapour 
produced  by  heat.  The  heat  is  brought  about 
by  the  condensation  of  meteor  swarms,  due  to 
gravity,  the  vapour  being  finally  condensed  into 
a  solid  globe." 

Lockyer  divided  the  stars  into  seven  groups, 
according  to  temperature,  the  order  of  evolution 
being  from  red  stars  through  a  division  of  second- 


232      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

type  stars  to  Sirian  stars,  regarded  as  the  hottest 
stars ;  through  a  second  division  of  solar  stars 
to  fourth-type  stars.  In  fact,  the  theory  aspires 
to  give  a  complete  explanation  of  all  celestial 
phenomena,  from  meteors  to  nebulae.  Newcomb, 
however,  considers  that  the  objections  to  the 
theory  are  insuperable,  and  his  opinion  is  shared 
by  the  majority  of  astronomers,  many  of  whom, 
however,  consider  that  there  are  elements  of 
truth  in  the  theory ;  but  Lockyer  undoubtedly 
carried  his  ideas  to  an  extravagant  extent. 

Lockyer's  evolutionary  order  of  the  stars  is 
not  supported  by  Vogel.  Zollner  suggested  in 
1865  that  yellow  and  red  stars  are  simply  white 
stars  in  a  further  stage  of  cooling ;  but  Angstrom 
showed  that  atmospheric  composition  is  a  safer 
criterion  of  age  than  colour.  Vogel's  classifica- 
tion, first  published  in  1874,  and  further  developed 
in  1895,  is  from  the  standpoint  of  evolution.  He 
considers  Orion  stars  and  Sirian  stars  to  be  the 
youngest  orbs.  Solar  stars  are  considered  by 
Vogel  to  have  wasted  much  of  their  store  of 
radiation,  and  red  stars  are  viewed  as  "  effete 
suns,  hastening  rapidly  down  the  road  to  final 
extinction."  He  considers  stars  of  Secchi's  fourth 
type  to  be  also  dying  suns,  both  types  represent- 
ing alternative  roads  for  stars  of  the  Solar  type 
in  their  decline  into  dark  stars.  This  view  is 


CELESTIAL   EVOLUTION.  233 

supported  by  Duner,  and  is  distinctly  confirmed 
by  Hale's  observations  with  the  Yerkes  telescope. 
Vogel's  views,  in  fact,  are  generally  accepted 
among  astronomers.  The  nebular  theory,  modi- 
fied by  subsequent  research,  seems  destined  to 
hold  its  own  against  all  attacks. 

Distinctly  supplementary  to  the  nebular  theory 
are  the  remarkable  researches,  commenced  in 
1879,  by  Sir  George  Howard  Darwin  (born 
1845),  son  of  Charles  Darwin  the  great  biologist. 
George  Howard  Darwin  was  born  in  1845,  at 
Downe  in  Kent,  was  educated  at  Cambridge,  and 
studied  for  the  law;  but  in  1873  he  returned  to 
Cambridge,  where  he  became  Plumian  Professor 
of  Astronomy  in  1883.  In  1879  he  communicated 
to  the  Royal  Society  the  first  of  his  papers  on 
tidal  friction,  which  were  summed  up  in  his  book 
on  'The  Tides/  published  in  1898.  He  finds 
that  the  tides  act  upon  the  Earth  as  a  brake 
does  upon  a  machine, — they  tend  to  retard  its 
rotation.  Consequently,  the  day  is  growing 
longer,  the  Moon's  orbit  is  becoming  enlarged, 
and  its  period  of  revolution  is  being  lengthened. 

At  present  the  day  is  about  twenty-four  hours 
long,  and  the  month  about  twenty-seven  days. 
The  day,  however,  will  be  lengthened  at  a  more 
rapid  rate  than  the  month,  and  in  the  remote 
future  the  day  and  month  will  both  last  fifty-five 


234      A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

of  our  present  days.  The  Moon  will  revolve 
round  the  Earth  in  the  same  period  that  the 
Earth  rotates  on  its  axis,  and  the  two  bodies 
will  perform  their  circuit  round  the  Sun  as  if 
united  by  a  bar. 

Not  only  can  we  foresee  the  future  of  the 
Earth-Moon  System,  but  we  can  also  read  the 
past.  According  to  Darwin's  theory,  the  Earth, 
in  the  remote  past,  was  probably  rotating  on  its 
axis  in  a  very  short  period,  between  three  and 
five  hours.  The  Moon  must  then  have  been 
much  nearer  us  than  it  is  now,  and  was  prob- 
ably revolving  round  its  primary  in  the  same 
period  that  the  Earth  took  to  rotate  on  its  axis. 
The  two  globes,  then  gaseous,  must  have  been 
revolving  almost  in  actual  contact.  Had  the 
month  been  even  a  second  shorter  than  the  day, 
the  Moon  must  inevitably  have  fallen  back  on 
the  Earth.  As  it  was,  the  condition  of  affairs 
could  not  endure.  The  condition  of  the  Moon 
resembled  that  of  an  egg  balanced  on  its  point. 
The  Moon  must  either  recede  from  the  Earth  or 
fall  back  upon  it.  The  solar  tide  here  interfered, 
and  caused  the  Moon  to  recede  from  its  primary 
until  it  reached  its  present  distance  of  239,000 
miles. 

The  fact  that  the  Earth  and  Moon  were  almost 
in  contact  suggests  that  they  were  probably  in 


CELESTIAL   EVOLUTION.  235 

contact.  In  other  words,  the  Moon  originally 
formed  part  of  the  Earth,  which,  in  consequence 
of  its  short  -  rotation  period,  and  probably  also 
owing  to  the  interference  of  the  solar  tide,  split 
into  two  portions,  and  the  smaller  of  these  now 
forms  the  Moon.  It  is  likely  that  the  matter 
now  forming  the  Moon  was  detached  from  the 
Earth  in  separate  particles.  Just  as  the  tides 
raised  by  the  Moon  tend  to  retard  the  motion 
of  the  Earth,  so  the  Earth  tides  raised  in  the 
Moon  have  already  done  their  work.  The  Moon 
now  rotates  on  its  axis  in  the  same  time  as  it 
revolves  round  the  Earth.  Part  of  the  evolu- 
tion of  the  Earth -Moon  system  is  completed. 
Schiaparelli's  discovery  that  the  rotation  periods 
of  both  Venus  and  Mercury  coincide  with  their 
times  of  revolution  is  distinctly  confirmatory  of 
Darwin's  theory. 

In  his  chapter  on  the  "  Evolution  of  Celestial 
Systems  "  in  his  book  on  '  The  Tides/  Darwin  dis- 
cusses the  distribution  of  the  satellites  of  the  Solar 
System.  He  says  of  the  evolution  of  a  planet : 
"We  have  seen  that  rings  should  be  shed  from 
the  central  nucleus  when  the  contraction  of  the 
nebula  has  induced  a  certain  degree  of  augmen- 
tation of  rotation.  Now,  if  the  rotation  were 
retarded  by  some  external  cause,  the  genesis  of 
a  ring  might  be  retarded  or  entirely  prevented." 


236       A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

He  then  remarks  that  probably  the  formation 
of  the  Moon  was  retarded,  and  in  the  case  of 
Mercury  and  Venus,  solar  tidal  friction  pre- 
vented satellite  formation.  This  explains  why 
Mercury  and  Venus  have  no  satellites,  the 
Earth  only  one,  Mars  two,  while  the  exterior 
planets  have  each  several  satellites. 

The  theory  of  tidal  friction  was  extended  in 
1892  to  the  explanation  of  the  double  stars 
by  the  American  astronomer,  See.  See  showed 
by  mathematical  calculation  the  effects  of  tidal 
friction  in  shaping  the  eccentric  orbits  of  the 
binary  stars,  the  course  of  evolution  being  traced 
from  double  stars,  revolving  almost  in  contact, 
which  the  spectroscope  reveals,  to  the  tele- 
scopic doubles.  See's  researches  have  done  much 
to  supplement  those  of  Darwin,  who  considers 
that  there  are  two  types  of  cosmical  evolution, 
— the  Laplacian,  and  the  "  second "  or  lunar 
type. 

Lowell,  in  his  work  on  *  The  Solar  System ' 
(1903),  adds  six  congruities  to  those  remarked 
by  Laplace  and  his  successors.  These  are,  "All 
the  satellites  turn  the  same  face  to  their 
primaries  (so  far  as  we  can  judge) ;  Mercury, 
and  probably  Venus,  do  the  same  to  the  Sun ; 
one  law  governs  position  and  size  in  the  Solar 
System  and  in  all  the  satellite  systems ;  orbital 


CELESTIAL   EVOLUTION.  23*7 

inclinations  in  the  satellite  systems  increase  with 
distance  from  the  primary ;  the  outer  planets 
show  a  greater  tilt  of  axis  to  orbit-plane  with 
increased  distance  from  the  Sun  (so  far  as  detect- 
able) ;  the  inner  planets  show  a  similar  relation." 

The  fate  of  the  average  solar  star  is  sketched 
out  by  Vogel's  classification,  and  by  any  evolu- 
tionary hypothesis  which  we  may  adopt.  In  the 
words  of  Lowell :  "  Though  we  cannot  as  yet 
review  with  the  mind's  eye  our  past,  we  can,  to 
an  extent,  foresee  our  future.  We  can  with 
scientific  confidence  look  forward  to  a  time  when 
each  of  the  bodies  composing  our  Solar  System 
shall  turn  an  unchanging  face  in  perpetuity  to 
the  Sun.  Each  will  then  have  reached  the  end 
of  its  evolution  set  in  the  unchanging  stare  of 
death.  Then  the  Sun  itself  will  go  out,  becom- 
ing a  cold  and  lifeless  mass ;  and  the  Solar 
System  will  circle  unseen,  ghostlike,  in  space, 
awaiting  only  the  resurrection  of  another  cosmic 
catastrophe." 

As  to  what  this  cosmic  catastrophe  will  be, 
science  gives  no  definite  idea ;  nor  can  astrono- 
mers say  with  certainty  whether  the  Universe 
will  come  to  an  end  by  the  extinction  of  its 
luminaries,  or  whether  the  suns  and  planets 
will  be  brought  back  to  luminosity  again ;  but 
the  human  mind  shrinks  from  the  idea  of  a 


238       A  CENTURY'S  PROGRESS  IN  ASTRONOMY. 

dead  Universe.  At  this  point  science  has  said 
its  last  word,  and  must  give  place  to  religion. 
In  our  day  we  may  repeat  with  deeper  mean- 
ing the  words  of  the  Scottish  astronomer, 
Thomas  Dick :  "  Here  imagination  must  drop 
its  wing,  since  it  can  penetrate  no  further 
into  the  dominions  of  Him  who  sits  on  the 
Throne  of  Immensity.  Overwhelmed  with  a 
view  of  the  magnificence  of  the  Universe,  and 
of  the  perfections  of  its  Almighty  Author,  we 
can  only  fall  prostrate  in  deep  humility  and 
exclaim,  '  Great  and  marvellous  are  Thy  works, 
Lord  God  Almighty.' " 


INDEX. 


Absolute  parallax,  158. 

Adams,  J.  C.,  78,  116,  117,  118, 

119,  120,  140. 
Adams,  W.,  205. 
Aerolites,  147,  148,  149. 
Airy,  Sir  G.  B.,  27,  104,  117,  120. 
Aitken,  R.  G.,  202. 
Alcyone  (77  Tauri),  217. 
Aldebaran  (a  Tauri),  151,  166,  170, 

172. 
Algol  (/3  Persei),    178,    182,    183, 

184,  193,  204. 
Al-Sufi,  180,  183. 
Altair  (a  Aquilse),  170. 
Anderson,  T.  D.,  191,  192. 
Andromeda  nebula,  180,  208. 
Andromedse  (7),  201. 
Andromedse  (Nova),  180. 
Andromedid  meteors,  142,  149. 
Angstrom,  A.  J.,  50,  51. 
Antares  (a  Scorpii),  171. 
Aquila,  195. 
Aquilee  (??),  185,  186. 
Arago,  F.  J.  D.,  6,    11,   31,   37, 

40,  118,   120,   129. 
Arcturus  (a  Bootis),  165,  170. 
Arequipa  Observatory,  75. 
Argelander,  F.   W.    A.,    27,  159, 

167,  178,  179,  180,  218. 
Argo  Navis,  221. 
Argus  (TJ),  187,  188. 
Armagh  Observatory,  206. 
Asteroids,  19,  62,  97-102. 


Astronomer  -  Royal  of  Scotland, 
134,  155,  191  ;  of  England,  59, 
117  ;  of  Ireland,  151,  156. 

Astronomy  of  the  invisible,  203. 

Aurigse  (Nova),  191,  192,  195. 

Auwers,  A.,  167,  188,  203. 

Babinet,  230. 

Baily,  F.,  159. 

Bakhuyzen,  H.  G.,  91. 

Ball,  Sir  R.  S.,  23,  34,  108,  141, 

149,  156,  158,  230. 
Barnard,  E.  PI,  19,  95,  107,  108, 

110,  111,  113,  136,  191,  211. 
Beer,  W.,  68,  69,  90. 
Bellatrix  (7  Orionis),  209. 
Belopolsky,  A.,  87,  110,  166,  185, 

186,  204,  205. 

Berlin  Observatory,  119,  120. 
Bessel,  F.   W.,  24,  82,  116,  151, 

152,    153,  154,  159,  167,  202, 

203. 
Betelgeux   (a  Orionis),    165,   171, 

172,   182,  187. 
Biela,  W.,  128. 
Biela's  comet,  128,  129,  142,  143, 

146,  149. 

Birmingham,  J.,  189. 
Bode,  J.  E.,  97,  98,  152. 
Bode's  Law,  97. 
Boeddicker,  0.,  77. 
Bond,  G.  P.,  103,  109,  130,  136, 

207. 


240 


INDEX. 


Bond,  W.  0.,  109,  112,  120. 
'Bonn     Durchmusterung,'      159, 

160,  218. 

Bonn  Observatory,  88,  97,  160. 
Bootis  (c),  30. 
Borisiak,  192. 
Boss,  L.,  168. 
Bouvard,  A.,  115,  116. 
Bradley,  J.,  159,  167. 
Bredikhine,  T.  A.,  105,  131,  132, 

133,  134,  135. 

Brewster,  Sir  D.,  50,  101,  178. 
Brinkley,  J.,  151. 
Briinnow,  F.,  156. 
Bruno,  G.,  35. 
Buffon,  103. 
Bunsen,  R.  W.,  51. 
Burchell,  188. 
Burnham,  S.  W.,  201,  202,  212. 

Callandreau,  0.,  136. 
Callandrelli,  151. 
Cambridge  Observatory,  116. 
Campbell,  T.  (Poet),  2. 
Campbell,  W.  W.,  24,   107,  110, 

166,  168,   187,  191,  193,  204, 

205. 

Canals  of  Mars,  91,  92,  93,  94,  95. 
Cancri  (C),  206. 
Cancri  (S),  180. 
Canis  Major,  188. 
'  Cape  Durchmusterung,'  161,  162. 
Cape  Observatory,  155,  157. 
Capella  (a  Auriga),  170,  176,  193, 

205. 

Camera,  L.,  100. 
Carpenter,  J.,  73. 
Carrington,  R.  C.,  45,  46,  59. 
Cassini,  D.,  21. 
Cassiopeia,  221. 
Castor   (a  Geminorum),   30,   200, 

205. 
Celoria,  G.,  202,  218,  221,  223, 

224. 

Centauri  (a),  155,  188,  225. 
Centaurus,  221. 
Cephei  (S),  178,  182,  185,  186. 
Cepheus,  221. 
Ceres,  19,  98,  101. 


Cerulli,  V.,  86,  91,  94. 

Chacornac,  161. 

Challis,  J.,  116,  119,  120. 

Chambers,  G.  F.,  31. 

Chandler,  S.  C.,  88,  89,  181,  184. 

Chladni,  E.,  138. 

Chromosphere,  solar,  55,  56. 

Clark,  A.,  202. 

Clerke,  Miss  A.  M.,  3,  5,  8,  12, 
13,  15,  25,  26,  34,  42,  58,  75, 
86,  92,  105,  109,  124,  125,  131, 
132,  133,  140,  142,  169,  186, 
187,  189. 

Clerk-Maxwell,  J.,  109,  110. 

Coggia's  comet,  131,  132,  133. 

Comet  families,  135. 

Comets,  24,  123-137,  141,  142, 
143,  144,  146,  149,  152. 

Common,  A.  A.,  107,  209. 

Copeland,  R.,  134,  135,  190,  208. 

Cornu,  A.,  189. 

Corona  Borealis,  188. 

Corona,  solar,  55,  57,  64. 

Coronse  (Nova),  188,  189. 

Crossley,  E.,  211. 

Crux,  221. 

Cygni  (61),  152,  158. 

Cygni  (Y),  184,  185. 

Cygni  (Nova),  189,  190. 

Cygnus,  152,  189,  221. 

Damoiseau,  78. 

D'Arrest,   H.   L.,    96,    119,    142, 

212. 

Dartmouth  Observatory,  56. 
Darwin,  Sir  G.  H.,  233,  234,  235, 

236. 

Dawes,  W.  R.,  90,  117. 
De  la  Rue,  W.,  52,  75. 
Delaunay,  C.  E.,  78,  79. 
Dembowski,  E.,  201. 
Deneb  (o  Cygni),  165. 
Denning,  W.  F.,  84,  85,  91,  95, 

105,  111,  112,  144,  145,  146. 
Deslandres,  H.,  110. 
Dick,  T.,  85,  238. 
Disc-theory,  32,  36,  38,  39,  214, 

218. 
DiVico,  F.,  85,  86,  170. 


INDEX. 


241 


Doberck,  W.,  201. 

Donati,  G.  B.,  130,  131,  169. 

Donati's  comet,  130,  133,  136. 

Doppler,  C.,  57,  58. 

Doppler's  Principle,    58,   59,    87, 

110,   165,  168,  203. 
Douglass,  A.  E.,  92,  107. 
Draconis  (\),  182. 
Draper,  H.,  136,  172,  175. 
Dreyer,  J.  L.  E.,  206. 
Dunecht  Observatory,  157. 
Dune-r,  N.  C.,  58,  59,  174,  175, 

181,  184,  185,   201,  202,  233. 
Dunkin,  E.,  27,  167. 
Dunsink  Observatory,  156. 

Earth,  76,  97,  103,  104,  147,  148, 

149,  153,  154,  156,  236. 
Earth-Moon  system,  234,  235. 
Easton,  C.,  221. 
Eclipses,  lunar,  77. 
Eclipses,  solar,  56,  57,  80,  81. 
Edinburgh    (Royal)    Observatory, 

195. 

Electrical  repulsion  theory,  126. 
Elger,  T.  G.,  74. 
Elkin,  W.  L.,  157. 
Encke,  J.   F.,   30,   61,  119,   127, 

128,  216. 

Encke's  comet,  127,  128,  137. 
Erman,  140. 
Eros,  62,  101. 
Ertborn,  85. 
Euler,  L.,  88,  89. 
Evolution,    planetary,    228,    229, 

230    231 
Evolution,  stellar,  33,  34,  231,  232. 

Faye,  H.,  60,  129,  230. 
Faye's  comet,  129,  137. 
Ferguson,  J.,  9,  178. 
Flammarion,  C.,  87,  91,  95,  121, 

147,   164,  187,  195,  201,  202, 

226. 

Flamsteed,  J.,  5. 
Fleming,  Mrs,  192,  195. 
Forbes,  G.,  122. 
Fraunhofer,    J.    47,    48,    49,    50, 

151,  153,  169. 


Fraunhofer  lines,  48,  49,  50,  51, 

169,  172. 
Frost,  E.  B.,  205. 

Galactic  poles,  35,  224. 
Galaxies,  external,  32,  218,  225, 

226. 
Galaxy,  or  Milky  Way,  32,  36-42, 

186,  211,  215,  216,  217,  219, 

220,  221;  224,  225. 
Galileo,  44,  107. 
Galle,  J.  G.,  62,   108,  109,    119, 

142. 

Galloway,  T.,  167. 
Gambart,  128. 
Gauss,  C.  F.,  27,  98,  167. 
Gautier,  A.,  45. 
Gemini,  11,  194. 
Geminorum  (Nova),  194. 
Geminorum  (0,  180,  182,  185. 
George  III.,  11,  23. 
Gill,  Sir  D.,   62,    136,  155,    157, 

160,  161,  221. 
Glasgow  Observatory,  216. 
Goodricke,  J.,  178,  183. 
Gore,  J.  E.,  24,  38,  179,  181,  182, 

183,  192,  202,   215,  220,  225, 

226. 
Gould,  B.  A.,  135,  160,  163,  180, 

220,  221. 
Grant,  E,.,  216. 
Gravitation,  law  of,  29. 
Greenwich  Observatory,  59,  117. 
Grimmler,  192. 
Groombridge    (1830),     156,     162, 

223. 

Groombridge  (1618),  156. 
Gruithuisen,  87. 

Hale,  G.  E.,  55,  57,  233. 

Hall,  A.,  96,  111,  112,  156,  190. 

Hall,  Maxwell,  121. 

Halley,  E.,  138. 

Halley's  comet,  123,  130,  152. 

Halm,  J.,  195,  196. 

Hansen,  P.  A.,  61,  78,  79. 

Hansky,  A.,  57. 

Harding,  K.  L.,  99,  153,  220. 

Hartwig,  E.,  190. 


Q 


242 


INDEX. 


Harvard  Observatory,  174,  175, 
191. 

Hasselberg,  B.,  148,  190. 

Heis,  E.,  179,  220. 

Heliometer,  153,  157. 

Helium  stars,  174. 

Helmholtz,  H.,  61,  229. 

Hencke,  K.  L.,  99. 

Henderson,  T.,  154,  155. 

Henry,  Paul  and  Prosper,  100, 
114,  210. 

Hercules,  167. 

Herculis  (a),  182. 

Herculis  (A),  26. 

Herschel,  William,  1-42,  43,  60, 
63,  65,  69,  74,  77,  85,  90,  99, 
103,  109,  111,  112,  115,  123, 
150,  162,  167,  176,  196,  197, 
207,  214,  216,  218,  224,  227. 

Herschel,  A.,  144. 

Herschel,  Caroline,  6,  8,  9,  12,  13, 
14,  30,  35,  127,  198. 

Herschel,  Sir  J.,  4,  17,  27,  30,  37, 
50,  112,  113,  120,  130,  144, 
167,  187,  188,  197,  198,  199, 
200,  214,  215. 

Hind,  J.  R.,  99,  129,  135,  180, 
188. 

Hoek,  135. 

Holden,  E.  S.,  191. 

Hough,  G.,  105. 

Houzeau,  J.  C.,  220. 

Huggins,  Lady,  172. 

Huggins,  Sir  W.,  54,  57,  74,  95, 
106,  114,  131,  136,  165,  170, 
171,  172,  173,  189,  190,  191, 
193,  195,  207,  208,  212,  231. 

Humboldt,  A.,  44,  139. 

Hussey,  W.  J.,  116,  201. 

Innes,  R.,  188. 

Intra-Mercurial  planet,  80,  81. 
Italian  spectroscopists,  54,  55. 

Janssen,  P.  J.  C.,  52,  53,  54,  57, 

59,  112,  209. 
Juno,  19,  99,  101. 
Jupiter,  20,  75,  97,  101-108,  112, 

114,  121,  122,  135,  144,  146. 


Juvisy  Observatory,  164. 

Kaestner,  65,  124. 

Kaiser,  F.,  90. 

Kant,  I.,  34,  35,  101,  103. 

Kapteyn,  J.  C.,  27,  158,  161,  162, 

168,  221,  222. 
Keeler,  J.  E.,  95,  114,  185,  208, 

211,  212,  213,  231. 
Kelvin,  Lord,  229. 
Kempf,  P.,  181. 
Kepler,  J.,  5,  35,  137. 
Kirchoff,  G.  R.,  61,  169,  172. 
Kirkwood,  D.,  140,  230. 
Klein,  H.  J.,  73. 
Klinkerfues,  E.,  142,  202. 
Konkoly,  N.,  175. 
Kiistner,  F.,  88. 

Lalande,  23,  152. 

Lambert,  J.  H.,  34. 

Lament,  J.,  44. 

Langley,  S.  P.,  77. 

Laplace,  P.  S.,  20,  33,  34,  77,  109, 

148,  152,  195,  227,  228,  229. 
Lassell,  W.,  112,  115,  117,  120. 
Latitude,  variation  of,  88,  89. 
Leipzig  Observatory,  173. 
Leonid  meteors,  139,  140,  142. 
Leonis  (/3),  183. 
Lescarbault,  80. 
Le  Verrier,  U.  J.  J.,  61,  80,  81, 

118,  119,  120,  142,  164. 
Ley  den  Observatory,  91. 
Librae  (S),  180. 
Lick  Observatory,   93,    107,   166, 

168,  191,  213. 
Light,  extinction  of,  40,  215,  216, 

224,  225. 

Lindsay,  Lord,  157. 
Linn^  71,  72. 
Lockyer,  Sir  J.  N.,  52,  53,  54,  55, 

58,   149,    174,    191,   193,    195, 

208,  209,  231,  232. 
Lockyer,  W.  J.  S.,  210. 
Loewy,  M.,  75. 
Lohrmann,  W.  G.,  68,  71. 
Lohse,  W.  0.,  88,  105. 
Loomis,  188. 


INDEX. 


243 


Lowell,  P.,  83,  84,  86,  87,  91,  92, 

93,  94,  122,  236,  237. 
Lowell  Observatory,  92,  94,  106, 

114. 

Lund  Observatory,  59. 
Lupus,  221. 
Luther,  R.,  100. 
Lyra,  221. 

Lyra  (/3),  178,  182,  185. 
Lyrid  meteors,  122. 

Maclaurin,  C.,  9. 

Maclear,  Sir  T.,  155. 

Madler,  J.  H.,  27,  68,  69,  71,  96, 

104,  202,  203,  216,  217,  218. 
Magellanic  clouds,  219. 
Magnetism,  44,  60. 
Mars,  18,  19,  90-97, 101,  144,  236. 
Maunder,  E.  W.,  59,  60,  94,  95, 

134,  145,  166,  224. 
Mascari,  A.,  86. 
Mayer,  C.,  164. 
Mayer,  J.  R.,  229. 
Mazapil  meteorite,  149. 
M^chain,  127. 
Mee,  A.,  68. 
Melloni,  76. 

Mercury,  18,  80,  81-84,  97,  236. 
Messier,  C.,  30. 
Meteorites,    147,    148,    149,  229, 

231. 

'Meteoritic  Hypothesis,'  231,  232. 
Meteors,  138-149. 
Meudon  Observatory,  59. 
Milan  Observatory,  82,  202,  224. 
Milky  Way.     See  Galaxy. 
Miller,  W.  A.,  50,  172. 
Mira  Ceti,  11,  182,  186,  187. 
Mitchel,  0.  M.,  31. 
Mizar  (CUrsie  Majoris),  204. 
Moller,  A.,  129. 
Moon,  the,  10,  24,  65-79,  90,  95, 

148,  228. 

Moscow  Observatory,  132. 
Mouchez,  A.,  161. 
Miiller,  G.,  175,  181. 
Munich  Observatory,  44,  224. 

Napoleon,  67,  127. 


Nasmyth,  J.,  73,  103. 
Nebulae,  30,  31,  207-213,  228. 
Nebular  Hypothesis,  33,  195,  227, 

228,  229,  230,  233. 
Neison  (Nevill),  E.,  73. 
Neisten,  86,  105. 

Neptune,  120,  121,  135,  229,  230. 
Newall,  H.  F.,  205. 
Newcomb,  S.,  27,  64,  78,  89,  94, 

162,  168,   220,   222,  223,  224, 

232. 

Newton,  H.  A.,  140,  141. 
Newton,  Sir  I.,  2,  17,  29,  77. 
Nichol,  J.  P.,  31,  207. 
Nordvig,  L.,  192. 

Olbers,  H.  W.  M.,  19,  20,  69,  98, 
99,  123,  124,  125,  126,  127, 
129,  130,  139,  148,  152,  153. 

Olbers'  comet,  125. 

Olmsted,  D.,  138,  207. 

Ophiuchi  (a),  183. 

Orion,  221. 

Orion  nebula,  10,  33,  207,  208, 
209,  213. 

Orion  stars,  174,  193,  209,  232. 

Orionis  (/c),  209. 

Orionis  (??),  209. 

Orionis  (0),  209. 

Orionis  (U),  181,  182,  186,  187. 

Palisa,  J.,  100. 

Pallas,  19,  99,  101. 

Parallax,  solar,  61,  62,  63,  101. 

Parallax,  stellar,  150-158,  190. 

Paris  Congresses,  161. 

Paris  Observatory,  78,  118,  171. 

Perrine,  C.  D.,  81,  108,  194. 

Perrine's  comet,  136. 

Perrotin,  H.,  86,  91,  100,  114. 

Peck,  W.,  162. 

Persei  (Nova),  192,  193,  194,  195. 

Perseid  meteors,  122,  141. 

Perseus,  192,  221. 

Peters,  C.  H.  F.,  100. 

Peters,  C.  A.   F.,  142,  153,  155, 

202. 
Photography,     astronomical,     54, 

56,57,  59,75,  81,94,  108,  113, 


244 


INDEX. 


136,  158,   160,   161,  172,  175, 

192,  193,    194,   203,  208,  209, 

210,  211,  212. 
Photometry,  176,  177. 
Piazzi,  G.,  19,  20,  98,  150. 
Pickering,  E.   C.,  174,  175,  176, 

177,   181,   182,  183,  185,  193, 

194,  203,  204,  220,  221. 
Pickering,  W.  H.,  75,  76,  81,  91, 

92,  93,  107,  113,  209. 
Plana,  G.,  78,  79. 
Pleiades,  124,  210,  217. 
Pogson,  N.  R.,  142,  180. 
Pole  Star,  205. 
Pollux,  165,  170. 
Pons,  J.  L.,  127. 
Pont^coulant,  79. 
Potsdam    Observatory,    46,    173, 

176. 

Pritchard,  C.,  158,  177. 
Proctor,  R.  A.,  4,  20,  38,  41,  90, 

91,   104,    148,    163,    164,    218, 

219,  220,  231. 
Procyon    (a  Canis   Minor  is),    151, 

203. 
Prominences,    solar,    52,   53,    55, 

64. 

Puiseux,  P.,  75. 
Pulkowa  Observatory,  200. 

Quetelet,  A.,  139. 

Radiant    points,    meteoric,     139, 

144,  145,  146. 
Ranyard,  A.  C.,  106,  146. 
Red  spot  on  Jupiter,  105,  106. 
Regulus  (o  Leonis),  164,  165. 
Relative  parallax,  157. 
Roseau,  Photospherique,  59. 
Resisting  medium,  128. 
Respighi,  L.,  55. 
Reversing  layer,  56,  57. 
Ricco,  A.,  87,  105. 
Rigel  (ft  Orionis),  165,  209. 
Ritchey,  G.,  194. 
Roberts,  A.  W.,  181. 
Roberts,  L,  209,  210. 
Roche,  E.,  109. 
Roman  College  Observatory,  85. 


Rosse,    third   Earl   of,   141,   156, 

207,  208,  218. 
Rosse,  fourth  Earl  of,  77. 
Rotation  of  the  Sun,  58,  59 ;  of 

the  planets,  82,  83,  84,  85,  86, 

87,  104,  111,  112. 
Rowland,  H.  A.,  52. 
Rutherfurd,  L.  M.,  75,  169. 

Sabine,  Sir  E.,  44. 

Safford,  T.  H.,  202. 

Santini,  G.,  159. 

Savary,  R,  30,  199. 

Satellites,  96,  107,  108,  112,  113, 

115,  120,  121,  236. 
Saturn,  20,  21,  22,  97,  103,  108- 

113,  121,  135. 

Schaeberle,  J.  M.,  93,  107,  191, 

203. 

Scheiner,  C.,  44. 
Scheiner,  J.,  166,  174,  176. 
Schiaparelli,   G.   V.,   82,   83,   84, 

85,  86,   87,   91,   92,   114,   141, 
143,    149,   201,  220,  224,  231, 
235 

Schjellerup,  H.,  180. 

Schmidt,  J.  F.  J.,  69,  70,  71,  72, 

73,  104,  179,  180,  189. 
Schonfeld,  E.,  160,  179,  180,  188, 

189. 
Schroter,  J.  H.,    16,  65,   66,  67, 

68,  69,  70,  74,  81,  82,  84,  85, 

86,  87,  97,  99,  153. 
Schwabe,  S.  H.,   18,   43,  44,  46, 

55. 

Schwassman,  A.,  100. 
Secchi,  A.,  52,  54,  55,  60,  72,  90, 

114,  141,  170,  171,  173. 
Secchi's  types  of  stellar  spectra, 

170,  171,  173,   174,   175,    189, 

232. 

See,  T.  J.  J.,  201,  202,  236. 
Seeliger,  H.,  110,  195,  196,  202, 

206,  224,  225. 
Serviss,  G.  P.,  158. 
Sirius  (a  Canis  Majoris),  151,  170, 

173,  188,  202,  225. 
Slipher,  V.  M.,  106,  114,  204. 
Sime,  J.,  27. 


INDEX. 


245 


Sola,  J.  C.,  112. 

Solar  cluster,  221,  222. 

Solar  system,  motion  of,   26,  27, 

167,  168. 

South,  Sir  J.,  198. 
Spectroscopic  binaries,  203,   204, 

205. 

Spencer,  H.,  218. 
Spica  (a  Virginis),  204. 
Sparer,  F.  W.  G.,  45,  46,  54,  59. 
Star-catalogues,    159,    160,    161, 

162, 

Star-clusters,  30,  31,  32,  206,  210. 
Star-drift,  164. 
Star-gauging,  36,  40,  41,  224. 
Stars,  distance  of,  150-158. 
Stars,  distribution  of,  35,  39,  40, 

198-214. 
Stars,   double,   28,    29,    30,    197- 

206. 

Stars,  gaseous,  171,  174. 
Stars,  proper  motion  of,  162,  163, 

164,  165. 

Stars,  radial  motion  of,  165,  166. 
Stars,  temporary,  156,    182,   188- 

196. 

Stars,  triple  and  multiple,  206. 
Stars,  variable,  177-188. 
Stellar  spectra,  169-176,  187,  189, 

190,  191,  193,  194. 
Stellar  universe,  35-42,  214,  215- 

226. 

Stereo-comparator,  100,  101. 
Stokes,  Sir  G.,  50. 
Stone,  E.  J.,  157,  160. 
Stroobant,  P.,  88. 
Struve,  F.  G.  W.,  3,  37,  38,  40, 

42,    128,    151,   153,   200,   214, 

215,  216,  218. 
Struve,  H.,  201. 
Struve,  L.,  27,  163,  167. 
Struve,  0.  W.,  27,  110,  115,  120, 

153,  156,  163,  200,  201. 
Stumpe,  O.,  167. 
Sun,  15,  16,  17,  40,  43-64,  65,  80, 

81,    105,    125,    128,    170,  222, 

228,  229,  230,  237. 
Swift,  L.,  81. 
Swift's  comet,  136. 


Tacchini,  P.,  55,  86,  87. 

Taurus,  217,  221. 

Tempel,  E.,  210. 

Tennyson,  96. 

Tidal  friction,   79,  87,  233,  234, 

235,  236. 

Tisserand,  F.  F.,  146. 
Todd,  D.  P.,  122. 
Trans-Neptunian  planet,  121,  122. 
Trouvelot,  E.,  86,  87. 
Tschermak,  148. 
Tulse  Hill  Observatory,  171. 
Turner,  H.  H.,  194,  224. 
Twining,  A.  C.,  139. 

Upsala  Observatory,  59. 
Uranometria  Argentina,  160. 
Uranus,  11,  20,  22,  23,  97,  113, 

114,   115,  118,  121,  135,  141, 

230. 

Ursa  Major,  162,  164. 
Ursse  Majoris  (5),  182. 
Ursse  Majoris  (|),  199. 

Venus,  18,  84-88,  97,  235,  236. 

Venus,  transits  of,  61,  62,  87. 

Vega  (a  Lyr^e),  151,  165,  170,  172, 
173. 

Very,  F.  W.,  77. 

Vesta,  19,  99,  101,  102. 

Vogel,  H.  C.,  84,  88,  95,  102, 
106,  114,  131,  148,  166,  173, 
174,  175,  183,  184,  185,  190, 
191,  193,  195,  204,  209,  232, 
233,  237. 

Vulcan,  81. 

Washington  Observatory,  96,  223. 
Watson,  J.  C.,  81,  100. 
Webb,  T.  W.,  72,  73,  104. 
Weinek,  L.,  75. 
Weiss,  E.,  142. 
Well's  comet,  134. 
Whewell,  W.,  318. 
Williams,  A.  S.,  110,  193. 
Wilson,  A.,  16. 
Winlock,  J.,  177. 
Winnecke,  F.  A.  T.,  131. 
Witt,  K.  G.,  101. 


246  INDEX. 

Wolf,  Max,  100,   181,    191,  194,     Yerkes  Observatory,  55,  111,  202. 

211.  Young,  C.  A.,  54,  56,  57,  58,  60, 

Wolf,  R.,  44,  45,  188.  87,  114,  190. 
Wolf  and  Rayet,  171. 

Wolf-Rayet  stars,  171,  174.  Zach,  F.  X.,  97,  98,  152. 

Wollaston,  W.  H.,  48.  Zantedeschi,  77. 

Wright,  T.,  34,  110.  Zenger,  85,  88. 

Zollner,  J.  C.  F.,  54,  58,  60,  84, 

Yale  Observatory,  157.  103,  132,  232. 


CORRIGENDA. 

P.    30,  1.    5,  for  "  objects  "  read  "  orbits." 

P.    36,  1.  13,  for  "  unable  "  read  "  able." 

P.    61,  1.  17,  for  "  8".371 "  read  »  8".571." 

P.     63,  1.  21,  for  "  bases "  read  "  gases." 

P.  100,  1.  16,  for  "  Schwussmann  "  read  "  Schwassmann." 

P.  167,  1.  28,  for  "Strumpe"  read  "Stumpe." 

P.  184,  1.  11,  for  " star- variables "  read  "variable  stars." 

P.  199,  1.  23,  for  "2102"  read  "1202." 


THE    END. 


PRINTED  BY  WILLIAM  BLACKWOOD  AND  SONS, 


THIS  BOOK  IS  DUE  ON  THE  LAST  DATE 
STAMPED  BELOW 


AN  INITIAL  FINE  OF  25  CENTS 

WILL  BE  ASSESSED  FOR  FAILURE  TO  RETURN 
THIS  BOOK  ON  THE  DATE  DUE.  THE  PENALTY 
WILL  INCREASE  TO  SO  CENTS  ON  THE  FOURTH 
DAY  AND  TO  $I.OO  ON  THE  SEVENTH  DAY 
OVERDUE. 


tw   « 


•xC     v    1<>3fi 


4Jan'65W(J 


1NTERLIBRARY  LO 


LD  21-100m-7,'33 


YC  22348 


UJ 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  IvIBRARY